Home

PDF ABB ACS550 -01 & ACS550

1. X1 1 10 kohm 1_ SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AM External speed reference 1 0 10 V in 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 JAI2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common lt D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 7 49 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 112 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start fwd If DI1 state is the same as DI2 the drive stops 14 DI2 Start reverse 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Ramp pair selection Activation selects 2nd acc dec ramp pair L 118 DI6 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A Default operation 2 ROTE gt Ready gt 19 connected to 21 a NR Relay output 2 programmable 23 ROZA A Default ier E DIS DI4 Output 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 7 i Reference 53 8202 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable PONS SPEED 26 RO3A x Default spelen j O 1 CONST SPEED 2 1203 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 1 T CONST SPEED 3 1204 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference Al1 Analog ou
2. 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Displs Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter le y Use parameters 3402 3403 3406 and 3407 for example to convert a Group 01 OPERATING DATA parameter such as 0102 sPEED in P 3407 i rpm to the speed of a conveyor driven by the motor in ft min For such a conversion the source values in the figure are the min and max motor speed and the display values are the corresponding min and max conveyor speed Use parameter 3405 to select the proper P 3406 units for the display Note Selecting units does not convert values Parameter is not adi effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT P3402 P 3403 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX PONS Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT ee ONT PUTA DBP FORM i 3404 value Display Range Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter 0 3 32768 32767 0 7 Defines the decimal point location Signed Enter the number of digits desired to the right of the decimal 1 3 1 Sig point 2 3 14 See the table for an example using pi 3 14159 3 3 142 8 BAR METER Specifies a bar meter display 4 3 0 65535 9 DIRECT Decimal point location and units of measure are 5 31 Unsigned identical to the source signal See Group 01 OPERATING DATA 6 314 parameter l
3. x1 1 10kohm 41 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 JAM External ref 1 Manual or Ext ref 2 PID 0 10 v ke 3 AGND Analog input circuit common Note 1 3 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC Manual 0 10V gt speed reference D gt 5 JAI2 Actual signal PID 4 20 mA PID 0 10V z gt 0 100 PID 6 AGND Analog input circuit common setpoint DH H7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 1 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common Note 3 The sensor needs to be powered 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC f See the manufacturer s instructions 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common A connection example of a two wire 12 DCOM Digital input common for all sensor is shown on page 80 13 DI1 Start Stop Hand Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects PID control 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 1 Not used in PID control 16 DIA Constant speed selection 2 Not used in PID control 17 DI5 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 18 DI6 Start Stop PID Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A rx Default operation Note 2 Code 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 0 open 1 connected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable DI3 DI4 Output 23 RO2A x Default operation 0 10 Reference through AT 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 a 0 CONST SPEED 1 1202 25 RO3C Relay output 3 program
4. 295 Table of contents Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Index Contact ABB Product and service inquiries 309 Pr d ct training AA UR pec a eo mee eee og ss 309 Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals 309 Table of contents Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Installation 11 Study these installation instructions carefully before proceeding Failure to observe the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard AN WARNING Before you begin read chapter Safety on page 5 Note The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local laws and regulations ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws and or other regulations Furthermore if the recommendations given by ABB are not followed the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover Installation flow chart The installation of the ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive follows the outline below The steps must be carried out in the order shown At the right of each step are references to the detailed information needed for the correct installation of the drive Task PREPARE for installation v PREPA
5. Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 56 ACS550 User s Manual Clock Set mode In the Clock Set mode you can show or hide the clock change date and time display formats set the date and time enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control The Assistant Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock when the panel is not powered by the drive How to show or hide the clock change display formats set the date and time and enable or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing Rum if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC U MAIN MENU 1 by pressing 7 repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Clock Set mode by selecting CLOCK SET on the menu with keys LOC UTIME DATE 1 CLOCK VISIBILITY A and XV and pressing SS CG RR DATE FORMAT SET TIME SET DATE EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 To show hide the clock select CLOCK VISIBLILITY on the menu press LOC UCLOCK VISIB 1 lect Show clock Hide clock and press lt or if you want to return sr selec p wie EH Hide cloc to the previous display withou
6. zi bus voltage data parameter 100 rating parameter 6 current ref parameter 129 temperature data parameter 100 magnetizing time parameter OR ee PA 128 weight TAO Phe lah AP ESSERE NEUE dahl Pad kan a E 288 overvoltage fault code 245 drive ontime data parameters 102 undervoltage fault code 245 voltage stabilizer parameter 138 E deceleration earth fault parameter group srs KAG seg zavit 131 fault code scis Ka longa ERG 246 at aux start PFC parameter 186 parameter a aa AA LER 141 emergency time parameter 132 earthing ramp select parameter 131 see ground ramp shape parameter 131 ramp time PFC parameter 186 ramp zero select parameter 132 time parameter 131 default values listing for macros 82 listing for parameters 85 derating adjustment example 262 altitude s coca eee band Va eo Kobe 262 single phase supply 262 switching freguency 262 temperature 262 derivation time PID parameter 161 derivation time parameter 133 device overtemperature fault code 245 Index Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com E
7. 272 IEC EN 61800 3 291 definition 293 IEC EN 61800 5 1 291 sensor type parameter 151 ULS08C oid eed veles pa a alie 291 sensorless vector control mode 98 UL marking 292 serial 1 error fault code 28 200 start serial 1 error fault code 247 parameter group 128 sana communication aux motor PFC parameters 176 see EFB embedded fieldbus SU MOOG som gee Ea cde 125 see EFB drive parameters Control BA GO verus eA ie idi 225 see FBA fieldbus adapter be magnetizing tine parame TALI 128 see FBA drive parameters magnetizing time parameter delay PFC parameter 185 serial number 12 13 delay parameter 130 service E 309 frequency PFC parameters 176 setpoint maximum PID parameter 163 function parameter 128 setpoint minimum PID parameter 163 inhibit parameter 129 setpoint select PID parameter 162 select enable source parameter 123 shock stress testing 290 torgue boost current parameter 129 short circuit fault code 245 start mode single phase supply automatic PE a ABT AE BA Dette SOMA JE NA 128 CONNECH ON 4
8. Drive Heat loss Air flow ACS550 x1 Frame size W BTU hr m3 h ft min 031A 4 R3 457 1561 134 79 038A 4 R3 562 1919 134 79 044A 4 R4 667 2278 280 165 045A 4 R3 667 2278 134 79 059A 4 R4 907 3098 280 165 072A 4 R4 1120 3825 280 165 077A 4 R5 1295 4423 250 147 078A 4 R4 1295 4423 280 165 087A 4 R4 1440 4918 280 165 096A 4 R5 1440 4918 250 147 097A 4 R4 1440 4918 280 165 124A 4 R6 1940 6625 405 238 125A 4 R5 1940 6625 350 205 157A 4 R6 2310 7889 405 238 180A 4 R6 2810 9597 405 238 195A 4 R6 3050 10416 405 238 246A 4 R6 3050 10416 405 238 00467918 xls B Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 285 Air flow 500 600 V drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 500 600 V drives Drive Heat loss Air flow ACS550 U1 Frame size BTU hr m3 h ft min 02A7 6 R2 52 178 88 52 03A9 6 R2 73 249 88 52 06A1 6 R2 127 434 88 52 09A0 6 R2 172 587 88 52 011A 6 R2 232 792 88 52 017A 6 R2 337 1151 88 52 022A 6 R3 457 1561 134 79 027A 6 R3 562 1919 134 79 032A 6 R4 667 2278 280 165 041A 6 R4 907 3098 280 165 052A 6 R4 1117 3815 280 165 062A 6 R4 1357 4634 280 165 077A 6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 099A 6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 125A 6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 144A 6 R6 2310 7889 405 238 00467918 xls B
9. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys AN and S v 7 Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value LOC UPAR EDIT 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 WIRE 2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE To save the new value press X refe CANCEL To cancel the new value and keep the original press CZ LOC PARAMETERS 9901 LANGUAGE 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 WIRE 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 EDIT Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 50 How to select the monitored signals ACS550 User s Manual Step Action Display 1 You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how they LOC UPAR EDIT are displayed with Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 49 for 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM detailed instructions on changing parameter values OUTPUT FREQ By default the display shows three signals The particular default signals 103 depend on the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO For macros whose CANCEL 00 00 SAVE default value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE is 1 VECTOR SPEED the LOC UPAR EDIT default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED otherwise 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The
10. 106 feedback status at history parameter 106 multiplier PID parameter 163 time of history parameters 106 on ABB manuals 309 torque at history parameter 106 select PID parameter eorr 163 voltage at history parameter 106 field weakening point 271 words data parameters 105 fieldbus fault display see EFB embedded fieldbus alarm aeter Ee mb e 244 see EFB drive parameters fault KA NG dios eor dete tpi ne tud 243 see FBA fieldbus adapter fault names 244 see FBA drive parameters FB actual signals parameter group 104 fieldbus adapter FBA see FBA protocol listing 221 see FBA drive parameters FBA fieldbus adapter 221 fieldbus embedded actual values 223 see EFB analog output control activate 227 see EFB drive parameters comm fault response 228 firmware configuration 225 panel Versions csse o yer vo ERE IO 41 45 control word CAR 222 version parameter 60 146 control word ABB drives 232 first environment diagnostics rc 229 C2 compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 293 drive feedback rnm 228 C2 motor cable length 272 fieldbus control activate 225 sle RE ON 293 i
11. 205 A ABB feedback on ABB manuals 309 product and service inquiries 309 product trainihg 309 standard default macro 72 acceleration deceleration parameter group 131 at aux stop PFC parameter 186 compensation parameter 134 ramp select parameter 131 ramp shape parameter 131 ramp time PFC parameter 186 ramp zero select parameter 132 time parameter 131 activate external PID parameter 168 actual input PID parameters 164 actual max PID parameters 164 actual min PID parameters 164 actual values mapping FBA generic profile 241 scaling EFBcomm 197 scaling FBA comm 228 scaling FBA ABB drives profile 239 scaling FBA generic profile 241 alarm CODES TEC 250 codes Basic Control Panel 253 display enable parameter 124 listing i eee gem emma 250 words data parameters 105 alternate macro 74 altitude deran oe hee ES bende dee KG NEA 262 environment limit 289 shipping limit 289 ambient conditions 289 297 ambient temperature deratingi esta apa Pb sek EY 262 en
12. 281 remOVe iii kisi ee Lahad revi Naa 16 dimensions teplace nisn a ae HAGGANG orig NANG 30 drive mounting 286 cover top see hood drive outside 287 CRC errors count parameter 172 DIP switches 20 22 crimp on ring lugs 269 direction control parameter 108 critical speeds avoiding direction of rotation parameter group 136 Assistant Control Panel 43 47 high parameters 136 Basic Control Panel 62 64 low parameters 136 display format PID parameter 161 select parameter 136 disposal leer et ERE Re 290 C Tick marking 291 download parameter sets current application i i psa aman REM URL ys 58 at fault history parameter 106 TUN SOs cnc Rupe Ee ER Tes 58 data parameter 100 User Sets adandana ia T expe ERA 58 max limit parameter 125 drive measurement fault code 246 EFB comm installation 190 rating code 13 FBA module installation 224 id fault code 247 D MOYNING ija Mae NGO ed Aa tU RD dad 17 DC mounting dimensions 286 brake time parameter 129 outside dimensions
13. 255 HeatsInK 4 5 or E dish A ei RC aha Aye kag dete MU ec a Lens 255 Main fan replacement 00 cece 256 Internal enclosure fan replacement 257 Capacitors voe ne eee sae qe a Greets uie eode pedit 258 Control panel ref aae he ia ak Deed ated ERR EN ERE ER RITE Den 258 Technical data BG ios ntact Messa Bing eu ani qe Eu Nue ng eae EE nates 259 Input power connections s aeaee eee 263 Motor connections 271 Brake components 00 ccc eect ete 277 Control connections 281 Efi CIBDI CV Naat ple ah AN DAN rap eater e ea wae Pru A coe rc RA P cere 282 ODOMA sS css tet kN ANN PA 283 Dimensions and weights 2 00 64 hA ee eee bad ERES Ree awa RR 286 Degrees of protection 36 1a Pre sr dob eS ewe bI EY EU syed da 289 Ambient conditions cule eR REY Red ARR RO RAE 289 Materials 124 Ba hha KATA oe ete DR e e td Ac oe ved y 290 Applicable standards aaea 291 GE Making s 3 92 bad kaaa een a Dae ee bead gaged Rees SS 291 C Tick MARKING eT EEA LII 291 UL CSA markings cd os tira zobi We oe Wag EROS CO wie Pe RE Y gt KA on e 292 IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions 292 Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 293 Liability MMS ss sesh vod cece t hori Zo ee tA Reg baa lad wis adele BER ANE do 294 Product protection inthe USA
14. Check the installation See the checklist in chapter nstallation page 29 SAFETY The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions given in chapter Safety must be followed during the start up procedure The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 32 ACS550 User s Manual Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start up ID Run is essential only in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy POWER UP Apply input power REM 00 z The Basic Control Panel powers up into the Output mode m OUTPUT FWD The Assistant Control Panel asks if you want to run the Start REN EN quem up Assistant If you press 25 the Start up Assistant is not use ehe crane up run and you can continue with manual start up in a similar asm Ut manner as described below for the Basic Control Panel NO EXIT 00 00 OK MANUAL ENTRY OF START UP DATA Group 99 START UP DATA If you have an Assistant Control Panel select the language REM UPAR EDIT the Basic Control Panel
15. Soft key 2 Function depends on the context The text in the lower right corner of the LCD display indicates the function Up Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display Increments a value if a parameter is selected Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster Down Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display Decrements a value if a parameter is selected Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive Help Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed The information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display STOP Stops the drive in local control START Starts the drive in local control Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 43 Status line The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive LOC J LOC UMAIN MENU 1 0 DQ No Field Alternatives Significance 1 Control location LOC Drive control is local that is fro
16. setpoint select parameter setpoint source EFB comm activate setpoint source FBA comm activate setpoint data parameter sleep delay parameter sleep level parameter sleep selection parameter trim mode parameter trim scale parameter units actual signal parameter wake up delay parameter wake up deviation parameter PID controller advanced set up basic set up planning EFB comm power consumption MWh maintenance trigger data parameter previous faults history parameters process PID sets parameter groups process variables data parameter product inguiries training profiles EFBcomm proportional gain parameter 139 305 protection circuit required w chopper 280 disconnecting device disconnecting means 263 enclosure standard 291 environmental 289 motor thermal 273 PT100 temperature sensor 151 PTC temperature sensor 151 R radiation limits conducted EN 0180023 pina bade puedes Bnd boat 275 ramp pair accel decel parameter 131 range listing for parameters
17. 20 warning about screws at F1 F2 21 J jogging activation parameter 108 K keypad see control panel keypad reference select parameter 109 kWh counter data parameter 100 intake energy data parameter 103 L label serial number 12 TYPO code iva zo i deem tee he 12 language parameter 98 LED on Assistant Control Panel 42 243 244 on drive body 20 243 244 liability limits 294 limits parameter group 125 load curve see user load curve _ see IT system load freguency see user load curve incompatible software fault code 247 load torque see user load curve information parameter group 146 loading package version parameter 146 input power LOC local control cable wire requirements Leet tae 265 indication on Assistant Control Panel 43 disconnecting device disconnecting means 263 indication on Basic Control Panel 62 _ Specifications 263 local control mode lock parameter 122 input power connection lock is RE LETVE n seris ae BO GG bee control panel access IP54 30 UJS TOI USD a hae Raat ERa Mela Ae ies ate drive control at local control panel 122 terminal size 268 parameters 121
18. Fieldbus 163 100 reference Max ref 1 63 Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Actual Value 239 As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 Actual Values are words containing drive values Actual Value scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the resolution of the selected drive parameter Except as noted for ACT1 and ACT2 below scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in section Complete parameter list on page 85 For example Feedback integer Parameter resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 196 1 Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows ABB Drives profile Contents Scaling ACT1 ACTUAL SPEED 20000 20000 par 1105 par 1105 ACT2 TORQUE 10000 10000 100 100 Virtual addresses of the drive control The virtual address area of the drive control is allocated as follows Control Word Reference 1 REF1 Reference 2 REF2 Status Word Actual Value 1 ACT1 O a R wl N gt Actual Value 2 ACT2 Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 240
19. Maximum cable length for 600 V drives Operational limits 1 4 kHz 8 12 kHz Frame size m ft m ft R2 100 330 100 330 R3 R4 200 660 100 330 R6 300 980 150 490 2 42 kHz switching frequency is not available WARNING Using a motor cable longer than specified in the table above may cause permanent damage to the drive Motor thermal protection According to regulations the motor must be protected against thermal overload and the current must be switched off when overload is detected The drive includes a motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current when necessary Depending on a drive parameter value see Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS the function either monitors a calculated temperature value based on a motor thermal model or an actual temperature indication given by motor temperature sensors The user can tune the thermal model further by feeding in additional motor and load data The most common temperature sensors are motor sizes IEC180 225 thermal switch e g Klixon motor sizes IEC200 250 and larger PTC or PT100 Ground fault protection ACS550 internal fault logic detects ground faults in the drive motor or motor cable This fault logic is NOT a personal safety or fire protection feature can be disabled using parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT could be tripped by leakage currents input power to ground associated with long high capacitanc
20. Setting the timed functions Selecting the timed start stop control for external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting timed EXT1 EXT2 control Activation of timed constant speed 1 Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 1001 1002 1102 1201 Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 53 Name Description Set parameters Selecting timed function status indicated through relay output RO 1401 Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 control 4027 Protections Setting the current and torque limits 2003 2017 Output signals Selecting the signals indicated through relay output RO Selecting the signals indicated through analog output AO Setting the minimum maximum scaling and inversion Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 54 ACS550 User s Manual Changed Parameters mode In the Changed Parameters mode you can view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default values change these parameters start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view and edit changed parameters Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing EL if you are in the Output mode
21. 143 number of trials parameter 143 overcurrent parameter 143 trial time parameter 143 undervoltage parameter 143 resolution listing for parameters 85 resonance avoiding select parameter 136 revolution counter data parameter 102 revolutions mechanical data parameter 102 ring Ug Sa wh ee BANA YN teen ok ata 269 Index Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 306 ACS550 User s Manual RS 232 speed baud rate parameter 172 and direction signed data parameter 100 parity parameter 172 at fault history parameter 106 station id parameter 172 data parameter 100 RS 232 counts max limit parameter 125 buffer overruns parameter 172 min limit parameter 125 CRC errors parameter 172 speed control frame errors parameter 172 parameter group 133 ok messages parameter 172 acceleration compensation parameter 134 parity errors parameter 172 automatic tuning parameter 133 134 RS485 comm 190 derivation time parameter 133 run enable source select parameter 121 integra
22. Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end 8 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals gi lj table on page 22 m Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 28 ACS550 User s Manual Wiring IP54 UL type 12 enclosure with conduit 1 Depends on frame size RT R4 Remove and discard the cable seals where conduit will be installed The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive Rb and R6 Use punch to create holes for conduit connections as needed 2 For each conduit run install water tight conduit connectors not supplied PR we P5016 Route the power wiring through the conduit Route the motor wiring through the conduit Strip the wires m ME de uM Connect the power motor and ground wires to the drive terminals 4 Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable P5007 size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 269 7 Route the control cable through the conduit 8 Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail 9 Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end 10
23. IP ED maximum frequency A longer time provides a softer transition at each end of the slope The shape becomes an s curve IB 4 Rule of thumb 1 5 is a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the T acceleration ramp time x A 0 0 LINEAR Specifies linear acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 0 1 1000 0 S CURVE Specifies s curve acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 2 See 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 Used also as jogging acceleration time See 1004 JOGGING SEL 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2 e See 2203 DECELER TIME 1 Used also as jogging deceleration time See 1004 JOGGING SEL 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2 See 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 A 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 B 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 132 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 2208 EMERG DEC TIME Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency See parameter 2109 EMERG STOP SEL e Ramp is linear 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 Defines control for forcing the ramp input to 0 O NOT SEL Not selected 1 DI1 Defines di
24. Speed control EXT1 Selecting the source for the speed reference If AI1 is used Setting analog input AI1 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits Setting the speed frequency limits Setting the acceleration and deceleration times 1103 1301 1303 3001 1104 1105 2001 2002 2007 2008 2202 2203 Speed control Selecting the source for the speed reference 1106 EXT2 If AI1 is used Setting analog input A11 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Torque control Selecting the source for the torque reference 1106 If AI1 is used Setting analog input Al1 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Setting the torque ramp up and ramp down times 2401 2402 PID control Selecting the source for the process reference 1106 If AI1 is used Setting analog input A11 limits scale inversion 1301 1303 3001 Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Setting the speed reference limits Setting the source and limits for the process actual value 2001 2002 2007 2008 4016 4018 4019 Start Stop control Selecting the source for start and stop signals of the two external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 Defining the direction control Defining the start and stop modes Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 1001 1002 1102 1003 2101 2103 1601 Timed functions
25. AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 loss Analog input value is less than AI2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 Check for and correct Source and connection for analog input Parameter settings for AI2 FAULT LIMIT 3022 and 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION MOT OVERTEMP Motor is too hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS parameters 10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check Communication lines and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Parameters in Group 10 START STOP DIR and Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is REM Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 246 ACS550 User s Manual Fault code Fault name in panel Description and recommended corrective action 11 ID RUN FAIL The Motor ID Run was not completed successfully Check for and correct Motor connections Motor parameters 9905 9909 12 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall Motor is operating in the stall region Check for and corr
26. PNP connection source NPN connection sink x1 X1 10 24V 10 24V m 11 GND a 111 GND L 12 DCOM 12 DCOM 13 DI1 13 DI 14 DI2 14 DI2 15 DI3 15 DI3 16 DI4 16 DIA 17 DI5 17 DI5 18 DI6 18 DI6 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 ACS550 User s Manual Install the wiring Checking motor and motor cable insulation to input power For this test make sure that motor cables are NOT connected to the A WARNING Check the motor and motor cable insulation before connecting the drive drive 1 Complete motor cable connections to the motor but NOT to the drive output terminals U2 V2 W2 2 At the drive end of the motor cable measure the insulation resistance between each motor cable phase and Protective Earth PE Apply a voltage of 1 kV DC and verify that D resistance is greater than 1 Mohm se Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 25 Wiring IP21 UL type 1 enclosure with cables 1 Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit gland box See section Conduit Gland kit on page 18 Install the cable clamps for the power motor cables On the input power cable strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual wires On the motor cable strip the sheathing back far enough to expose the copper wire screen so that the scree
27. Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 286 Dimensions and weights ACS550 User s Manual The dimensions and mass for the ACS550 depend on the frame size and enclosure type If unsure of the frame size first find the Type code on the drive labels see sections Type code on page 13 and Drive labels on page 12 Then look up that type code in the rating tables see chapter Technical data page 259 to determine the frame size A complete set of dimensional drawings for ACS550 drives is located in ACS550 Technical Reference Manual Mounting dimensions w See detail A 495 56 H SeedetalB P d k Detail A Detail B X0032 IP21 UL type 1 and IP54 UL type 12 Dimensions for each frame size map R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in wi 98 0 3 9 98 0 3 9 160 6 3 160 6 3 238 9 4 263 10 4 w2 m 98 0 39 98 0 39 m H1 318 12 5 418 164 473 186 578 22 8 588 23 2 675 26 6 a 5 5 0 2 5 5 0 2 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 9 0 0 35 b 10 0 0 4 10 0 0 4 13 0 0 5 13 0 0 5 14 0 0 55 14 0 0 55 c 5 5 0 2 5 5 0 2 8 0 0 3 8 0 0 3 8 5 0 3 8 5 0 3 d 5 5 0 2 5 5 0 2 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 6 5 0 25 9 0 0 35 1 Center to center dimension Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 8
28. Use double shielded twisted pair cable Use one individually shielded pair for each signal Do not use a common return for different analog signals Digital cables Recommendation for digital signal runs A double shielded cable is the best alternative but single shielded twisted multi pair cable is also usable Control panel cable If the control panel is connected to the drive with a cable use only Category 5 Patch ethernet cable The maximum length that is tested to meet EMC specifications is 3 m 9 8 ft Longer cables are susceptible to electromagnetic noise and must be user tested to verify that EMC requirements are met Where long runs are required especially for runs longer than about 12 m 40 ft use a RS232 RS485 converter at each end and run RS485 cable Drive s control connection terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s control terminals Control Frame size 1 Maximum wire size Torque mm AWG N m lb ft All 1 5 16 0 4 0 3 1 Values given for solid wires For stranded wires the maximum size is 1 mm2 Efficiency Approximately 98 at nominal power level Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Cooling 283 Cooling specifications Method Internal fan flow direction from bottom to top Requirement Free space above and below
29. 096 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference A correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 1 l l l 100 4 HARS l i AH input signal 100 0 5 par 1108 gt 0 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference A correction coefficient 200 ee I l l 100 4 Sa l l I A Al1 input signal 096 b 096 50 100 Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 238 Reference handling ACS550 User s Manual Use Group 10 START STOP DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives profile Parameter Value setting Al reference scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Max ref l l I l I Fieldbus Resultant ref reference 163 100 Max ref 100 1 63 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE Max ref Fieldbus 163 100 Resultant ref 100 163 reference i i l l l l l l Max ref 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Max ref Resultant ref
30. 1 For Modbus the protocol reference can depend on the profile used hence two columns in these tables One column refers to the ABB Drives profile selected when parameter 5305 0 ABB DRV LIM or 5305 2 ABB DRV FULL The other column refers to the DCU profile selected when parameter 5305 1 DCU PROFILE See section ABB control profiles technical data on page 209 The reference provides direction control a negative reference provides reverse rotation Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 194 ACS550 User s Manual Input reference select Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 8 COMM Reference set selection by fieldbus 40001 bit 11 40031 bit 5 1103 REF1 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 1 by fieldbus 40002 1106 REF2 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 2 by fieldbus 40003 Reference Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the following as appropriate Modbus Register 40002 in section Modbus protocol technical data on page 201 Reference s
31. 1 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds WARNING Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum value specified for the particular drive The drive and the internal chopper are not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance Symbols Ryin Minimum allowed resistance of the braking resistor Rmax Maximum resistance allowed if maximum braking torque is necessary Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 280 ACS550 User s Manual P Duty cycle based resistor power rating in deceleration braking where x is ONmax time Installing and wiring resistors All resistors must be installed outside the drive module in a place where they can dissipate heat the resistor is very hot Materials near the brake resistor must be non flammable WARNING The surface temperature of the resistor is very high and air flowing from Provide protection from accidental contact with the resistor To ensure that the input fuses protect the resistor cable use resistor cables with the same rating as used for the power input to the drive The maximum length of the resistor cable s is 10 m 33 ft See section Power connection diagrams on page 20 for the resistor cable connection points Mandatory circuit protection The following setup is essential for safety it interrupts the main supply in fault
32. 110 24v Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC Reverses torque direction in M1 GND Auxiliary voltage output common torque control L 12 DCOM Digital input common for all LU 13 DI1 Start stop Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Forward reverse Activation reverses direction 15 DI3 Speed torgue control Activation selects torgue control L 16 DI4 Constant speed 1 1202 L 117 DI5 Ramp pair selection Activate to select 2nd acc dec ramp pair _ __ 18 DI6 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable Note 2 20 RO1A Default operation The sensor needs to be powered 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 See the manufacturer s instructions 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable NA connection example of a two wire 23 RO2A x Default operation sensor is shown on page 80 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 26 RO3A Default operation 27 RO3B Fault 1 2225 connected to 27 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Two analog references Al1 2 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Start stop and direction DI1 2 Speed torque control DI3 Constant speed selection DIA Relay output 2 Running or Ramp pair 1 2 selection DI5 Runenable DI6 Analog output AO2 Current Sp Alt 0 10V Relay output 1 Ready Q y AI2 0 4 20 mA Relay
33. 14 DI4 5 6 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using D14 DI5 and DI6 e See above D11 2 3 for code 15 18 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Selects Constant Speed 1 when Timed Function is active See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 19 TIMED FUN1 amp 2 Selects a constant speed depending on the state of Timed Functions 1 8 2 See parameter 1209 1 DI1 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input D11 Inverse operation Digital input de activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input See above 7 DI1 2 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 and DI2 Inverse operation uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DI1 DI2 Function 1 1 No constant speed 0 1 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 0 O Constant speed 3 1204 8 DI2 3 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI3 See above DI1 2 INV for code 9 DI3 4 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and D14 See above DI1 2 INV for code 10 DI4 5 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and DI5 See above DI1 2 INV for code 11 DI5 6 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 See above DI1 2 INV for code 12 DI1 2 3 INV Selects on
34. Applies only when at least one auxiliary constant speed motor is running Default value is 0 Example An ACS550 operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels As water consumption increases first one constant speed pump operates then the second As flow increases the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely match the output pressure When the first auxiliary pump operates increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 When two auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 When three auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 176 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference e Applies only when at least two auxiliary constant speed motors ar
35. 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS Status of the three digital inputs Status is displayed as a binary number 1 indicates that the input is activated 0 indicates that the input is deactivated 0119 DI 4 6 STATUS Status of the three digital inputs See parameter 0118 Di 1 3 STATUS Ic a Di 1 DI2 DI3 0120 Al 1 The relative value of analog input 1 in 96 0121 Al 2 The relative value of analog input 2 in 96 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Status of the three relay outputs 1indicates that the relay is energized 0 indicates that the relay is de energized 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Status of the three relay outputs See parameter 0122 RELAY 1 STATUS RELAY 2 STATUS RELAY 3 STATUS 0124 AO 1 The analog output 1 value in milliamperes 0125 AO 2 The analog output 2 value in milliamperes 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT The PID controller 1 output value in 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT The PID controller 2 output value in 0128 PID 1 SETPNT The PID 1 controller setpoint signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0129 PID 2 SETPNT The PID 2 controller setpoint signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0130 PID 1 FBK The PID 1 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0131 PID 2 FBK The PID 2 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID param
36. 140 ext comm module parameter group 171 history parameter group 106 command words data parameters 104 CODES AA AAP 244 config file CPI firmware revision parameter 171 comm failure EFB 196 config file id revision parameter 171 current at history parameter 106 config file revision parameter 171 digital input status at history parameter 106 fault function parameter 142 FBA COMM 2 38 ecu RAS EA ETATS 228 fault time parameter 142 frequency at history parameter 106 fieldbus appl program revision parameter 171 NISO ka nana 20 a date d LANANG 250 fieldbus CPI firmware revision parameter 171 last history parameter 106 fieldbus parameter refresh parameter 171 listirigzs el en ere ae RR RN 244 fieldbus parameters 171 logging Assistant Control Panel 55 fieldbus status parameter 171 mode Assistant Control Panel 43 243 244 fieldbus type parameter 171 mode Basic Control Panel 63 243 244 protocol select parameter 187 previous history parameter 106 relay output word data parameter 101 eset Tian Cob NAA a tl os ea LA 249 status words data parameters 104 reset select parameter 121 values data parameter 101 speed at history parameter
37. 3 4 The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified in The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual section Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 272 for the frame size and switching frequency in use WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radio inference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required Second environment drives of category C3 1 The internal EMC filter is connected 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 4 The motor cable length does not exceed the allowed maximum length specified in The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual section Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 272 for the frame size and switching frequency in use Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 294 ACS550 User s Manual WARNING A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low voltage public network which supplies domestic premises Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT ungrounded systems The supply network becomes connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive Note It is not
38. 85 ratings sedere der e ee a e 259 reference select parameter group 109 corrections for parameter values 110 keypad control parameter 109 maximum parameters 111 minimum parameters 111 mode Basic Control Panel 66 select source parameter 109 step PFC parameters 175 reference scaling EFB ABB drives profile 218 FBA ABB drives profile 236 FBA generic profile 240 reference setting Assistant Control Panel 48 Basic Control Panel 66 regulator by pass control parameter 185 relative humidity environment limit 289 shipping limit 289 relay output parameter group 116 activation condition parameters 116 off delay parameters 117 on delay parameters 117 status data parameter 101 relays specifications 281 REM remote control indication on Assistant Control Panel 43 indication on Basic Control Panel 62 remove COVEr 16 reset automatic parameter group 143 analog input less than min parameter 143 delay time parameter 143 external fault parameter
39. 9802 COMM PROT SEL Group 50 ENCODER Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG parameters After selecting a macro you can make additional parameter changes manually with the control panel You enable application macros by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO By default 1 ABB STANDARD is the enabled macro The following sections describe each of the application macros and provide a connection example for each macro The last section in this chapter Macro default values for parameters lists the parameters that the macros change and the default values established by each macro Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 72 ABB Standard macro This is the default ma ACS550 User s Manual cro It provides a general purpose 2 wire I O configuration with three 3 constant speeds Parameter values are the default values defined in section Complete parameter list on page 85 Connection example X1 1 10 kohm41 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 JAM External frequency reference 1 0 10 v ia 3 JAGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 AI Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 J
40. Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI2 DI2 activated Reverse de activated Forward 3 DI1P 2P Three wire Start Stop Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse Start is through a normally open push button connected to digital input D11 In order to start the drive the digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1 Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI2 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 4 DITP 2P 3 Three wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons as described for DI1P 2P Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI3 DI3 activated Reverse de activated Forward 5 DI1P 2P 3P Start Forward Start Reverse and Stop Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse Start Forward command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input D11 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1 Start Reverse command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI2 In order to sta
41. Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 167 Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Parameters of this group belong to PID parameter set 2 The operation of parameters 4101 4126 is analogous with set 1 parameters 4001 4026 PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Code Description 4101 See 4001 4026 4126 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 168 ACS550 User s Manual Group 42 EXT TRIM PID This group defines the parameters used for the second PID controller PID2 which is used for the External Trimming PID The operation of parameters 4201 4221 is analogous with Process PID set 1 PID1 parameters 4001 4021 Code Description 4201 4221 See 4001 4021 4228 ACTIVATE Defines the source for enabling the external PID function Requires 4230 TRIM MODE O NOT SEL O NOT SEL Disables external PID control 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the digital input enables external PID control De activating the digital input disables external PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control See DI1 above 7 DRIVE RUN Defines the start command as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the start command drive is
42. Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 86 ACS550 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User 0119 Di 4 6 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0120 A1 0 0 100 096 0 1 0121 A12 0 0 100 0 0 1 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0124 AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0125 02 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT 1000 0 1000 0 0 1 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT 100 0 100 0 0 1 0128 PID 1 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0129 PID 2 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0130 PID 1 FBK Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0131 PID 2 FBK Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 65535 1 0 0135 COMM VALUE 1 32768 32767 1 0 0136 COMM VALUE 2 32768 32767 1 0 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 1 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 1 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 1 0140 IRUN TIME 0 00 499 99 kh 0 01 kh 0 00 kh 0141 MWH COUNTER 0 9999 MWh 1 MWh 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR 0 65535 Mrev 1 Mrev 0 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI 0 65535 days 1 day 0 0144 DRI
43. Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8110 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D 8111 START FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary motor See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor starts if Two auxiliary motors are running ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8111 1 Hz Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8111 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 177 Code Description 8112 LOW FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor stops if Only one the first auxiliary motor is running f Hz ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit A 8112 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8112 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D P8109 ia After the first auxiliary motor stops Output frequency increases by the value P 8112 1 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 AN n n effect the output of the speed regulated motor increases to P 8112 1 F a TT NIS MIN E B compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor See the figure where MAXI gt gt A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 Low FREQ 1 P 8116 B Output frequency decrease during
44. This function allows the highest possible switching 12 kHz Deus BOIS seS par 2606 frequency to be used based on operating conditions Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic 8kHz 7 Drive noise l temperature O OFF The function is disabled A KHZ i0 8 83g 1 ON The switching frequency is limited according to the figure 80 C 90 C 100 C T 2608 ISLIP COMP RATIO Sets gain for slip compensation in e A squirrel cage motor slips under load Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for the slip e Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ O No slip compensation 1 200 Increasing slip compensation 100 means full slip compensation 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING This parameter introduces a random component to the switching frequency Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity The random component has an average of 0 Hz It is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ This parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 12 kHz O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 2619 DC STABILIZER Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer The DC stabilizer is used in scalar control mode to prevent possible voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network In case of voltage variation the drive tunes the frequency refe
45. e e ignore the error situation report the situation as an alarm report the situation as a fault Red Faults The drive signals that it has detected a severe error or fault by LI LI e e e The fault code on the control panel display is temporary Pressing any of the following keys removes gis FO O O 8 the fault message MENU ENTER UP or DOWN key enabling the red LED on the drive LED is either steady on or blinking showing the steady red status LED on the control panel if attached to the drive setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter 0305 to 0307 overriding the control panel display with the display LOC FAULT of a fault code in the Fault mode figures on the right FAULT 8 AI1 LOSS stopping the motor if it was on 00 00 FWD Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 244 ACS550 User s Manual The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and the fault is still active Flashing green Alarms For less severe errors called alarms the diagnostic display is advisory For these situations the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something unusual In these situations the drive flashes the green LED on the drive does not apply to alarms that arise from control panel operation errors flashes the green LED on the contro
46. gt SW Bit12 1 OPERATION 1 C D ENABLED SW Bit2 1 A CW Bit5 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111 L i e Bit 4 1 KEY RFG OUTPUT State D ENABLED mm State change Tu B lt CW Bit6 0 maa Path described in example CW xxxx x1xx xx11 1111 CW CONTROL WORD gt Leos SW STATUS WORD RFG ACCELERATOR RFG Ramp Function Generator ENABLED Param 0104 CURRENT C lt f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ CW xxxx x1xx x111 1111 n Speed i e Bit 6 1 Indicates the features not in ABB DRV LIM OPERATING SW Bit8 1 This state transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source e g digital input D lt Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 218 ACS550 User s Manual Reference scaling ABB Drives and DCU profiles The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives and DCU profiles ABB Drives and DCU profiles Reference Range MA Scaling Remarks ype REF1 32767 Speed or 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by mg frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 32767 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speed or 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by jug frequency 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 32767 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 cor
47. l l l l l ACT2 MINIMUM Sets the minimum value for ACT2 e See 4018 ACT MINIMUM 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM Source signal Sets the maximum value for ACT2 e See 4018 ACT MINIMUM 4022 SLEEP SELECTION Defines the control for the PID sleep function O NOT SEL Disables the PID sleep control function 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function Activating the digital input activates the sleep function De activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function See DI1 above 7 INTERNAL Defines the output rpm frequency process reference and process actual value as the control for the PID sleep function Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function De activating the digital input activates the sleep function Activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function See DI1 INV above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 165 Code Description 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL
48. nominal torque Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 112 ACS550 User s Manual Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS This group defines a set of constant speeds In general You can program up to 7 constant speeds ranging from 0 500 Hz or 0 30000 rpm Values must be positive No negative speed values for constant speeds Constant speed selections are ignored if the torque control is active or the process PID reference is followed or the drive is in local control mode or PFC Pump Fan Control is active Note Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so called fault speed which may be activated if the control signal is lost For example see parameters 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3002 PANEL COMM ERR and 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Code Description 1201 CONST SPEED SEL Defines the digital inputs used to select Constant Speeds See general comments in introduction O NOT SEL Disables the constant speed function 1 DI1 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input D11 Digital input activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DI2 DI6 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI2 DI6 See above 7 DI1 2 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 and DI2 Uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 Di de activated
49. s screen the lower the radiated emission level The following figure shows an example of an effective construction for example lflex Servo FD 780 CP Lappkabel or MCCMK NK Cables Insulation jacket Inner insulator L2 80 Braided metallic screen L3 EN 61800 3 compliant motor cables The most efficient EMC filtering can be achieved by following these rules Motor cables must have an effective screen as described in section Effective motor cable screens on page 275 Motor cable screen wires must be twisted together into a bundle the bundle length must be less than five times its width and connected it to the terminal marked at the bottom right hand corner of the drive At the motor end the motor cable screen must be earthed 360 degrees with an EMC cable gland or the screen wires must be twisted together into a bundle not longer than five times its width and connected to the PE terminal of the motor See section Motor cable length for 400 V drives columns EMC limits on page 272 to check the maximum motor cable lengths and the need for filters for 400 V drives for IEC EN 61800 3 compliance Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 277 Brake components Availability Braking availability for ACS550 drives by frame size is e R1 and R2 a built in brake chopper is standard equipment Add appropriate resistor
50. the motor motor rotating and makes measurements in order to identify motor characteristics and create a model used for internal calculations An ID Run is especially effective when e vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and or operation point is near zero speed and or operation requires a torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback i e without a pulse encoder O OFF IDMAGN The Motor ID Run process is not run Identification magnetization is performed depending on parameter 9904 and 2101 settings In identification magnetization the motor model is calculated at first start by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed motor not rotating The model is recalculated always at start after motor parameter changes Parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ Identification magnetization is performed Parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Identification magnetization is performed Parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 has other value than 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Identification magnetization is not performed 1 ON Enables the Motor ID Run during which the motor is rotating at the next start command After run completion this value automatically changes to 0 Note The motor must be de coupled from the driven equi
51. torque uen rig v aire oS UID 268 low frequency PFC parameters 177 installation lugs check Jala REIS AA PG ene zi for R6 power cables 269 sell ne S QR O EE 44 ring crimp on 269 a a ok re nan 7 terminal serew on 270 location x eos AE 15 mounting drive 17 preparation 12 procedures 11 tools se Rue E RE es 14 wiring overview 18 insulation check 24 Index Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 303 M motor checking insulation 24 Mm 73 compatibility Janis sk conatus ces eta tur 14 MUCH RC EORR ML LM GREG id run parameter 99 A AE default cas sn a ta load curve break point frequency 141 hand auto MAN AP EK 76 load curve max fault parameter 141 cM MR Ig c load curve zero speed load 141 us POISHUOITel ol sv ayaan ganan i maintenance triggers 139 PID control a ELM ES 77 nominal current parameter 99 traie Conio AA AA MENU 79 nominal frequency parameter 99 lise parameter sets OMO PIN NGA nominal power parameter 99 parameter default values 82 nomna PEG POE MORS aga ge a se parameters not changed 71
52. 1 APAN E l T Integration time gt 0 Kpre MUS Tp Derivation time gt 0 t T Sample time period 2 ms Ae Error value change between two samples Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 134 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 2304 ACC COMPENSATION Sets the derivation time for acceleration compensation e Adding a derivative of the reference to the output of the speed controller compensates for inertia during acceleration e 2303 DERIVATION TIME describes the principle of derivative action Rule of thumb Set this parameter between 50 and 100 of the sum of the mechanical time constants for the motor and the driven machine e The figure shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp No acceleration compensation Acceleration compensation A A Speed reference Actual speed t t m gt Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set acceleration compensation 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN Starts automatic tuning of the speed controller O oFF Disables the Autotune creation process Does not disable the operation of Autotune settings 1 ON Activates speed controller autotuning Automatically reverts to OFF Procedure Note The motor load must be connected Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40 of the rated speed
53. 1000 PAR HZRPM Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 2001 MINIMUM SPEED gt 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 2007 MINIMUM FREQ gt 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range gt 50 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range gt 50 e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range gt 50 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range gt 50 1001 PAR PFC REF Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following NEG e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative when 8123 PFC ENABLE is active 1002 RESERVED Not used 1003 PAR Al SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 1301 MINIMUM Al1 gt 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 1304 MINIMUM Al2 gt 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 1004 PARAOSCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 1504 MINIMUM A01 gt 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 1510 MINIMUM AO2 gt 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 1005 PARPCU2 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal kVA or motor nominal power Check for the following e 1 1 lt 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 1 73 Py 3 0 where Py 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are kW or Py 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are hp e g in US 1006 PAR EXT RO Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following Extension relay module not connected and 1410
54. 148 cable requirements display min parameters 148 colpire MC P 281 display process variables parameter group 147 grounding sese creme 266 display selection parameters 147 input power 265 display units parameters 148 motor 274 maintenance 258 capacitor manual compatibility 41 Ko PIL ipt tbe bot tra aden 29 258 parameter lock parameter 121 replacement PPS ICD 258 pass code parameter 121 category IEC EN 61800 3 definition reference control parameter 109 li kaka Ka KA a Wk Ba 293 signal max parameters 147 GIAN LIE Wah te BI MI 293 signal min parameters 147 CB control panel Assistant 42 see control board AMON ede ue e a LiT Und ME 43 CE marking oeeo mane pk daw etd 291 assistants mode 51 changed parameters Assistant Control Panel 54 battery neces d oe rs recon 258 chopper changed parameters mode 54 see braking clock set mode x tae c tea pa ne 56 clock setting Assistant Control Panel 56 directiortof rotation isss ense ates dedi communication display contrast 48 fault logger mode 55 see EFB embedded fieldbus al nd 13 027 see EFB drive parameters II UMOdE sis vd ia ja ad 3 3 4 see FB
55. 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 1510 MINIMUM A02 1601 RUN ENABLE 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ zx pat SOJO A O zx c3 SOJO A OIN SOJO A OIN ae SOJO A OIN o o o o O N o o 104 104 130 104 o o eo o o o A o o o O O A o N O Q o o o Q o o o 60 60 62 60 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 5 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 4001 GAIN 10 10 10 10 10 10 25 10 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 4101 GAIN 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 5 1 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 8123 PFC ENABLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Parameters Complete parameter list The following table lists all parameters Table header abbreviations are e S Parameters can be modified only when the drive is stopped User Space to enter desired parameter values 85 Some values depend on the construction as indicated in the table by 01 or U1 Refer to the type code on the drive for example ACS550 01 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S Group 99 START UP DATA 99
56. 16 7 00467918 xls B Weight The following table lists typical maximum weights for each frame size Variations within each frame size due to components associated with voltage current ratings and options are minor Weight Enclosure R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib IP21 UL type 1 6 5 14 3 9 0 19 8 16 35 24 53 34 75 69 152 IP54 UL type 12 8 0 17 6 11 0 24 3 17 0 37 5 26 0 57 3 42 0 92 6 86 0 190 00467918 xls B Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Degrees of protection Available enclosures 289 P21 UL type 1 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as condensation carbon dust and metallic particles P54 UL type 12 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions Compared to the IP21 UL type 1 enclosure the IP54 UL type 12 enclosure has thesame internal plastic shell as the IP21 enclosure a different outer plastic cover an additional internal fan to improve cooling larger dimensions the same rating does not require a derating Ambient conditions The following table lists the ACS550 e
57. 600 V for ACS550 U1 XXXX 6 Insulation 500 600 V drives Either For ACS550 U1 XXXX 6 the motor complies with NEMA MG1 Part 31 ora du dt filter is used between the motor and drive Tools required To install the ACS550 you need the following e screwdrivers as appropriate for the mounting hardware used wire stripper tape measure drill e for installations involving ACS550 U1 frame sizes R5 or R6 and IP54 UL type 12 enclosures punch for creating conduit mounting holes for installations involving ACS550 U1 frame size R6 appropriate crimping tool for power cable lugs See section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 269 mounting hardware screws or nuts and bolts four each The type of hardware depends on the mounting surface and the frame size Frame size Mounting hardware R1 R4 M5 10 R5 M6 1 4 in R6 M8 5 16 in Suitable environment and enclosure Confirm that the site meets the environmental requirements To prevent damage prior to installation store and transport the drive according to the environmental requirements specified for storage and transportation See section Ambient conditions on page 289 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 15 Confirm that the enclosure is appropriate based on the site contamination level LI IP21 UL type 1 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gas
58. 8125 DEC IN AUX START 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s NOT SEL 8126 TMED AUTOCHNG 0 4 1 O NOT SEL 8127 MOTORS 1 7 1 2 Y 8128 AUX START ORDER 1 EVEN RUNTIME 2 RELAY ORDER 1 1 EVEN RUNTIME Y Group 98 OPTIONS 9802 COMM PROT SEL O NOT SEL 1 STD MODBUS 1 O NOT SEL Y 4 EXT FBA Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 98 ACS550 User s Manual Complete parameter descriptions This section describes the actual signals and parameters for ACS550 Group 99 START UP DATA This group defines special start up data required to set up the drive enter motor information Code Description 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language There are two different Assistant Control Panels each supporting a different language set Panel ACS CP L supporting languages 0 2 11 15 will be integrated into ACS CP A Assistant Control Panel ACS CP A 0 ENGLISH 1 ENGLISH AM 2 DEUTSCH 3 ITALIANO 4 ESPANOL 5 PORTUGUES 6 NEDERLANDS 7 FRAN AIS 8 DANSK 9 SUOMI 10 SVENSKA 11 RUSSKI 12 POLSKI 13 TURKCE 14 CZECH 15 MAGYAR Assistant Control Panel ACS CP D Asia O ENGLISH 1 CHINESE 2 KOREAN 3 JAPANESE 9902 APPLIC MACRO Selects an application macro Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACS550 for a particular application 1 ABB STANDARD 2 3 WIRE 3 ALTERNATE 4 MOTO
59. ACS550 User s Manual 161 Code Description 4002 INTEGRATION TIME A Defines the PID controller s integration time Integration time is by definition the time required to increase the Bi output by the error value D P 4001 10 Error value is constant and 10096 Gain 1 C P 4001 1 4 achieved in 1 second Integration time of 1 second denotes that a 100 change is 0 0 NOT SEL Disables integration I part of controller 0 1 3600 0 Integration time seconds pa P 4002 See 4001 for adjustment procedure A Error B Error value step C Controller output with Gain 1 D Controller output with Gain 10 4003 DERIVATION TIME Error 4 Process error value Defines the PID controller s derivation time You can add the derivative of the error to the PID controller 100 output The derivative is the error value s rate of change For example if the process error value changes linearly the derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output The error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter The time constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 Derivation time seconds I gt t PID output l A D part of controller output Gain P 4001 gt t r P4003 gt 4004 PID DERIV FILTER Defines the filter time constant for the error derivative part of the PID controller output
60. Activation decreases the reference 17 DI5 Constant speed 1 1202 18 DI6 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A x Default operation 21 ROTB Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note 1 For DI3 and DI4 23 RO2A Default operation 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable f both are active or inactive the speed reference is unchanged The existing speed reference is a 26 RO3A A Default operation 27 RO3B 1 Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 stored during stop or power down Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Note 2 Settings of the ramp times with acceleration and deceleration time 2 parameters 2205 and 2206 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Reference up down DI3 4 Analog output AO2 Current o Alt 0 10 V Constant speed selection DI5 Relay output 1 Ready 9 y AI2 0 4 20 mA Runenable DI6 Relay output 2 Running or Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 m ol Al1 0 10 V N 232 AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 76 Hand Auto macro ACS550 User s Manual This macro provides an I O configuration that is typically us
61. Before being added to the PID controller output the error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter Increasing the filter time smooths the error derivative reducing noise 0 0 10 0 Filter time constant seconds 4005 ERROR VALUE INV Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed 0 NO Normal a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed Error Ref Fbk 1 YES Inverted a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed Error Fbk Ref 4006 UNITS Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 See parameter 3405 for list of available units 4007 UNIT SCALE Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values mun nns NE ea Nena Enter the decimal point location counting in from the right of the entry 0 0008 3 See the table for example using pi 3 14159 1 0031 3 1 2 0314 3 14 3 3142 3 142 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 162 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 4008 0 VALUE l Units P4006 Defines together with the next parameter the scaling applied to Scale P4007 the PID controller s actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 e Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 P 4009 1000 0 4009 1
62. DEVICENET 64 MODBUS PLUS 101 CONTROLNET 128 ETHERNET 5102 FB PAR 2 FB PAR 26 Refer to communication module documentation for more information on these parameters 5126 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings 0 DONE Refreshing done 1 REFRESH Refreshing After refreshing the value reverts automatically to DONE 5128 FILE CPI FW REV Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter configuration file Format is xyz where x major revision number y minor revision number Z7 correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5129 FILE CONFIG ID Displays the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module s configuration file identification File configuration information is drive application program dependent 5130 FILE CONFIG REV Contains the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module configuration file Example 1 revision 1 5131 FBA STATUS Contains the status of the adapter module 0 IDLE Adapter not configured 1 EXECUT INIT Adapter is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive 3 CONFIG ERROR Adapter configuration error The revision code of the adapter s CPI firmware revision is older than required CPI firmware version defined in the drive s configuration file parameter 5132 lt 5128 4 OFF LINE Adapter is off line 5 ON LINE
63. Defines the switch off delay for relay 5 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1417 RO 6 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 6 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 6 e See RO 1 OFF DELAY Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS 119 This group defines the drive s analog current signal outputs The drive s analog outputs can be any parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current scaled and or inverted by defining the minimum and maximum values of the source parameter or content Defining an maximum value parameter 1503 or 1509 that is less than the content minimum value parameter 1502 or 1508 results in an inverted output filtered Code Description 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL Defines the content for analog output AO1 99 EXCITE PTC Provides a current source for sensor type PTC Output 1 6 mA See Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 100 ExciTE PT100 Provides a current source for sensor type PT100 Output 9 1 mA See Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 101 159 Output corresponds to a parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA Parameter defined by value value 102 parameter 0102 1502 A01 CONTENT MIN Sets the minimum content
64. Drive parameter ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0401 LAST FAULT 40401 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 40412 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 40413 Serial communication diagnostics Network problems can be caused by multiple sources Some of these sources are loose connections incorrect wiring including swapped wires bad grounding duplicate station numbers incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters 5306 5309 Section Complete parameter descriptions on page 98 describes these parameters in detail Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 199 Diagnostic situations The sub sections below describe various diagnostic situations the problem symptoms and corrective actions Normal operation During normal network operation 5306 5309 parameter values act as follows at each drive 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES advances advances for each message properly received and addressed to this drive 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all advances when an invalid message CRC is received 5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all advances when character format errors are detected such as parity or framing errors 5309 EFB STATUS value varies depending on network traffic Loss of communication The ACS
65. Drive parameter Value Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC O NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive 1 FAULT response 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Feedback from the drive FBA Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see all parameters listed in section Complete parameter descriptions on page 98 Drive parameter Protocol reference 0102 SPEED 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0104 CURRENT 0105 TORQUE 0106 POWER 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 0 STOP 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 2 REV 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS bit 0 DI3 Scali ng To scale the drive parameter values see the following sections as appropriate e e Actual Value scaling on page 239 ABB Drives profile technical data Actual Value scaling on page 241 Generic profile technical data Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Diagnostics FBA Fault handling The ACS550 provides fault information as follows e Drive fault code Fieldbus fault code DRIVECOM spe
66. Energize relay when AI2 signal is lost 27 MOTOR TEMP Energize relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 28 STALL Energize relay when a stall alarm or fault exists 30 PID SLEEP Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active 31 PFC Use relay to start stop motor in PFC control See Group 81 PFC CONTROL Use this option only when PFC control is used Selection activated deactivated when drive is not running 32 AUTOCHANGE Energize relay when PFC autochange operation is performed Use this option only when PFC control is used 33 FLUX READY Energize relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque motor has reached nominal magnetizing 34 USER MACRO 2 Energize relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 117 Code Description 35 COMM Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according to the following Par 0134 Binary RO6 ROS RO4 ROS RO2 RO1 0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 000001 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 000010 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 000011 0 0 0 0 1 1 4 000100 0 0 0 1 0 0 63 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 36 COMM 1 Energi
67. FBK MULTIPLIER 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 NOT SEL 4016 ACT1 INPUT 1 7 1 2 AI2 4017 ACT2 INPUT 1 7 1 2 AI2 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4022 SLEEP SELECTION 6 7 1 O NOT SEL 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz O rpm 0 0 Hz 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s 4025 WAKE UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 0 0 4007 4026 WAKE UP DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 6 14 1 O SET 1 Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 4101 GAIN 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s 4103 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0s 0 1 s 0 0 s 4104 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 s 0 1 s 1 0s 4105 ERROR VALUE INV 0 7 NO 1 YES 1 O NO 4106 UNITS 0 127 1 4 4107 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4108 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 0 0 4107 4109 110096 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 100 0 4107 4110 SET POINT SEL 0 2 8 17 19 20 1 1 A11 4111 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 40 0 4107 4112 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4113 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 4114 FBK SEL 1 13 1 1 AcT1 4115 FBK MULTIPLIER 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 NOT SEL 4116 ACT1 INPUT 1 7
68. Frequency 100 par 9907 Final reference limited by 0 0 1104 1105 100 par 9907 Actual motor speed limited by 2007 2008 frequency Actual Values As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 Actual Values are words containing drive values Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Actual Value scaling 241 For Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See section Complete parameter list on page 85 for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Feedback integer Parameter resolution z Parameter resolution integer Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 2 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 1 1 Where parameters are in percent the Complete parameter list section specifies what parameter corresponds to 100 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 For example Value of the Feedback integer Parameter resolution Feedback Parameter parameter that Value of 100 ref 100 g defines 100 Scaled Value 10 0 1 1500 rpm 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 0 196 500 Hz 100 50 Hz Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM S
69. INV above Drive started START STOP COMMAND Group 10 START ENABLE SIGNAL Relay Relay energized de energized l l l Damper i closed l e a Damper opening time Damper open lt l Acceleration time Par 2202 Parameters 1608 amp 1609 STARTED RELAY STATUS Group 14 Damper closed DAMPER i STATUS Damper closing time RUN ENABLE SIGNAL from the damper end Switch when the damper is fully opened Parameter 1601 MOTOR STATUS T o P Drive coasts to stop Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 124 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 1609 START ENABLE 2 Selects the source of the start enable 2 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality O NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 2 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on panel display The drive will not start until start enable 2 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as t
70. MAX ACT1 2 The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 8 sqrt AcT1 2 Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 9 sqA1 sqA2 Square root of ACT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provides the feedback signal 10 sqrt AcT1 Square root of ACT1 provides the feedback signal 11 COMM FBK 1 Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 provides the feedback signal 12 COMM FBK 2 Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 provides the feedback signal 13 AVE ACT1 2 The average of ACT1 and ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER Defines an extra multiplier for the PID feedback value FBK defined by parameter 4014 Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference 0 000 NOT SEL The parameter has no effect 1 000 used as the multiplier 32 768 32 767 Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL Example FBK Multiplier x yA1 A2 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 164 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 4016 ACT1 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 See also parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1 AI1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT1 2 AI2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT1 3 CURRENT Uses current for ACT1 4 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT1 5 POWER Uses power for ACT1 6 CO
71. REV REF REQ CTL 11 REV ACT REQ REF1 12 PANEL LOCAL REQ REF2 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL REQ REF2EXT 14 EXT2 ACT ACK STARTINH 15 FAULT ACK OFF ILCK Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 105 Code Description 0305 FAULT WORD 1 neso only copy of the Fault Word 1 Bit 0305 FAULT WORD 1 0306 FAULT WORD 2 0307 FAULT WORD 3 When a fault is active the 0 OVERCURRENT Obsolete EFB 1 corresponding bit for the active fault is set in the Fault Words 1 DC OVERVOLT THERM FAIL EFB 2 Each fault has a dedicated bit 2 DEVOVERTEMP OPEX LINK EFB 3 allocated within Fault Words See section Fault listing on page 244 3 SHORT CIRC OPEX PWR INCOMPATIBLE SW for a description of the faults 4 Reserved CURR MEAS USER LOAD CURVE The control panel displays the word in 5 5c UNDERVOLT SUPPLY PHASE Reserved hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros and a 6 J LOSS ENCODER ERR Reserved 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 7 Al2LOSS OVERSPEED Reserved 0306 FAULT WORD 2 8 MOTOVERTEMP Reserved Reserved Read only copy of the Fault Word 2 9 PANEL LOSS DRIVE ID Reserved See parameter 0305 0307 IFAULT WORD 3 10 ID RUN FAIL CONFIG FILE System error Read
72. The unit is shown on the REM 4 91 NE right Page 68 tells how to select up to three signals to output FWD be monitored in the Output mode The table below shows how to view them one at a time How to browse the monitored signals Step Action Display 1 If more than one signals have been selected to be monitored see page 4 1 68 you can browse them in the Output mode REM z HE To browse the signals forward press key A gt repeatedly To browse OUTPUT FWD them backward press key lt w 7 repeatedly 0 5 A REM ci OUTPUT FWD o 107 a OUTPUT FWD Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 66 ACS550 User s Manual Reference mode In the Reference mode you can set the speed frequency or torque reference start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing X if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing 77 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom REM DA ro MENU WD 2 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local LOC control by pressing Gb The display briefly shows LoC before switching PA ro to local control MENU WD Note With Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference modification in remot
73. cares 4026 WAKE UP DELAY tp pen Defines the wake up delay a deviation from the setpoint greater than 4025 WAKE UP DEV for at least this time period re starts the PID controller F Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 166 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Process PID PID1 has two separate sets of parameters PID set 1 and PID set 2 PID set 1 uses parameters 4001 4026 PID set 2 uses parameters 4101 4126 PID 1 PARAM SET defines which set is selected 0 ser 1 PID Set 1 parameters 4001 4026 is active 1 D11 Defines digital input D11 as the control for PID Set selection Activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 De activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 2 6 7 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection See DI1 above 7 SET 2 PID Set 2 parameters 4101 4126 is active 8 11 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Defines the Timed function as the control for the PID Set selection Timed function de activated PID Set 1 Timed function activated PID Set 2 See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 12 2 ZONE MIN The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 The drive will control the zone and select the set that has a larger difference A positive difference a setpoint higher
74. change the direction of rotation and adjust the speed of the motor through the I O interface perform an Identification Run for the drive Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter For details on how to use the control panel refer to chapter Control panels starting on page 47 How to start up the drive How you start up the drive depends on the control panel you have If you have an Assistant Control Panel you can either run the Start up Assistant see section How to perform the guided start up on page 36 or perform a limited start up see section How to perform the limited start up on page 31 The Start up Assistant which is included in the Assistant Control Panel only guides you through all essential settings to be done In the limited start up the drive gives no guidance you go through the very basic settings by following the instructions given in the manual If you have a Basic Control Panel follow the instructions given in section How to perform the limited start up on page 31 How to perform the limited start up For the limited start up you can use the Basic Control Panel or the Assistant Control Panel The instructions below are valid for both control panels but the displays shown are the Basic Control Panel displays unless the instruction applies to the Assistant Control Panel only Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand A A
75. check Digital input configuration Communication settings 2023 EMERGENCY Emergency stop activated STOP 2024 ENCODER ERROR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal Check for and correct Encoder presence and proper connection reverse wired loose connection or short circuit Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range Aworking and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR A wrong value will only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is greater than 4 times the rated slip of the motor Encoder is not being used but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 1 ENABLE 2025 FIRST START Signals that a the drive is performing a First Start evaluation of motor characteristics This is normal the first time the motor is run after motor parameters are entered or changed See parameter 9910 ID RUN for a description of motor models 2026 RESERVED Not used Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 253 Alarm E cod Display Description 2027 USER LOAD This alarm warns that the condition defined by parameter 3701 USER CURVE LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2028 START DELAY Shown during the Start delay See parameter 2113 START DELAY Note 1 Even wh
76. e Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 Defines the torque value of the first underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition point 3707 LOAD FREQ2 Defines the frequency value of the second load curve definition point e Must be smaller than 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 Defines the torque value of the second underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 Defines the torque value of the second overload curve definition point 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition point e Must be smaller than 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 Defines the torque value of the third underload curve definition point Must be smaller than 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 Defines the torque value of the third overload curve definition point Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 157 Code Description 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve definition point Must be smaller than 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 Defines the torque value of the fourth underload curve definition p
77. info clrwtr com 250 ACS550 User s Manual digital input serial communication When the fault has been corrected the motor can be started History For reference the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401 0412 0413 For the most recent fault identified by parameter 0401 the drive stores additional data in parameters 0402 0411 to aid in troubleshooting a problem For example parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault The Assistant Control Panel provides additional information about the fault history See section Fault Logger mode on page 55 for more information To clear the fault history all of the Group 04 FAULT HISTORY parameters Using the control panel in the Parameters mode select parameter 0401 Press EDIT or ENTER on the Basic Control Panel Press UP and DOWN at the same time Press SAVE Ao quo x Correcting alarms The recommended corrective action for alarms is Determine if the alarm requires any corrective action action is not always required Use the table in section Alarm listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem Alarm listing The following table lists the alarms by code number and describes each Alarm ER coda Display Description 2001 OVERCURRENT Current limiting controller is active Check for and correct Excessive motor load Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1
78. only the three latest faults are kept in the memory see the details of the three latest faults after a power off the details of only the most recent fault is kept in the memory read the help text for the fault start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view faults Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing lt if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC W MAIN MENU 1 by pressing CZ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR TEXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Fault Logger mode by selecting FAULT LOGGER on the menu with ENTER keys Anand S w P and pressing Ew The display shows the fault log starting with the latest fault The number on the row is the fault code according to which the causes and corrective actions are listed in chapter Diagnostics LOG KALA PONI o DC RUIT 6 AI1 LOSS EXIT 00 00 DETAIL 3 To see the details of a fault select it with keys A and S v 2 and press DETAIL LOC U PANEL LOSS FAULT FAULT TIME 1 13 04 57 FAULT TIME 2 EXIT 00 00 DIAG DIAG 4 To show the help text press Ew Scroll the help text with keys A and NU After reading the help press Ss to return to the previous display LOC UDIAGNOSTICS Check Comm lines and connections parameter 3002 horam tors in groups 10 and 1 EXIT ui 00
79. signal is released If parameter value is 01 30 00 booster is Booster active active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after activation DI is released Activation DI 88 MH Booster time 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Defines the time periods used by the timer O NOT SEL No time periods have been selected 1 T1 Time Period 1 selected in the timer 2 T2 Time Period 2 selected in the timer 3 T1 72 Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 4 T3 Time Period 3 selected in the timer 5 T1 T3 Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer 6 12413 Time Periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer 7 T1 T2 T3 Time Periods 1 2 and 3 selected in the timer 8 T4 Time Period 4 selected in the timer 9 T1 T4 Time Periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer 10 12414 Time Periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer 112114121414 Time Periods 1 2 and 4 selected in the timer 12 13414 Time Periods 3 and 4 selected in the timer 13 T1 13 74 Time Periods 1 3 and 4 selected in the timer 14 T2 T3 T4 Time Periods 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 15 T1 T2tT31T4 Time Periods 1 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 16 BOOSTER Booster selected in the timer 17 T1 B Booster and Time Period 1 selected in the timer 18 T2 B Booster and Time Period 2 selected in the timer 19 T1 T2 B Booster and Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer 20 T3
80. www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 195 Relay output control Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol reference Drive parameter Value Description ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 controlled 40134 bit 0 or 00033 by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 35 COMM Relay Output 2 controlled 40134 bit 1 or 00034 by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 35 COMM Relay Output 3 controlled 40134 bit 2 or 00035 by fieldbus 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 35 COMM Relay Output 4 controlled 40134 bit 3 or 00036 by fieldbus 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 35 COMM Relay Output 5 controlled 40134 bit 4 or 00037 by fieldbus 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 35 COMM Relay Output 6 controlled 40134 bit 5 or 00038 by fieldbus 1 More than 3 relays reguires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Modbus protocol Drive parameter Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3 status 40122 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status 40123 Analog output control Using th
81. 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4213 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 4214 FBK SEL 1 13 1 1 AcT1 4215 FBK MULTIPLIER 0 000 NOT SEL 32 768 32 767 0 001 0 000 NOT SEL 4216 JACT1 INPUT 1 7 1 2 AI2 Y 4217 ACT2 INPUT 1 7 1 2 AI2 Y 4218 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4219 ACT1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4220 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4221 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4228 ACTIVATE 6 12 1 0 NOT SEL 4229 OFFSET 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 4230 TRIM MODE O NOT SEL 1 PROPORTIONAL 1 O NOT SEL 3 DIRECT 4231 TRIM SCALE 100 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 4232 CORRECTION SRC 1 PID2REF 2 PID2OUTPUT 1 1 PID2REF Group 50 ENCODER 5001 PULSE NR 50 16384 1 1024 Y 5002 ENCODER ENABLE O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE Y 5003 ENCODER FAULT 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 1 FAULT Y 5010 z PLS ENABLE O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE Y 5011 POSITION RESET O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE 5101 FBATYPE O NOT DEFINED 5102 FB PAR 2 26 0 65535 1 0 5126 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 96 ACS550 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH O lt DONE 1 lt REFRESH 1 O DONE 5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0
82. 0 NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive response 1 FAULT 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 197 Feedback from the drive EFB Pre defined feedback Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see input word point object listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on page 207 MANJA Modbus protocol reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0102 PEED 40102 0103 OUTPUT FREO 40103 0104 CURRENT 40104 0105 TORQUE 40105 0106 POWER 40106 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 40107 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 40109 0301 FB CMD wORD1 bit O STOP 40301 bit 0 0301 FB CMD wORD1 1 bit 2 REV 40301 bit 2 0118 DI 1 3 STATUS bit O DI3 40118 Note With Modbus any parameter can be accessed using the format 4 followed by the parameter number Actual value scaling The scaling of actual values can be protocol dependent In general for Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See section Complete parameter list on page 85 for parameter resolutions Fo
83. 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 110 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 5 DI3U 4D R Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source motor potentiometer control Digital input DI3 increases the speed the U stands for up Digital input DI4 decreases the speed the D stands for down A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change 6 DI3U 4D Same as above DI3U 4D R except A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored When the drive restarts the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 7 DI5U 6D Same as above DI3U 4D except that DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as the reference source 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 10 comMsAI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Same as DI3U 4D R above except that Changing the control source ExT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 12 DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC
84. 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5131 FBA STATUS 0 6 1 O IDLE 5132 FBACPIFW REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5133 FBA APPL FW REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 Group 52 PANEL COMM 5201 STATION ID 1 247 1 1 5202 BAUD RATE 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 5203 PARITY 0 8 NONE 1 1 8 NONE 2 1 O 8 NONE 1 2 lt 8 EVEN 1 3 8 ODD 1 5204 OK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 5205 PARITY ERRORS 0 65535 1 5206 FRAME ERRORS 0 65535 1 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS 0 65535 1 5208 CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID 0 0xFFFF 1 0 5302 EFB STATION ID 0 65535 1 1 5303 EFB BAUD RATE 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 76 8 9 6 kbits s kbits s 5304 EFB PARITY 0 8 NONE 1 1 8 NONE 2 O 8 NONE 1 2 8 EVEN 1 3 8 ODD 1 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE O ABB DRV LIM 1 DCU PROFILE 1 O ABB DRV LIM 2 ABB DRV FULL 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 0 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 5308 EFB UART ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 5309 EFB STATUS 0 7 1 O IDLE 5310 EFB PAR 10 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5311 EFBPAR 11 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5312 EFB PAR 12 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5313 EFB PAR 13 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5314 EFB PAR 14 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5315 EFBPAR 15 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5316 EFBPAR 16 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5317 EFB PAR 17 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5318 E
85. 1 DI activated DI DI2 Function 0 0 No constant speed 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 Can be set up as a so called fault speed which is activated if the control signal is lost Refer to parameter 3001 AI lt MIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 8 DI2 3 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI3 e See above D11 2 for code 9 DI3 4 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and D14 e See above D11 2 for code 10 DI4 5 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and DI5 See above D11 2 for code 11 DI5 6 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 for code 12 DI1 2 3 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI1 DI2 and DI3 Uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 Di de activated 1 Di activated DI1 DI2 DI3 Function 0 0 0 No constant speed 1 0 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 0 Constant speed 3 1204 0 0 1 Constant speed 4 1205 1 0 1 Constant speed 5 1206 0 1 1 Constant speed 6 1207 1 1 1 Constant speed 7 1208 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 113 Code Description 13 DI3 4 5 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI3 DI4 and DI5 e See above D11 2 3 for code
86. 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 COMM 0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 EXT1 Effective if 1102 COMM 12 15 Unused Status Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the status word content ABB Drives profile FBA STATUS WORD Bit Nama Value Correspond to E UE the state diagram 0 RDY ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON 0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON 1 RDY RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE 0 OFF1 ACTIVE 2 RDY REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED 0 OPERATION INHIBITED 3 TRIPPED 0 1 FAULT 0 No fault Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 234 ACS550 User s Manual ABB Drives profile FBA STATUS WORD Bit Name Value Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram 4 OFF 2 STA 1 OFF2 inactive 0 OFF2 ACTIVE 5 OFF 3 STA 1 OFF3 inactive 0 OFF3 ACTIVE 6 SWC ON INHIB 1 SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE 0 SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE 7 ALARM 1 Alarm See section Alarm listing on page 250 for details on alarms No alarm 8 AT SETPOINT 1 OPERATING Actual value equals within tolera
87. 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 31 3 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX 50 50 50 50 50 50 52 50 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 104 104 104 104 104 104 130 104 1510 MINIMUM AO2 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 1601 RUN ENABLE 0 0 6 6 4 5 2 6 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 50 50 50 50 50 50 52 50 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 5 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 102 4001 GAIN 10 10 10 10 10 10 25 10 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 4101 GAIN 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 5 1 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 60 8123 PFC ENABLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 83 ACS550 U1 5 E o 2 E 2 o o Parameter m 2 5 E g S 3 8 ce 8 a 2 se s bel S 0 a a 2 S g es o I o O n 9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 2 4 9 2 2 1 1 2 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 0 0 0 7 6 6 2 1003 DIRECTION 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 0 0 0 0 3 2 3 3 1103 REF1 SELECT 1 1 1 12 1 1 1 1 1106 REF2 SELECT 2 2 2 2 2 19 19 2 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 9 10 9 5 0 9 0 4 1304 MINIMUM AI2 0 0 0 0 20 20 20 20 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 31 3 o N o N eo Co pan o N
88. 2 LIMLO Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 145 Code Description 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Selects the third supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 146 ACS550 User s Manual Group 33 INFORMATION This group provides access to information about the drive s current programs versions and test date Code Description 3301 FIRMWARE Contains the version of the drive s firmware 3302 LOADING PACKAGE Contains the version of the loading package 3303 TEST DATE Contains the test date yy ww 3304 DRIVE RATING Indicates the drive s current and voltage rating The format is XXXY where e XXX The nominal current rating of the drive in amperes If present an A indicates a decimal point in the rating for the current For example XXX 8A8 ind
89. 3x150 218 3x185 237 4 0 284 3x 185 257 3x240 264 250 MCM or 2 x 1 274 3x 3x50 291 300 MCM or 2 x 1 0 285 2x 3x95 319 350 MCM or 2 x 2 0 Ground connections For personnel safety proper operation and reduction of electromagnetic emission pick up the drive and the motor must be grounded at the installation site e e Conductors must be adequately sized as required by safety regulations Power cable shields must be connected to the drive PE terminal in order to meet safety regulations Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 267 Power cable shields are suitable for use as equipment grounding conductors only when the shield conductors are adequately sized as required by safety regulations n multiple drive installations do not connect drive terminals in series Corner grounded TN systems WARNING Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals Corner grounded TN systems are defined in the following table In such systems disconnect the internal ground connection by removing the screws do this also if the grounding configuration of the system is unknown ACS550 01 frame sizes R1 R4 Remove both the EM1 and EM3 screws see section Power connection diagrams on page 20 ACS550 U1 frame sizes R1 R4 Remove the EM1 scre
90. 51 autochange interval parameter 179 level parameter 180 OVOIVIOW did a sa doro re Y e dde 180 starting order counter 180 automatic reset see reset automatic auxiliary motor see motor auxiliary B backing up parameters Assistant Control Panel 58 Basic Control Panel 69 Basic Control Panel see control panel Basic Index Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 298 ACS550 User s Manual battery Assistant Control Panel 258 control board baud rate RS 232 parameter 172 overtemperature fault code 247 braking overtemperature fault parameter 142 COM PONGHIS text ceo teers ete Se 277 temperature data parameter 102 protection from overheated resistor 280 control cable resistor heat dissipation 280 CONNECHONS zc quet eae a DE xa 22 selecting brake choppers resistors 277 requirements oos ics s eios Kas eter 281 WITING ul E eive Dmm bond SET 280 control panel 41 break point frequency fault parameter 141 Cable requirements 4 naivna NG 282 buffer overruns count parameter 172 comm error fault parameter 140 display bar graph 147 148 C display decimal point form parameters 147 display max parameters
91. 5311 EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40012 5318 EFB PAR 18 Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACS550 begins transmitting response to the master request 5319 EFB PAR 19 Holds a copy in hex of the CONTROL WORD Modbus register 40001 5320 EFB PAR 20 Holds a copy in hex of the STATUS WORD Modbus register 40004 Except where restricted by the drive all parameters are available for both reading and writing The parameter writes are verified for the correct value and for a valid register addresses Note Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i e modified values are not automatically stored to permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all altered values The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxx registers Function code Description 03 Read holding 4xxxx registers 06 Preset
92. 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 01 U1 Drives 0 75 132 kW 1 200 hp User s Manual 3AFE64804588 3AUA0000001418 Rev F EN EFFECTIVE 16 04 2007 SUPERSEDES 3AFE64804588 Rev D 24 06 2004 SUPERSEDES 3AUA0000001418 Rev E 06 12 2004 2007 ABB Oy All Rights Reserved Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 5 Safety Use of warnings and notes gt BS Pe PE There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact or give information on a subject Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment They also tell you how to avoid the danger The warning symbols are used as follows Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment General warning warns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment WARNING The ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive should ONLY be installed by a qualified electrician WARNING Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the power circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 and depending on the frame size UDC and UDC or BRK and BRK WARNING Dangerous volt
93. ACS550 User s Manual ACS550 x1 Input current Input power mains fuses see below A IEC 269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann type 04A6 2 4 6 10 10 JJS 10 06A6 2 6 6 07A5 2 7 5 012A 2 11 8 16 15 JJS 15 017A 2 16 7 25 25 JJS 25 024A 2 24 2 30 JJS 30 031A 2 30 8 40 40 JJS 40 046A 2 46 2 63 60 JJS 60 059A 2 59 4 80 JJS 80 075A 2 74 8 80 100 JJS 100 088A 2 88 0 100 110 JJS 110 114A 2 114 125 150 JJS 150 143A 2 143 200 200 JJS 200 178A 2 178 250 250 JJS 250 221A 2 221 315 300 JJS 300 248A 2 248 350 JJS 350 Fuses 380 480 V drives 00467918 xls B ACS550 x1 Input current Input power mains fuses see below A IEC 269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann type 03A3 4 3 3 10 10 JJS 10 04A1 4 4 1 05A4 4 5 4 06A9 4 6 9 08A8 4 8 8 15 JJS 15 012A 4 11 9 16 015A 4 15 4 20 JJS 20 023A 4 23 25 30 JJS 30 031A 4 31 35 40 JJS 40 038A 4 38 50 50 JJS 50 044A 4 44 60 JJS 60 045A 4 45 059A 4 59 63 80 JJS 80 072A 4 72 80 90 JJS 90 077A 4 77 100 JJS 100 078A 4 77 087A 4 87 125 125 JJS 125 096A 4 96 097A 4 97 Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 265 ACS550 x1 Input current Input power mains fuses see below A IE
94. ACS550 User s Manual Generic profile technical data Overview The generic profile aims to fulfill the industry standard drive profile for each protocol e g PROF Idrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet Control Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system For specific CONTROL WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Status Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station For specific STATUS WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Reference As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 the REFERENCE word is a speed or freguency reference Note REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive profiles Reference scaling REFERENCE scaling is fieldbus type specific However at the drive the meaning of a 100 REFERENCE value is fixed as described in the table below For a detailed description on the range and scaling of the REFERENCE see the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Generic profile Reference Reference Range type Scaling Remarks REF Fieldbus Speed 100 par 9908 Final reference limited by specific 1104 1105 100 par 9908 Actual motor speed limited by 2001 2002 speed
95. AN and XV and press ce The display shows the following information about the drive where the backup was made DRIVE TYPE DRIVE RATING type of the drive rating of the drive in format XXXYZ where XXX nominal current rating If present an A indicates a decimal point e g 4A6 means 4 6 A Y 2 200V 4 400V 6 600 V Z i European loading package n US loading package FIRMWARE firmware version of the drive You can scroll the information with keys AN and XV LOC WBACKUP INFO DRIVE TYPE ACS550 SO PRIVE RATING 4A62i 3301 FIRMWARE EXIT 00 00 LOC UWBACKUP INFO ACS550 3304 DRIVE RATING 4A62i Ab2i 3301 FIRMWARE 300F hex EXIT 00 00 Press 7 to return to the Copy menu LOC U COPY MENU 1 BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual I O Settings mode In the I O Settings mode you can check the parameter settings related to any I O terminal 61 edit the parameter setting For example if 1103 REF 1 is listed under Ain1 Analog input 1 that is parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT has value AI1 you can change its value to e g AI2 You cannot however set the value of parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT to AI1 start stop change the direction and switch between
96. B value Where C Main reference value coMM for values 9 10 and AIT for values 14 17 B Correcting reference AM for values 9 10 and AI2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where C7 25 P 4012 SETPOINT MIN 7 O P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 B varies along the horizontal axis 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Sets a constant value used for the process reference Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4013 SETPOINT MAX Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4014 FBK SEL Defines the PID controller feedback actual signal You can define a combination of two actual values ACT1 and ACT2 as the feedback signal Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 ACT1 Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 ACT2 1 ACT Actual value 1 ACT1 provides the feedback signal 2 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 3 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4 ACT ACT2 ACT1 times ACT2 provides the feedback signal 5 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal 6 MIN ACT1 2 The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 7
97. C Tick compliance Minimum requirement CE amp C Tick The motor cable must be a symmetrical three conductor cable with a concentric PE conductor or a four conductor cable with a concentric shield however a symmetrical constructed PE conductor is always recommended The following figure shows the minimum requirement for the motor cable screen for example MCMK NK Cables Insulation jacket Copper wire screen Inner insulation able core Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 275 Recommendation for conductor layout The following figure compares conductor layout features in motor cables Recommended CE amp C Tick Allowed CE amp C Tick Symmetrical shielded cable three phase A separate PE conductor is required if the conductors and a concentric or otherwise conductivity of the cable shield is lt 50 of the symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a conductivity of the phase conductor shield Shield PE Shield conductor and shield e e PE Shield Not allowed for motor cables CE amp C Tick A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor without a shield Allowed for motor cables with phase P conductor cross section up to 10 mm BNO Effective motor cable screens Q The general rule for cable screen effectiveness is the better and tighter the cable
98. CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled Ref and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 comm 0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 EXT1 Effective if 1102 comm 12 Unused 15 DCU Profile The following tables describe the CONTROL WORD content for the DCU profile DCU profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Comments 0 STOP 1 Stop Stops according to either the stop mode 0 parameter or the stop mode requests bits 7 no op and 8 1 START 1 Start Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a stop command 0 no op 2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction This bit XOR d with the sign of the reference C defines direction 0 Forward direction 3 LOCAL 1 Local mode When the fieldbus sets this bit it steals 0 Ext Imod control and the drive moves to fieldbus local Ale her moge control mode 4 RESET gt 1 Reset Edge sensitive other no op 5 EXT2 1 Switch to EXT2 0 Switch to EXT1 6 RUN DISABLE 1 Run disable Inverted run enable 0 Run enable on 7 STPMODE R 1 Normal ramp stop mode 0 no op Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 212 ACS550 User s Manual DCU profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Comments STPMODE EM 1 E
99. CoPY C Q PY MENU kaba di ul MENU panel step to uL with keys An and S v 7 MENU Press 7 During the transfer the display shows the transfer status asa LOC u L 5 0 percentage of completion To perform downloads step to the appropriate operation here dL A Loc d L A Download All is used as an example with keys AN and amp w 7 MENU YA Press X During the transfer the display shows the transfer status asa LOC d L D 0 percentage of completion 3 To upload all parameters including user sets from the drive to the control Loc u L Basic Control Panel alarm codes In addition to the faults and alarms generated by the drive see chapter Diagnostics the Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of form A5xxx See section Alarm codes Basic Control Panel on page 253 for a list of the alarm codes and descriptions Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 71 Application macros Macros change a group of parameters to new predefined values Use macros to minimize the need for manual editing of parameters Selecting a macro sets all other parameters to their default values except Group 99 START UP DATA parameters except parameter 9904 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1607 PARAM SAVE 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME
100. Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end 11 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table on page 22 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 29 Check installation Before applying power perform the following checks M Check Installation environment conforms to the drive s specifications for ambient conditions The drive is mounted securely Space around the drive meets the drive s specifications for cooling The motor and driven equipment are ready for start For IT systems and corner grounded TN systems The internal EMC filter is disconnected screws EM1 8 EM3 or F1 8 F2 removed The drive is properly grounded The input power mains voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage The input power mains connections at U1 V1 and W1 are connected and tightened as specified The input power mains fuses are installed The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are connected and tightened as specified The motor cable is routed away from other cables NO power factor compensation capacitors are in the motor cable The control connections are connected and tightened as specified NO tools or foreign objects such as drill shavings are inside the drive NO al
101. Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors CRC calculations for possible errors 5308 EFB UART ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive 5309 EFB STATUS Contains the status of the EFB protocol 0 IDLE EFB protocol is configured but not receiving any messages 1 EXECUT INIT EFB protocol is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol 3 CONFIG ERROR EFB protocol has a configuration error 4 OFF LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive 5 ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive 6 RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset 7 LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen only mode 5310 EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40005 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 174 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 5311 EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifi
102. DELAY autochange not allowed Starts the speed regulated motor B Autochange occurs e Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation 1PFC etc PID output associated with each motor Switches the above motor on but only if the new speed regulated motor had been running as a constant speed motor This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange Continues with normal PFC operation Starting order counter Output The operation of the starting order counter frequency No aux 1 aux 2 aux The relay output parameter definitions 1401 1403 and motors motor motors 1410 1412 establish the initial motor sequence The lowest fmax parameter number with a value 31 PFC identifies the relay connected to 1PFC the first motor and so on e Initially 1PFC speed regulated motor 2PFC 1st auxiliary motor etc e The first autochange shifts the sequence to 2PFC speed regulated motor 3PFC 1st auxiliary motor 1PFC last auxiliary motor Area e The next autochange shifts the sequence again and so on Autochange e If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all is allowed PID output inactive motors are interlocked the drive displays an alarm 2015 PFC LOCK When ACS550 power supply is switched off the counter preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory When power is restored the Autochange rotation starts
103. DRV LIM implementation Modbus addressing With Modbus each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set Thus the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message Note The ACS550 supports the zero based addressing of the Modbus specification Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message Similarly coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message Refer again to the Mapping summary above The following sections describe in detail the mapping to each Modbus reference set 0xxxx Mapping Modbus coils The drive maps the following information to the Oxxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils bit wise map of the CONTROL WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 203 relay output states numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033 The following table summarizes the Oxxxx reference set Modbus Internal location ABB DRV LIM DCU PROFILE ABB DRV FULL ref all profiles 5305 0 5305 1 5305 2 00001 CONTROL WoRD BitO OFF1 STOP OFF1 00002 CONTROL WORD Bit1 OFF2 START OFF2 00003 CONTROL WORD Bit2 OFF3 REVERSE OFF3 00004 CO
104. Defines digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 10 of the Command Word 1 as the control for ramp pair selection The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection See DI1 INV above 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 MAx Li Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1 See A in FREQ near the figure Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 e See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2203 DECELER TIME 1 B 0 Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1 Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ MAX S curve 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 FREQ Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1 See B in the figure Shape is defined as a ramp unless additional time is specified here to reach the
105. Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing xe if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC MAIN MENU 1 by pressing EZ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR TEXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on the menu with keys LOC QU ASSISTANTS 1 CK and SY 2 and pressing TJ DNE stant Application Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 Select the assistant with keys A and amp w P and press AX LOC UPAR EDIT If you select any other assistant than the Start up Assistant it guides you 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 and 5 below After that you can select another assistant on the Assistants menu or exit the Assistants mode The Motor Set up Assistant is used here as an example EXIT 00 00 SAVE z i i i i LOC UCHOICE If you select the Start up Assistant it activates the first assistant which guides Do you want to you through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 continue with and 5 below The Start up Assistant then asks if you want to continue with the naima setup SKI next assistant or skip it select the appropriate answer with keys AN and EXIT CV gt and press SS If you choose to skip the Start up Assistant asks the 00 00 OK same question about the next assistant and so on 4 To speci
106. ENABLE Enables disables the use of an encoder s Z pulse to define the motor shaft s zero position When enabled a Z pulse input resets parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero to define the shaft s zero position This function requires an encoder that provides Z pulse signals O DISABLE Z pulse input is not present or ignored if present 1 ENABLE A Z pulse input resets parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE to zero 5011 POSITION RESET Resets the encoder s position feedback This parameter is self clearing O DISABLE Inactive 1 ENABLE Resets the encoder position feedback Parameters reset depends on the state of parameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE 5010 0 DISABLE Reset applies to parameters 0147 MECH REVS and 0146 MECH ANGLE 5010 1 ENABLE Reset applies only to parameter 0147 MECH REVS Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 171 Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE This group defines set up variables for a fieldbus adapter FBA communication module For more information on these parameters refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Code Description 5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module O NOT DEFINED Module not found or not properly connected or parameter 9802 is not set to 4 EXT FBA 1 PROFIBUS DP 16 INTERBUS 21 LONWORKS 32 CANopen 37
107. Email info clrwtr com 224 ACS550 User s Manual Mechanical and electrical installation FBA WARNING Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Overview The FBA fieldbus adapter is a plug in module that fits in the drive s expansion slot 2 The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws The screws also ground the shield for the module cable and connect the module GND signals to the drive control board On installation of the module electrical connection to the drive is automatically established through the 34 pin connector Mounting procedure 1 Note Install the input power and motor cables first Geass oases 2 ois 1 Insert the module carefully into the drive expansion slot 2 until the retaining clips lock the module into position 2 Fasten the two screws included to the stand offs Note Correct installation of the screws is essential for fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module X00301 3 Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit box and install the cable clamp for the network cable Ly 4 Route the network cable through the cable clamp enmmnmm pH 5 Connect the network cable to the module s network connector 6 Tighten the cable clamp 7 Install the conduit box cover 1 screw 8 For configuration information see the following X00302 section Communication s
108. Ense e PEHAIHENeI ion opi quA 247 magnetization identification 99 pequiren ant E PAN ENE RE a stall fault code 246 S Aa ee an NAP I ge AG c3 thermal protection 273 as OMAN Claes uo usa MERE a bases ood motor cable Ee init power checking insulation 24 length maintenance 400 V GIVES ai duced sed ds 272 capacitors 1 2 a n pe BG PG alae 258 600 V drives 273 control panel 2585 due MN uu en MR e ra O ET hieat sink Su dee acne teak be uda 255 max length 271 internal enclosure fan 257 requirements 274 NOVA Se o contac ee waite a bane hs 255 requirements EMC 274 Malni fanh ona en Ad anna Sena 256 motor connection triggers parameter group PRE E A 139 lugs for R6 Nanana quond a ea ao a nade Sia a Va se 269 manuals terminal size 268 list of ACS550 manuals 2 torgue var idi do s eser iai cen OI O OS AA 268 providing feedback 309 motor control mapping parameter group 137 actual value FBA generic profile 244 control mode parameter PR 98 EFB modbus ee ub ul serae f 202 IR compensation parameters 137 materials MERECE 290 motor potentiometer macro 75 EXHI ve IN O motor temperature frequency parameter 126 measure p
109. Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 38 How to control the drive through the I O interface ACS550 User s Manual The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog inputs when the motor start up is performed and the default standard parameter settings are valid Displays of the Basic Control Panel are shown as an example PRELIMINARY SETTINGS If you need to change the direction of rotation check that parameter 1003 is set to 3 REQUEST Ensure that the control connections are wired according to the connection diagram given for the ABB Standard macro Ensure that the drive is in remote control Press key to switch between remote and local control Start by switching digital input DI1 on Assistant Control Panel The arrow starts rotating It is dotted until the setpoint is reached Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing fast and stops after the setpoint is reached Regulate the drive output frequency motor speed by adjusting the voltage of analog input Al1 CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF ROTATION OF TH Reverse direction Switch digital input DI2 on Forward direction Switch digital input DI2 off STOPPING THE MOTOR Switch digital input DI1 off The motor stops Assistant Control Panel The arrow stops rotating Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing slowly See section ABB Standard macro on page 72 In remote cont
110. G40 Al P4016 PID1 Current PID1 Out Torque Power P4014 HP4015 H Gun P4017 PID Act Value Torque Power Note In order to activate and use the PID controller parameter 1106 must be set to value 19 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 160 ACS550 User s Manual PID controller Advanced The ACS550 has two separate PID controllers Process PID PID1 and External PID PID2 Process PID PID1 has 2 separate sets of parameters Process PID PID1 SET1 defined in Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and Process PID PID1 SET2 defined in Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 You can select between the two different sets by using parameter 4027 Typically two different PID controller sets are used when the load of the motor changes considerably from one situation to another You can use External PID PID2 defined in Group 42 EXT TRIM PID in two different ways Instead of using additional PID controller hardware you can set outputs of the ACS550 to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve In this case set parameter 4230 to value 0 0 is the default value You can use External PID PID2 to trim or fine tune the speed of the ACS550 Code Description 4001 GAIN Defines the PID controller s gain e The setting range is 0 1 100 e At 0 1 the PID controller output changes one tenth as much as the error value
111. Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 270 Wire size ms m g rimping 0 0 mm kcmil Manufacturer Ring lug tool crimps AWG Burndy YAL26T38 MY29 3 2 lisco CRA 2 0 IDT 12 1 70 2 0 lisco CCL 2 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas 8 Betts 54110 TBM 8 3 Burndy YAL27T38 MY29 3 2 lisco CRA 3 0 IDT 12 1 95 3 0 lisco CCL 3 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas 8 Betts 54111 TBM 8 3 Burndy YA28R4 MY29 3 2 lisco CRA 4 0 IDT 12 1 95 3 0 lisco CCL 4 0 38 MT 25 2 Thomas amp Betts 54112 TBM 8 4 Screw on terminal lugs 2 Use the following procedure to attach cables if screw on terminal lugs are supplied and the cable size is 95 mm 3 0 AWG or larger 1 Attach the supplied screw on lugs to the drive end of the cables 2 Attach screw on lugs to the drive N X60003 ACS550 User s Manual Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 271 Motor connections WARNING Never connect line power to the drive output terminals U2 V2 or W2 Line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the drive If frequent bypassing is required use mechanically interlocked switches or contactors WARNING Do not connect any motor with a nominal voltage less than one half of the drive s nominal input voltage WARNING Di
112. REV on the bottom line starts flashing slowly Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing rapidly It stops flashing when the drive reaches the setpoint e To stop the drive in local control press C gt e To start the drive in local control press lt lt gt gt How to change the direction of the motor rotation You can change the direction of the motor rotation in any mode Step Action Display 1 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local LOC control by pressing ED The display briefly shows message LoC before Hz returning to the previous display OUTPUT FWD 2 To change the direction from forward FWD shown at the bottom to LOC reverse REV shown at the bottom or vice versa press AS m Hz OUTPUT REV Note Parameter 7003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 REQUEST Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Output mode In the Output mode you can 65 monitor actual values of up to three Group 01 OPERATING DATA signals one signal at a time start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control You get to the Output mode by pressing 7 until the display shows text OUTPUT at the bottom The display shows the value of one Group 07 OPERATING DATA signal
113. Selects the flying start mode Vector control modes Not applicable SCALAR FREQ mode The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor useful if the motor is already rotating and if the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency 4 TORQ BOOST Selects the automatic torque boost mode SCALAR FREQ mode only May be necessary in drives with high starting torque Torque boost is only applied at start ending when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is equal to reference In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 5 FLY BOOST Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode SCALAR FREQ mode only Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized If the speed is found to be zero the torque boost is done 8 RAMP Immediate start from zero frequency 2102 STOP FUNCTION Selects the motor stop method 1 COAST Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method The motor coasts to stop 2 RAMP Selects using a deceleration ramp Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 whichever is active 2103 DC MAGN TIME Defines the pre magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode After the start command the drive pre magnet
114. U1 frame sizes R1 R4 Remove the EM1 screw drive is shipped with EM3 removed see section Power connection diagrams on page 20 Frame sizes R5 R6 Remove both the F1 and F2 screws see section Power connection diagrams page 27 Where EMC requirements exist check for excessive emission propagated to neighboring low voltage networks In some cases the natural suppression in transformers and cables is sufficient If in doubt use a supply transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings Do NOT install an external RFI EMC filter Using an EMC filter grounds the input power through the filter capacitors which could be dangerous and could damage the drive Drive s power connection terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s power connection terminals U1 V1 W1 Frame U2 V2 W2 Earthing PE terminal size BRK UDC terminals Max terminal size Torque Max terminal size Torque mm AWG N m Ib ft mm AWG N m Ib ft R11 6 8 1 4 1 4 10 1 4 1 R21 10 6 1 4 1 10 1 4 1 R31 25 3 1 8 1 3 16 1 8 1 3 R4 50 1 0 2 1 5 35 2 2 R5 70 2 0 15 11 70 2 0 15 11 R6 185 350 MCM 40 30 95 4 0 8 6 00467918 xls B 1 Aluminium cable cannot be used with frame sizes R1 R5 because of its lower capacity Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 U
115. WORD Bit 9 REMOTE SUPERVISION 10011 STATUS WORD Bit 10 ABOVE LIMIT REV REF 10012 STATUS WORD Bit 11 EXT2 REV ACT 10013 STATUS WORD Bit 12 RUN ENABLE PANEL LOCAL 10014 STATUS WORD Bit 13 N A FIELDBUS LOCAL 10015 STATUS WORD Bit 14 N A EXT2 ACT 10016 STATUS WORD Bit 15 N A FAULT 10017 STATUS WORD Bit 16 Reserved ALARM 10018 STATUS WORD Bit 17 Reserved REQ MAINT 10019 STATUS WORD Bit 18 Reserved DIRLOCK 10020 STATUS WORD Bit 19 Reserved LOCALLOCK 10021 STATUS WORD Bit 20 Reserved CTL MODE 10022 STATUS WORD Bit 21 Reserved Reserved 10023 STATUS WORD Bit 22 Reserved Reserved 10024 STATUS WORD Bit 23 Reserved Reserved 10025 STATUS WORD Bit 24 Reserved Reserved 10026 STATUS WORD Bit 25 Reserved Reserved 10027 STATUS WORD Bit 26 Reserved REQ_CTL Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 205 Modbus Internal location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE ref all profiles 5305 0 or 2 5305 1 10028 STATUS WORD Bit 27 Reserved REO REF1 10029 STATUS WORD Bit 28 Reserved REO REF2 10030 STATUS WORD Bit 29 Reserved REO REF2EXT 10031 STATUS WORD Bit 30 Reserved ACK STARTINH 10032 STATUS WORD Bit 31 Reserved ACK OFF ILCK 10033 DI1 DI1 DI 10034 DI2 DI2 DI2 10035 DI3 DI3 DI3 10036 DI4 DI4 DI4 10037 DI5 DI5 DI5 10038 DIG DI6 DI6 1 Active low For the 1xxxx
116. after an error step error remains constant Error value Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set the proportional gain Controller output Controller output g e Error value Kp re t gt 2302 INTEGRATION TIME a Controller output O Sets the integration time for the speed controller The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes for a constant K e error value Shorter integration times correct continuous errors faster Control becomes unstable if the integration time is too short Kp e The figure shows the speed controller output after an error step error remains constant Note You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set the integration time Gain K 1 T Integration time gt 0 Tp Derivation time 0 e Error value 2303 DERIVATION TIME Sets the derivation time for the speed controller Derivative action makes the control more responsive to error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a PI controller otherwise as a PID controller The figure below shows the speed controller output after an error step when the error remains constant a poe ee Controller output Ae Kp Tp Ts Kp e Error value Gain K
117. and assigns a digital input starting with DI1 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Speed Reg Motor Not allowed DI2 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 DI6 Free DI3 DI6 Free 2 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 DI6 Free DI4 DI6 Free 3 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 4 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 5 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Fifth PFC Relay DIG Free 6 Not allowed DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Thi
118. at the position stored in memory e Ifthe PFC relay configuration is changed or if the PFC enable value is changed the rotation is reset See the first T P 8119 10096 bullet above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 181 Code Description 8120 INTERLOCKS Defines operation of the Interlock function When the Interlock function is enabled An interlock is active when its command signal is absent An interlock is inactive when its command signal is present The ACS550 will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor s interlock is active the control panel displays an alarm 2015 PFC LOCK Wire each Interlock circuit as follows e Wire a contact of the motor s On Off switch to the Interlock circuit the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next available motor e Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay or other protective device in the motor circuit to the Interlock input the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor 0 NOT SEL Disables the Interlock function All digital inputs are available for other purposes Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled 1 DI1 Enables the Interlock function
119. before the drive applies power So the PFC Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star delta starter 8123 PFC ENABLE Selects PFC control When enabled PFC control Switches in or out auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases Parameters 8109 START FREQ 1 to 8114 Low FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down as auxiliary motors are added and adjusts the speed regulated motor output up as auxiliary motors are taken off line Provides Interlock functions if enabled Requires 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ 0 NOT SEL Disables PFC control 1 ACTIVE Enables PFC control Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 186 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 8124 JACC IN AUX STOP Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero to maximum frequency ramp This PFC acceleration ramp e Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched off Replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECELI e Applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an amount equal to the output of the switched off auxiliary motor Then the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies O NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this
120. by the user parameters such as those created by the ID Run view the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL BACKUP INFO This includes e g the type and rating of the drive where the backup was made It is useful to check this information when you are going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to ensure that the drives match restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD FULL SET This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system copy a partial parameter set part of the full set from the control panel to a drive DOWNLOAD APPLICATION The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE and Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET1 A user set includes Group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User par
121. cables General recommendations Use multi core cables with a braided copper wire screen temperature rated at 60 C 140 F or above Double shielded Example JAMAK by Draka NK Cables Example NOMAK by Draka NK Cables Single shielded At the drive end twist the screen together into a bundle not longer than five times its width and connected to terminal X1 1 for digital and analog I O cables or to either X1 28 or X1 32 for RS485 cables Leave the other end of the cable shield unconnected Route control cables to minimize radiation to the cable Route as far away as possible from the input power and motor cables at least 20 cm 8 in Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are at an angle as near 90 as possible Stay atleast 20 cm 8 in from the sides of the drive Use care in mixing signal types on the same cable Do not mix relay controlled signals using more than 30 V and other control signals in the same cable Runrelay controlled signals as twisted pairs especially if voltage 48 V Relay controlled signals using less than 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 282 ACS550 User s Manual Note Never mix 24 V DC and 115 230 V AC signals in the same cable Analog cables Recommendations for analog signal runs
122. change the value of a parameter Parameters 49 How to select the monitored signals Parameters 50 How to do guided tasks specification of related parameter sets Assistants 51 with assistants How to view and edit changed parameters Changed Parameters 54 How to view faults Fault Logger 55 How to reset faults and alarms Output Fault 249 How to show hide the clock change date and time formats set the Clock Set 56 clock and enable disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Parameter Backup 59 How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Parameter Backup 59 How to view backup information Parameter Backup 60 How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals O Settings 61 Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual How to get help 45 Step Action Display Press to read the context sensitive help text for the item that is highlighted If help text exists for the item it is shown on the display LOC UPAR GROUPS 10 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC UHELP This group defines external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and EXIT 00 00 If the whole text is not v
123. compensation P 2603 2604 IR COMP FREQ Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is 0 V in B of motor frequency p f Hz 2605 U F RATIO Selects the form for the U f voltage to frequency ratio below field weakening point 1 LINEAR Preferred for constant torque applications 2 SQUARED Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications Square is more silent for most operating frequencies Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 138 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 2606 SWITCHING FREQ Sets the switching frequency for the drive Also see parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching frequency derating on page 262 Higher switching frequencies mean less noise The 1 4 and 8 kHz switching frequencies are available for all types except for ACS550 01 246A 4 only 1 and 4 kHz are available e The 12 kHz switching frequency is available only if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ e The 12 kHz switching frequency is available for 200 V and 400 V frame sizes R1 R4 except for the R4 types ACS550 01 087A 4 and ACS550 U1 097A 4 and for 600 V frame sizes R2 R4 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL f The switching frequency may be reduced if the ACS550 t A R1 R4 drives see par 2606 internal temperature rises above a limit See the figure
124. control mode Reference 1 is frequency reference in Hz Reference 2 is frequency reference in 100 is absolute maximum frequency equal to the value of parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ or 2007 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT Defines the nominal motor voltage Must equal the value on the motor rating plate e The ACS550 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the input power mains voltage Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 99 Code Description 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR Defines the nominal motor current Must equal the value on the motor rating plate Range allowed 0 2 2 0 long where lpg is drive current 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Defines the nominal motor frequency Range 10 500 Hz typically 50 or 60 Hz Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM VOLT Field weakening point Nom Freq Supply Volt Mot Nom Volt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER Defines the nominal motor power Must equal the value on the motor rating plate 9910 ID RUN This parameter controls a self calibration process called the Motor ID Run During this process the drive operates
125. control panel are stored immediately to permanent memory O DONE Value changes automatically when all parameters are saved 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to permanent memory Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 123 Code Description 1608 START ENABLE 1 Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 1 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on the panel display The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal Bit 2 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 1 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DI1
126. defaults 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM for signals 2 and 3 are always 0704 CURRENT and 0705 TORQUE respectively CURRENT To change the default signals select up to three signals from Group 01 104 OPERATING DATA to be shown CANCEL 100500 SAVE Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of POC EVA the signal parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA number of the 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM parameter without the leading zero e g 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE 105 TOROU E Value 100 means that no signal is displayed gt i PY CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM 2 Select how you want the signals to be displayed as a decimal number or a bar LOC PAR EDIT graph For decimal numbers you can specify the decimal point location or use 3404 gUTPUT1 DSP FORM the decimal point location and unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT For DIRECT details see parameter 3404 9 Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Signal 2 parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 3 Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if parameter LOC UPAR EDIT 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Hz Signal 2 parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT 3 Signal 3 parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 4 Select the scalings for th
127. does not support languages See 9901 LANGUAGE parameter 9901 for the values of the available language ENGLISH alternatives You find parameter descriptions in section 0 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Complete parameter descriptions starting on page 98 The general parameter setting procedure is described below for the Basic Control Panel You find more detailed instructions for the Basic Control Panel on page 67 Instructions for the Assistant Control Panel are on page 49 The general parameter setting procedure REM E Fo 1 To go to the Main menu press X 7 if the bottom line shows OUTPUT r otherwise press 77 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom MENU 2 Press keys AN TV until you see PAr and press N REM ur O le Na PAR 3 Find the appropriate parameter group with Keys A K v and press REM 2 0 0 1 SI PAR 4 Find the appropriate parameter in the group with Keys CENI SY Z REM 2 O O 2 PAR 5 Press and hold for about two seconds until the parameter value is REM 1 5 0 0 rpm shown with under the value PAR FWD 6 Change the value with keys a w 2 The value changes faster while REM 1 6 0 0 rpm you keep the key pressed down PAR FWD 7 Save the parameter value by pressing IT REM 2 O O 2 PAR Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS
128. following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the STATUS WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives profile EFB STATUS WORD See parameter 5320 Bit Name Value Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram RDY_ON READY TO SWITCH ON NOT READY TO SWITCH ON RDY_RUN READY TO OPERATE OFF1 ACTIVE RDY_REF OPERATION ENABLED OPERATION INHIBITED TRIPPED FAULT No fault OFF_2_STA OFF2 INACTIVE OFF2 ACTIVE OFF_3 STA OFF3 INACTIVE OFF3 ACTIVE SWC_ON_INHIB SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE ALARM Alarm See section Alarm listing on page 250 for details on alarms No alarm AT_SETPOINT OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value REMOTE Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE_LIMIT Supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION Supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit Bit remains 0 until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION 11 EXT CTRL LOC External control loca
129. for EXT1 s reference definitions 1 DI1 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 D11 activated EXT2 DI1 de activated EXT1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 above 7 EXT2 Selects external control location 2 EXT2 See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2 s Start Stop Dir definitions See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2 s reference definitions 8 COMM Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word Bit 5 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 defines the active external control location EXT1 or EXT2 See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 9 TIMED FUNC 1 Assigns control to EXT or EXT2 based on the state of the Timed Function Timed Function activated EXT2 Timed Function de activated ExT1 See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 10 12 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timed Function See TIMED FUNC 1 above 1 DI1 INV Assigns control to EXT or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 D11 activated ExT1 DI1 de activated EXT2 2 6 DIZ INV DIG INV Assigns control to EXT or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above 1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference ReF1 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the referen
130. in the discrete values list 5029 Memory is not ready try again 5030 Request is invalid 5031 Drive is not ready e g due to low DC voltage 5032 Parameter error was detected 5040 Selected parameter set can t be found in the current parameter backup 5041 Parameter backup doesn t fit into memory 5042 Selected parameter set can t be found in the current parameter backup 5043 No start inhibit was granted 5044 Parameter backup versions do not match Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 254 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 5050 Parameter upload was aborted 5051 File error was detected 5052 Parameter upload attempt has failed 5060 Parameter download was aborted 5062 Parameter download attempt has failed 5070 Panel backup memory write error was detected 5071 Panel backup memory read error was detected 5080 Operation is not allowed because the drive is not in local mode 5081 Operation is not allowed because a fault is active 5083 Operation is not allowed because parameter lock is not open 5084 Operation is not allowed because drive is busy try again 5085 Download is not allowed because drive types are incompatible 5086 Download is not allowed because drive mo
131. l i 170 fault swapped wires 199 position reset enable parameter 170 feedback from drive 197 zero pulse detected data parameter 102 A E ien sel activate re zero pulse enable parameter 170 misc drive control activate 011111111111 194 energy Modbus actual valies o cas oc cece mna 208 intake in kWh data parameter 103 PID control setpoint source activate 196 intake a MWh data parameter 103 planning o a oe wet cc ine as 190 error value inversion PID parameter 161 a ER AREA Na 202 exception codes EFB modbus 208 reference scaling ABB drives profile 218 external comm module parameter group relay output control activate 195 see FBA drive parameters SebUp ini E ie Band 191 external commands selection parameter 107 start stop direction control activate 193 external control selection parameter 109 state diagram 217 external fault status word 212 automatic reset parameter 143 termination 191 fault codes 246 EFB drive parameters 173 parameters 140 protocol parameter group 173 external reference data parameter 100 baud rate parameter 173 command words data parame
132. local and remote control How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing NEN if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC W MAIN MENU 1 by pressing CZ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go the I O Settings mode by selecting I O SETTINGS on the menu with keys LOC UI O SETTINGS I CRS and v and pressing 5 amp 5 ANALOG INPUTS AI RELAY OUTPUTS AUS ANALOG OUTPUTS AOUT PANEL EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 Select the I O group e g DIGITAL INPUTS with keys Anand S w 7 and LOC USHOW I O 1 press amp After a brief pause the display shows the current settings for the i e STOP EL selection DI2 DI3 EXIT 00 00 4 Select the setting line with a parameter number with keys AN and XV LOC UPAR EDIT EDIT and press sx 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 5 Specify a new value for the setting with keys Anand XV LOC UPAR EDIT Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the DI l 2 displayed value with the default value 2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 6 To save the new value press X LOC SHOW I O 1 To cancel the new value and keep the original press ae 1 START STOP EL p g p OZ DIA
133. mW 12 V 10 mA amp 24 RO2B Q 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable Default Fault 1 26 RO3A Maximum 250 VAC 30 VDC 2A NT Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 27 RO3B f Digital input impedance 1 5 kohm Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V 2 Default values depend on the macro used Values specified are for the default macro See chapter Application macros on page 71 Note Terminals 3 6 and 9 are at the same potential Note For safety reasons the fault relay signals a fault when the ACS550 is powered down WARNING All ELV Extra Low Voltage circuits connected to the drive must be used N within a zone of equipotential bonding i e within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing between them This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding The terminals on the control board as well as on the optional modules attachable to the board fulfil the Protective Extra Low Voltage PELV requirements stated in EN 50178 provided that the external circuits connected to the terminals also fulfil the requirements and the installation site is below 2000 m 6562 ft You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration
134. mode Timed function can be used to change between external reference and a maximum of three constant speeds or to change between a maximum of 4 selectable speeds i e constant speeds 1 2 3 and 4 1 EXT CS1 2 3 Selects an external speed when no timed function is active selects Constant speed 1 when only Timed function 1 is active Selects Constant speed 2 when only Timed function 2 is active and selects Constant speed 3 when both Timed functions 1 and 2 are active TIMER1 TIMER2 Function 0 O lExternal reference 1 O Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 2 cs1 2 3 4 Selects Constant speed 1 when no timer is active selects Constant speed 2 when only Timed function 1 is active selects Constant speed 3 when only Timed function 2 is active selects Constant speed 4 when both Timed functions are active TIMER1 TIMER2 Function 0 0 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 0 1 Constant speed 3 1204 1 1 Constant speed 4 1205 S S S WH Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 115 Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS This group defines the limits and the filtering for analog inputs Code Description 1301 MINIMUM Al1 Defines the minimum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog
135. on page 267 Type code Normal use Heavy duty use Frame ACS550 x1 hon PN PN lona Pha Pha sie see below A kW hp A kW hp Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 03A3 4 3 3 11 1 5 2 4 0 75 1 R1 04A1 4 4 1 1 5 2 3 3 1 1 1 5 R1 05A4 4 5 4 2 2 Note 1 4 1 1 5 Note 1 R1 06A9 4 6 9 3 3 5 4 2 2 3 R1 08A8 4 8 8 4 5 6 9 3 3 R1 012A 4 11 9 5 5 7 5 8 8 4 5 R1 015A 4 15 4 7 5 10 11 9 5 5 7 5 R2 023A 4 23 11 15 15 4 7 5 10 R2 031A 4 31 15 20 23 11 15 R3 038A 4 38 18 5 25 31 15 20 R3 044A 4 Note 3 44 22 30 38 18 5 25 R4 045A 4 Note 3 45 22 30 38 18 5 25 R3 059A 4 59 30 40 44 22 30 R4 072A 4 72 37 50 59 30 40 R4 077A 4 Note 4 77 Note 2 60 65 Note 2 50 R5 078A 4 Note 4 77 Note 2 60 72 Note 2 50 R4 087A 4 Note 5 87 45 Note 1 77 37 Note 1 R4 096A 4 Note 5 96 45 75 77 37 60 R5 097A 4 97 Note 2 75 77 Note 2 60 R4 124A 4 Note 6 124 55 100 96 45 75 R6 125A 4 Note 6 125 55 100 96 45 75 R5 157A 4 157 75 125 124 55 100 R6 180A 4 180 90 150 156 75 125 R6 195A 4 195 110 Note 1 162 90 Note 1 R6 246A 4 245 132 200 192 110 150 R6 00467918 xls B 1 Not available in ACS550 U1 series 2 Not available in ACS550 01 series 3 The ACS550 01 045A 4 an R3 frame size replaces the ACS550 01 044A 4 discontinued in 2007 4 The ACS550 U1 078A 4 an R4 frame size replaces the ACS550 U1 077A 4 discontinued
136. only copy of the Fault Word 3 11 MOTOR STALL SERIAL 1 ERR System error See parameter 0305 12 CB OVERTEMP EFB CON FILE System error 13 EXT FAULT 1 FORCE TRIP System error 14 EXT FAULT 2 MOTOR PHASE System error 15 EARTH FAULT OUTP WIRING Param setting fault 0308 ALARM WORD 1 When an prai KA e Bit 0308 ALARM WORD 1 0309 ALARM WORD 2 correspondin or the active alarm EE AE oe ZA 0 OVERCURRENT OFF BUTTON Each alarm has a dedicated bit 1 OVERVOLTAGE PID SLEEP allocated within Alarm Words 2 UNDERVOLTAGE ID RUN Bits remain set until the whole alarm word is reset Reset by writing zero to 3 DIRLOCK Reserved the word 4 COMM LOSS START ENABLE 1 The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in 95 JAITLOSS START ENABLE 2 Bit 0 displays as 0001 All zeros and a 6 Al2 LOSS EMERGENCY STOP 1in Bit 15 displays as 8000 7 PANEL LOSS ENCODER ERROR 0309 profes ine os 8 DEVICE OVERTEMP FIRST START RA eee 9 MOTOR TEMP Reserved 10 Reserved USER LOAD CURVE 11 MOTOR STALL START DELAY 12 AUTORESET Reserved 13 IPFC AUTOCHANGE Reserved 14 PFC ILOCK Reserved 15 Reserved Reserved Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 106 ACS550 User s Manual Group 04 FAULT HISTORY This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive Code Description 0401 LAST FAULT 0 Clear the fault hi
137. operation 8116 AUX MOT STOP D Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit parameter 8112 8113 or 8114 for this time period before the auxiliary motor stops See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 178 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 8117 INR OF AUX MOT Sets the number of auxiliary motors Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The Autochange function if used requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor e The following describes the set up of the required relay outputs Relay outputs As noted above each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays The ACS550 provides relay outputs RO1 RO3 e An external digital output module can be added to provide relay outputs RO4 RO6 e Parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 define respectively how relays RO1 RO6 are used the parameter value 31 PFC defines the relay as used for PFC The ACS550 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in
138. or condition that activates relay 3 what relay output 3 means See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 1 Control event EE ae On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY zie oe Defines the switch off delay for relay 1 Relay status On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC Pi m 1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY 1406 RO 2 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 2 e See RO 1 ON DELAY 1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 2 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1408 RO 3 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 3 See RO 1 ON DELAY Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 118 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY Switch off delay for relay 3 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 4 6 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4 6 what relay output 4 6 means See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 4 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 4 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1415 RO 5 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 5 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY
139. output 3 Fault 1 J1 R o Al1 0 10 V N 107 AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 80 Connection example of a two wire sensor ACS550 User s Manual Many applications use process PI D and need a feedback signal from the process The feedback signal is typically connected to analog input 2 AI2 The macro wiring diagrams in this chapter show the connection when a separately powered sensor is used The figure below gives an example of a connection using a two wire sensor X1 control board p Z 4 20mA 5 Al2 6 AGND Process actual value measurement 0 4 20 mA Ri 100 ohm X1 control board 10 24V 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 24 V DC 250 mA Note The sensor is supplied through its current output Thus the output signal must be 4 20 mA not 0 20 mA Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 81 User parameter sets In addition to the standard application macros it is possible to save two user parameter sets into the permanent memory and load them at a later time A user parameter set consists of the user parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identific
140. parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL PAR FWD MODE is 1 VECTOR SPEED the default for signal 1 is 0102 SPEED otherwise cc 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The defaults for signals 2 and 3 are always 0104 10 D CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE respectively PAR FWD To change the default signals select from Group 01 OPERATING DATA up to three signals to be browsed Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3407 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in Group 01 OPERATING DATA number of the parameter without the leading zero e g 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE Value 100 means that no signal is displayed Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM For example if 3401 0 and 3415 O browsing is disabled and only the signal specified by 3408 appears in the display If all three parameters are set to 0 i e no signals are selected for monitoring the panel displays text NA 2 Specify the decimal point location or use the decimal point location and LOC unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT Bar graphs are not available for Basic Operation Panel For details see parameter 3404 PAR FWD Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Signal 2 parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 3 Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if LOC parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 PAR FWD Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signa
141. periods and a time period can be in multiple timers Time Period 1 3602 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY 1 Time Period 2 3606 START TIME 2 3607 STOP TIME 2 3608 START DAY 2 3609 STOP DAY 2 Time Period 3 3610 START TIME 3 3611 STOP TIME 3 3612 START DAY 3 3613 STOP DAY 3 Time Period 4 Timer 1 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Timer 2 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC Timer 3 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC Timer 4 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC 3614 START TIME 4 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 STOP DAY 4 Booster 3622 BOOSTER SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME A parameter can be connected to only one timer 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 1201 CONST SPEED SEL Timer 2 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 8126 TIMED AUTOCHNG Timer 1 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 153 Code Description 3601 TIMERS ENABLE Selects the source for the timer enable signal 0 NOT SEL Timed functions are disabled 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal The digital input must be activated to enable the timed function 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI
142. profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including protocols available on the FBA module This section describes the ABB Drives profile implemented for FBA modules Control Word As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives profile FBA CONTROL WORD Bit Name Value Commanded state Comments OFF1 CONTROL 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence Enter OFF1 ACTIVE Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active OFF2 CONTROL OPERATING Continue operation OF F2 inactive EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence Enter OFF2 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED OFF3 CONTROL OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence Enter OFF3 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode INHIBIT OPERATION OPERATION ENABLED Ent
143. s Manual Parameters mode In the Parameters mode you can view and change parameter values start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Step Action Display Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the Output mode otherwise EXIT a by pressing CZ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu LOC MAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR TEXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS on the menu with keys ENTER Anand w P and pressing ST LOC UPAR GROUPS 01 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR 11 REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 00 00 SEL Select the appropriate parameter group with keys AN and Cw SEL Press Ew LOC 7 PAR GROUPS 99 99 START UP DATA 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC PARAMETERS APPLIC MACRO 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 EDIT Select the appropriate parameter with keys AN and lt w 2 The current value of the parameter is shown below the selected parameter LOC PARAMETERS 9901 LANGUAGE 9902 APPLIC MACRO ABB STANDARD 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC U PAR EDIT 9902 APPLIC MACRO ABB STANDARD 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE
144. see the languages supported by the different Assistant Control Panels Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 42 Assistant Control Panel Features ACS550 User s Manual The Assistant Control Panel features alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display language selection for the display Start up Assistant to ease drive commissioning copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system context sensitive help real time clock Overview The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Assistant Control Panel Use Status LED Green for normal operation If LED is flashing or red see section Diagnostic displays on page 243 STOP START LCD display Divided into three main areas a Status line variable depending on the mode of operation see section Status line on page 43 b Center variable in general shows signal and parameter values menus or lists Shows also faults and alarms c Bottom line shows current functions of the two soft keys and if enabled the clock display Soft key 1 Function depends on the context The text in the lower left corner of the LCD display indicates the function
145. sleep when the other is rotating X X X X X X X X NIN O N N O x L x gt lt gt lt gt lt N a Ja gt X X gt lt gt lt X RA x L x x x x o As x L L x x w o a a X gt lt gt lt x gt lt x e The table below shows the ACS550 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is enabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV value gt 0 Parameter setting ACS550 Relay assignment 1 Autochange enabled RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6 2 31 31 31 X 31 31 sons x voRA PEC PEC X PFC PFC PFC X PFC PFC X X X X X X PFC 31 31 X 0 PFC PFC X No auxiliary motors but the autochange function is in use Working as a standard PID control w C2 Ja ANA N9 N x V x x HANG AS gt X X gt lt X RA x 2 x x x o a a gt gt lt T gt lt gt lt x lt X gt lt gt lt x gt lt gt lt TI gt lt gt lt gt lt 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the interval between changes e The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when the speed regulated motor is running See par
146. start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal See DI1 INV above 1602 PARAMETER LOCK Determines if the control panel can change parameter values This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs This parameter value can be changed only if the correct pass code is entered See parameter 1603 PASS CODE O LOCKED You cannot use the control panel to change parameter values The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603 1 OPEN You can use the control panel to change parameter values 2 NOT SAVED You can use the control panel to change parameter values but they are not stored in permanent memory Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 SAVE to store changed parameter values to memory 1603 PASS CODE Entering the correct pass code allows you to change the parameter lock See parameter 1602 above The code 358 allows you to change the value of the parameter 1602 once This entry reverts back to 0 automatically 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists O KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source Fault reset is always possible with control pane
147. summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001 40099 for 4xxxx registers above 40098 see the drive parameter list e g 40102 is parameter 0102 Modbus register Access Remarks 40001 CONTROL WORD R W Maps directly to the profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5319 holds a copy in hex format 40002 Reference 1 R W Range 0 20000 scaled to 0 1105 REF1 MAX or 20000 0 scaled to 1105 REF1 MAX 0 40003 Reference 2 R W Range 0 10000 scaled to 0 1108 REF2 MAX or 10000 0 scaled to 1108 REF2 MAX 0 40004 STATUS WORD R Maps directly to the profile S STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5320 holds a copy in hex format 40005 Actual 1 R By default stores a copy of 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Use select using 5310 parameter 5310 to select a different actual value for this register 40006 Actual 2 R By default stores a copy of 0104 CURRENT Use parameter select using 5311 5311 to select a different actual value for this register 40007 Actual 3 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5312 to select an select using 5312 actual value for this register 40008 Actual 4 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5313 to select an select using 5313 actual value for this register 40009 Actual 5 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5314
148. t P 4024 A Sets the motor speed frequency that enables the PID sleep eet Lia NN function a motor speed frequency below this level for at least iy t gt P 4024 the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleep a m function stopping the drive P 4023 Requires 4022 7 INTERNAL mi See the figure A PID output level B PID process feedback 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY n B Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function a motor speed SNL na P 4026 frequency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period pan P 4025 enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above xU mde t gt 4025 WAKE UP DEV Stop Defines the wake up deviation a deviation from the setpoint Start greater than this value for at least the time period 4026 WAKE UP DELAY re starts the PID controller Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale C a e Parameter 4005 0 P 4025 Jaos 1 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation Setpoint Parameter 4005 1 P 4025 j4005 0 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation D e Wake up level can be above or below setpoint mt See the figures e C Wake up level when parameter 4005 1 e D Wake up level when parameter 4005 0 e E Feedback is above wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up F Feedback is below wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 P 4025 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up
149. than the feedback is always larger than a negative difference This keeps feedback values at or above the setpoint Controller does not react to the situation of feedback above setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 13 2 ZONE MAX The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 The drive will control the zone and select the set that has a smaller difference A negative difference a setpoint lower than the feedback is always smaller than a positive difference This keeps feedback values at or below the setpoint Controller does not react to the situation of feedback below setpoint if another zone s feedback is closer to its setpoint 14 2 ZONE AVE The drive calculates the difference between setpoint 1 and feedback 1 as well as setpoint 2 and feedback 2 In addition it calculates the average of the deviations and uses it to control zone 1 Therefore one feedback is kept above its setpoint and another is kept as much below its setpoint 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection Activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 De activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 2 6 DIZ INv DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection See DI1 INV above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com
150. the ACS550 drive 200 mm 8 in Free space is not required on the drive s sides ACS550 drives can be mounted side by side Air flow 208 240 V drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 208 240 V drives Drive Heat loss Air flow ACS550 x1 Frame size BTU hr m3 h ft min 04A6 2 R1 55 189 44 26 06A6 2 R1 73 249 44 26 07A5 2 R1 81 276 44 26 012A 2 R1 118 404 44 26 017A 2 R1 161 551 44 26 024A 2 R2 227 776 88 52 031A 2 R2 285 973 88 52 046A 2 R3 420 1434 134 79 059A 2 R3 536 1829 134 79 075A 2 R4 671 2290 280 165 088A 2 R4 786 2685 280 165 114A 2 R4 1014 3463 280 165 143A 2 R6 1268 4431 405 238 178A 2 R6 1575 5379 405 238 221A 2 R6 1952 6666 405 238 248A 2 R6 2189 7474 405 238 Air flow 380 480 V drives 000467918 xls B The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 380 480 V drives Drive Heat loss Air flow ACS550 x1 Frame size BTU hr m3 h ft min 03A3 4 R1 40 137 44 26 04A1 4 R1 52 178 44 26 05A4 4 R1 73 249 44 26 06A9 4 R1 97 331 44 26 08A8 4 R1 127 434 44 26 012A 4 R1 172 587 44 26 015A 4 R2 232 792 88 52 023A 4 R2 337 1151 88 52 Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 284 ACS550 User s Manual
151. the desired parameter group LOC i 1 PAR FWD 4 Press _ The display shows one of the parameters in the selected LOC group PAR FWD 5 Use keys AN and S w 7 to find the desired parameter Loc 1 1 0 3 PAR FWD 6 Press and hold 4 for about two seconds until the display shows the Loc value of the parameter with underneath indicating that changing of the value is now possible PAR FWD Note When is visible pressing keys A and Cw simultaneously changes the displayed value to the default value of the parameter 7 Use keys Anand SY 7 to select the parameter value When you have Loc changed the parameter value starts flashing PAR FWD To save the displayed parameter value press X7 LOC jh 1 0 3 e To cancel the new value and keep the original press TY Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 68 How to select the monitored signals ACS550 User s Manual Step Action Display 1 You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how LOC 1 they are displayed with Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 49 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values PAR FWD By default you can monitor three signals by browsing see page 65 The LOC 10 4 particular default signals depend on the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO For macros whose default value of
152. the drive is unable to allocate a digital input interlock for each PFC motor parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS and 8127 MOTORS 1015 RESERVED Not used 1016 PAR USER LOAD C Parameter values for the user load curve are inconsistent Check that the following conditions are met 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 lt 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 lt 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 lt 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 lt 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 lt 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 lt 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 lt 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 lt 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 Fault resetting The ACS550 can be configured to automatically reset certain faults Refer to parameter Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET WARNING If an external source for start command is selected and it is active the ACS550 may start immediately after fault reset Flashing red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED Turn the power off for 5 minutes Red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED on not flashing correct the problem and do one of the following Press RESET from the control panel Turn the power off for 5 minutes Depending on the value of 1604 FAULT RESET SEL the following could also be used to reset the drive Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email
153. to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors Heavy duty use 50 overload capability long continuous rms current 50 overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes Pha typical motor power in heavy duty use The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors Sizing The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range To achieve the rated motor power given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Also note that the ratings apply for ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F the maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1 5 Pha If the limit is exceeded motor torque and current are automatically restricted The function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 262 ACS550 User s Manual Derating The load capacity current and power decreases for certain situations as defined below In such situations where full motor power is required oversize the drive so that the derated value provides sufficient capacity For example if your application requires 15 4 A of motor current and a 8 kHz switching frequency calculate the appropriate drive size requirement as follows The minimum size requ
154. to select an select using 5314 actual value for this register 40010 Actual 6 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5315 to select an select using 5315 actual value for this register 40011 Actual 7 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5316 to select an select using 5316 actual value for this register 40012 Actual 8 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5317 to select an select using 5317 actual value for this register 40031 ACS550 CONTROL R W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU WORD LSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0301 40032 ACS550 CONTROL R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU WORD MSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0302 40033 ACS550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU WORD LSW profile s STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0303 40034 ACS550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU WORD MSW profile s STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0304 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 207 For the Modbus protocol drive parameters in Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL report the parameter mapping to 4xxxx Registers Code Description 5310 EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40005
155. 0 ID RUN to 1 ON Save the new setting LOC UPAR EDIT by pressing 9910 ID RUN O 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run go to Loc V 50 OFZ the Output mode by pressing 7 repeatedly until you get 0 o us there a 0 0 DIR 00 00 MENU Press lt gt to start the ID Run The panel keeps switching LOC UC ALARM between the display that was shown when you started the ID ALARM 2019 Run and the alarm display presented on the right ID r n In general it is recommended not to press any control panel 00 00 keys during the ID Run However you can stop the ID Run at any time by pressing CQ After the ID Run is completed the alarm display is not shown LOC FAULT any more FAULT 11 If the ID Run fails the fault display presented on the right is ID RUN FAIL shown 00 00 ID RUN WITH THE BASIC CONTROL PANEL Change parameter 9910 ID RUN to 1 ON Save the new setting Loc 9 9 10 by pressing V PAR FWD LOC 1 PAR FWD If you want to monitor actual values during the ID Run go to LOC O O the Output mode by pressing 7 repeatedly until you get p a there OUTPUT FWD Press lt gt to start the ID Run The panel keeps switching LOC A2 0 19 between the display that was shown when you started the ID Run and the alarm display presented on t
156. 0 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 1200 rpm 20 0 Hz U1 1440 rpm 24 0 Hz Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 88 ACS550 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User 1206 CONST SPEED 5 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 1500 rpm 25 0 Hz U1 1800 rpm 30 0 Hz 1207 CONST SPEED 6 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 2400 rpm 40 0 Hz U1 2880 rpm 48 0 Hz 1208 CONST SPEED 7 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 3000 rpm 50 0 Hz U1 3600 rpm 60 0 Hz 1209 TIMED MODE SEL 1 Ext cs1 2 3 2 cs1 2 3 4 1 2 cs1 2 3 4 Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS 1301 MINIMUM Al1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 1303 FILTER Al1 0 0 10 0s 0 1s 0 1 s 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 1306 FILTER AI2 0 0 10 0s 0 1 s 0 1 s Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0 47 52 1 1 READY 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 0 47 52 1 2 RUN 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 0 47 52 1 3 FAULT 1 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 1406 RO 2 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 1408 RO
157. 00 VALUE Defines together with the previous parameter the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values P 4008 Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 T l gt 0 100 Internal scale 1000 0 4010 SET POINT SEL Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by passed see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL O KEYPAD Control panel provides reference 1 al1 Analog input 1 provides reference 2 Al2 Analog input 2 provides reference 8 COMM Fieldbus provides reference 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 10 comM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Digital inputs acting as a motor potentiometer control provide reference DI3 increases the speed the U stands for up DI4 decreases the reference the D stands for down Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change R Stop command resets the reference to zero NC Reference value is not copied 12 DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3 4D RNC above except Stop command does not reset reference to zero At restart the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate t
158. 000001935 English OTAC 01 User s Manual Pulse Encoder Interface Module User s Manual 3AUA0000001938 English RCAN 01 CANopen Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64504231 English RCNA 01 ControlNet Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64506005 English RDNA 01 DeviceNet Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64504223 English RETA 01 Ethernet Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64539736 English RLON 01 LonWorks Adapter Module User s Manual 3AFE64798693 English RPBA 01 PROFIBUS DP Adapter User s Manual 3AFE64504215 English Typical contents Safety Installation Programming Start up Diagnostics Technical data MAINTENANCE MANUALS Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 150 350 550 3AFE68735190 EN The Industrial wordmark and Product names in the form Drive are registered or pending trademarks of ABB CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation e V ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User Organization Interbus is a registered trademark of Interbus Club LonWorks is a registered trademark of Echelon Corp Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc Modbus and Modbus Plus are registered trademarks of Schneider Automation Inc PROFIBUS is a registered trademark of Profibus Trade Org PROFIBUS DP is a registered trademark of Siemens AG Phone 800
159. 01 LANGUAGE 0 15 0 3 1 O ENGLISH 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 8 31 1 1 ABB STANDARD Y 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED 2 VECTOR TORQUE 1 3 SCALAR FREQ Y 3 SCALAR FREQ 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 115 345 V 1V 230 V Y 01 200 600 V 1V 01 400 V Y U1 230 690 V U1 460 V U1 288 862V 1V U1 575 V Y 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 0 2 long 2 0 long 0 1A 1 0 long Y 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 10 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 0 Hz Y U1 60 0 Hz 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 50 30000 rpm 1 rpm Size dependent Y 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER 02 3 0 Pha 01 0 1 kW 1 0 Pha Y U1 0 1 hp 9910 ID RUN O lt OFF IDMAGN 1 lt ON 1 O OFF IDMAGN Y Group 01 OPERATING DATA 0101 SPEED amp DIR 30000 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0102 SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0104 CURRENT 0 0 2 0 long 0 1A 0105 TORQUE 200 0 200 0 0 1 0106 POWER 2 0 2 0 gt Pha 0 1 kW 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0 2 5 Van 1V 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0 2 0 Van 1V 0110 DRIVE TEMP 0 0 150 0 C 0 1 C 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1rpm 0 1 Hz 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 196 0113 CTRL LOCATION O LOCAL 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 1 0114 RUN TIME R 0 9999 h 1h Oh 0115 KWH COUNTER R 0 9999 kWh 1 kWh 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 196 0118 pi 1 3 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412
160. 05 MAXIMUM AI2 sets A the maximum analog input signal P 1104 MIN Analog input signal P 1105 MAX Ha Analog T T P 1301 P 1302 input signal or 1304 or 1305 1106 REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 0 17 Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 19 PID10UT The reference is taken from the PID1 output See Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and Group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 20 21 Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT i9 PID1 REF2 LIMIT pus e m SELECT J MAX 1107 1108 gt PFC 20 21 MIN 1107 1108 1107 REF2 MIN Sets the minimum for external reference 2 The minimum analog input signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF2 MIN in 96 Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference nominal torque 1108 REF2 MAX Sets the maximum for external reference 2 The maximum analog input signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF2 MAX in Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency or speed maximum process reference
161. 1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input di1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value De activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used See DI1 INV above 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 Sets the first minimum limit for torque 96 Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 Sets the second minimum limit for torque 96 Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 127 Code Description 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 Sets the first maximum limit for torgue Value is a percent of the motor nominal torgue 2018 IMAX TORQUE 2 Sets the second maximum limit for torque Val
162. 1 SUPRV2 UNDER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 drops below the limit 3205 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 144 12 SUPRV3 OVER Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 exceeds the limit 3209 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 144 13 SUPRV3 UNDER Energize relay when third supervised parameter 3207 drops below the limit 3208 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 144 14 AT SET POINT Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency 15 FAULT RST Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto reset delay See parameter 3103 DELAY TIME 16 FLT ALARM Energize relay when fault or alarm occurs 17 EXT CTRL Energize relay when external control is selected 18 REF 2 SEL Energize relay when EXT2 is selected 19 CONST FREQ Energize relay when a constant speed is selected 20 REF LOSS Energize relay when reference or active control place is lost 21 OVERCURRENT Energize relay when an overcurrent alarm or fault occurs 22 OVERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an overvoltage alarm or fault occurs 23 DRIVE TEMP Energize relay when a drive or control board overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 24 UNDERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an undervoltage alarm or fault occurs 25 AI1 LOSS Energize relay when AI1 signal is lost 26 AI2 LOSS
163. 1 2 AI2 4117 ACT2 INPUT 1 7 1 2 AI2 4118 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4119 ACT1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4120 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4121 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 95 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 4122 SLEEP SELECTION 6 7 1 O NOT SEL 4123 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 0 rpm 0 0 Hz 4124 PID SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s 4125 WAKE UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 0 0 4107 4126 WAKE UP DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s Group 42 EXT TRIM PID 4201 GAIN 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4202 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 1 s 60 s 4203 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 4204 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 s 0 1 s 1 0s 4205 ERROR VALUE INV 0 NO 1 YES 1 O NO 4206 UNITS 0 127 1 4 96 4207 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4208 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 0 0 4207 4209 100 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 100 096 4207 4210 SET POINT SEL 0 2 8 17 19 20 1 1 A11 Y 4211 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 40 0 4207 4212 SETPOINT MIN 500
164. 1001 DIR E1 DI EXIT 00 00 Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 62 ACS550 User s Manual Basic Control Panel Features The Basic Control Panel features numeric control panel with an LCD display copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system Overview The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Basic Control Panel pe UU No Use 1 LCD display Divided into five areas Ma LOC 1 1 A FMD 1d ouTPUT a Upper left Control location LOC drive control is local that is from the control panel REM drive control is remote such as the drive I O or fieldbus b Upper right Unit of the displayed value VRTU c Center Variable in general shows parameter and signal values menus or pira ENTER lists Shows also fault and alarm codes pr FAN SN d Lower left and center Panel operation state V MK MA ba OUTPUT Output mode GXSX v2 O PAR Parameter mode MENU Main menu FAYE Fault mode e Lower right Indicators FWD forward REV reverse direction of the motor rotation Flashing slowly stopped Flashing rapidly running not at setpoint Steady running at setpoint Sigil Displayed value can be modified in the Para
165. 108 Actual motor 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2001 2002 10000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torgue1 or 10000 par 1108 2016 2018 torque2 10000 corresponds to 10096 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 4112 4113 PID set2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or COMM AI the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives profile FBA Reference Value setting Al reference scaling REF1 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference A correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1105 100 A11 input signal gt p g 100 0 5 par 1105 p DA 50 100 Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 237 ABB Drives profile FBA Reference Value setting Al reference scaling REF1 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference Acorrection coefficient 200 l l l 100 p l Alt input signal 100 0 5 par 1105
166. 13 3015 obsolete UNDERLOAD UNDERLOAD USER LOAD USER LOAD USER LOAD FUNCTION TIME C MODE C FUNC C TIME No underload functionality 0 0 Underload curve fault generated 1 t 1 1 t Underload curve alarm generated 2 t 1 2 2 t Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 158 ACS550 User s Manual Obs par 3015 3704 3705 3707 3708 3710 3711 3713 3714 3716 3717 UNDER LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD FREQ 1 TORQ FREQ2 TORQ FREQ3 TORQ FREQ4 TORQ FREQ 5 TORQ CURVE Low 1 Low 2 Low 3 LOW 4 Low 5 Hz 16 Hz Hz 76 Hz Hz EU US EU US EU US EU US EU US 10 32 38 17 41 50 23 50 60 30 500 500 30 20 31 37 30 42 50 40 50 60 50 500 500 50 30 31 37 43 42 50 57 50 60 70 500 500 70 10 73 88 17 98 117 23 120 144 30 500 500 30 20 71 86 30 99 119 40 120 144 50 500 500 50 New parameters M6 A oj N oaj aj aj aj a O 0O O O0O O Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 159 Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID PID1 controller Typically only parameters in this group are needed PID controller Basic set up In PID control mod
167. 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Initially the relay is de energized It is energized whenever the supervised parameter goes above the active limit Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Initially the relay is energized It is de energized whenever the supervised parameter goes below the active limit Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LOxHI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LO gt HI 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above LO x HI Note Case LO lt HI represents a normal hysteresis Value of supervised parameter A HI 3203 LO 3202 y Case A A Energized 1 4 i o LLLI Case B A Energized 1 II LILI 0 gt LO gt HI Note Case LO gt HI represents a special hysteresis with two separate supervision limits Value of supervised parameter A Lo 3202 HI 3203 Active limit Case A A Energized 1 UI Li 1 0 gt Case B A Energized 1 Il ILL 0 gt 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Selects the second supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above 3205 SUPERV
168. 1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4 6 have non zero values 1007 PAR FIELDBUS Parameter values are inconsistent Check for and correct MISSING A parameter is set for fieldbus control e g 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM but 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 1008 PAR PFC MODE Parameter values are inconsistent 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must be 3 SCALAR FREQ when 8123 PFC ENABLE is activated Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 249 Fault code Fault name in panel Description and recommended corrective action 1009 PAR PCU 1 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal frequency or speed Check for both of the following 18 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED lt 16 0 8 lt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor Poles lt 0 992 1010 1011 RESERVED Not used 1012 PAR PFC IO 1 IO configuration is not complete not enough relays are parameterized to PFC Or a conflict exists between Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS parameter 8117 NR OF AUX MOT and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1013 PAR PFC IO 2 IO configuration is not complete the actual number of PFC motors parameter 8127 MOTORS does not match the PFC motors in Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1014 PAR PFC IO 3 10 configuration is not complete
169. 2 Adequacy of motor braking torque Applicability of torque control Brake chopper and resistor 25 RESERVED Not used 26 DRIVE ID Internal fault Configuration Block Drive ID is not valid Contact your local ABB representative 27 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration file has an error Contact your local ABB representative 28 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE or Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate Poor connections and or noise on line 29 EFB CON FILE Error in reading the configuration file for the embedded fieldbus 30 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the fieldbus See the fieldbus User s Manual 31 EFB 1 Fault code reserved for the embedded fieldbus EFB protocol application 32 EEB 2 The meaning is protocol dependent 33 EFB 3 34 MOTOR PHASE Fault in the motor circuit One of the motor phases is lost Check for and correct Motor fault Motor cable fault Thermal relay fault if used Internal fault 35 OUTP WIRING Possible power wiring error detected When the drive is not running it monitors for an improper connection between the drive input power and the drive output Check for and correct Proper input wiring line voltage is NOT connected to drive output The fault can be erroneously declared if the input power is a delta grounded sy
170. 2 Defines timer 2 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3609 STOP DAY 2 Defines timer 2 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3610 START TIME 3 Defines timer 3 daily start time See parameter 3602 3611 STOP TIME 3 Defines timer 3 daily stop time See parameter 3603 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 154 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 3612 START DAY 3 Defines timer 3 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3613 STOP DAY 3 Defines timer 3 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3614 START TIME 4 Defines timer 4 daily start time See parameter 3602 3615 STOP TIME 4 Defines timer 4 daily stop time See parameter 3603 3616 START DAY 4 Defines timer 4 weekly start day See parameter 3604 3617 STOP DAY 4 Defines timer 4 weekly stop day See parameter 3605 3622 BOOSTER SEL Selects the source for the booster signal O NOT SEL Booster signal is disabled 1 DI1 Defines DI1 as the booster signal 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines DI2 DI6 as the booster signal 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the booster signal 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the booster signal 3623 BOOSTER TIME Defines the booster ON time Time is started when booster sel
171. 3 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 0 46 52 1 O NOT SEL 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 0 46 52 1 O NOT SEL 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 0 46 52 1 O NOT SEL 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 1415 RO 5 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 1417 RO 6 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 99 159 1 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 1502 O1 CONTENT MIN Defined by par 0103 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX Defined by par 0103 1504 MINIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0 0 mA 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA 1506 FILTER AO1 0 0 10 0 s 0 1 s 0 1 s 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 99 159 1 104 parameter 0104 CURRENT 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Defined by par 0104 1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX Defined by par 0104 1510 MINIMUM AO2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0 0 mA Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 89 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA 1512 FILTER AO2 0 0 10 0
172. 3603 STOP TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3604 START DAY 1 LA 1 1 MONDAY 3605 sTOP DAY 1 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3606 START TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 2 s 00 00 00 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web wWW clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 93 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 3607 STOP TIME 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3608 START DAY 2 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3609 sTOP DAY 2 df 1 1 MONDAY 3610 START TIME 3 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3611 STOP TIME 3 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3612 START DAY 3 14 4 1 1 MONDAY 3613 STOP DAY 3 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3614 START TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3615 STOP TIME 4 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3616 START DAY 4 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3617 STOP DAY 4 1 7 1 1 MONDAY 3622 BOOSTER SEL 6 6 1 O NOT SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 2s 00 00 00 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 4 SRC 0 31 1 O NOT SEL 3629 Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE 3701 USER LOAD C MODE 0 3 1 O NOT SEL 3702 USER LOAD C FUNC 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 1 FAULT 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 10 400 s 1s 20 s 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 5 Hz 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 0 600 1 10 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 0 600 1 300 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 3708 LOAD TO
173. 4 ACC COMPENSATION 0 00 600 00 s 0 01 s 0 00 s 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN 0 OFF 1 lt ON 1 O OFF Group 24 TORQUE CONTROL 2401 TORQ RAMP UP 0 00 120 00 s 0 01 s 0 00 s 2402 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0 00 120 00 s 0 01 s 0 00 s Group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 0 OFF 1 lt ON 1 O OFF 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz O rpm 0 0 Hz 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz O rpm 0 0 Hz 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz O rpm 0 0 Hz 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz O rpm 0 0 Hz 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz O rpm 0 0 Hz 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz O rpm 0 0 Hz Group 26 MOTOR CONTROL 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE 0 OFF 1 ON 1 O OFF 2602 FLUX BRAKING 0 OFF 1 ON 1 O OFF 2603 JIR COMP VOLT 0 0 100 0 V 0 1 V Size dependent 2604 R COMP FREQ 0 100 1 80 2605 U F RATIO 1 LINEAR 2 SQUARED 1 1 LINEAR 2606 SWITCHING FREQ 1 4 8 12 kHz 4 kHz 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL 0 OFF 1 ON 1 1 ON 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO 0 200 1 0 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 2619 DC STABILIZER O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 0 disables 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2902 COOLING FAN ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2903 REVOLUT
174. 550 User s Manual 33 parameter setting procedure is given above The default value 1 ABB STANDARD is suitable in most cases Select the motor control mode parameter 9904 REM 9 9 0 4 1 VECTOR SPEED is suitable in most cases 2 VECTOR TORQ is suitable for PAR FWD torque control applications 3 SCALAR FREQ is recommended Select the application macro parameter 9902 The general REM 9 9 0 2 PAR FWD for multimotor drives when the number of the motors connected to the drive is variable when the nominal current of the motor is less than 20 of the nominal current of the drive when the drive is used for test purposes with no motor connected Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate Note Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on ABB Motors CE O the motor nameplate For example if the motor nominal 3c motor MZAA TEO A speed is 1470 rpm on the No nameplate setting the value of Ins cl F IP 55 parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM mo E A Ha e ue IA IN tE s SPEED to 1500 rpm results in the 400D 150 130 11475 56 10 83 wrong operation of the drive 660Y 50 30 1470 34 0 83 380 V 380D so so 1470 59 oss 8 supply 415D 50 30 1475 54 0 83 440D 60 35 1770 59 0 83 voltage Cat no 3GAA 202 001 ADA 6312 C3 da 6210 C3 180
175. 550 behavior if communication is lost was configured earlier in section Communication fault on page 196 The parameters are 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Section Complete parameter descriptions on page 98 describes these parameters in detail No master station on line If no master station is on line Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS increase on any of the stations To correct Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the network Verify that the cable is connected and that it is not cut or short circuited Duplicate stations If two or more stations have duplicate numbers Two or more drives cannot be addressed Every time there is a read or write to one particular station the value for 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS or 5308 EFB UART ERRORS advances To correct Verify the station numbers of all stations Change conflicting station numbers Swapped wires If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one drive is connected to terminal B on another The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing To correct Check that the RS 485 lines are not swapped Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 200 ACS550 User s Manual Fault 28 Serial 1 Err If the drive s cont
176. 6 Output signals Jumper setting Analog output AO1 Frequency J1 Analog output AO2 Actual 1 Al1 0 10V Runenable DI2 Relay output 1 Running Q y AI2 0 4 20 mA EXT1 EXT2 selection DI3 Relay output 2 Fault 1 or Interlock D14 5 e Relay output 3 Aux motor ON J1 f o A 1 0 10 V N 117 AI2 0 4 20 mA Note Use the following switch on order 1 EXT1 EXT2 2 Run Enable 3 Start Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Torque Control macro 79 This macro provides parameter settings for applications that require torque control of the motor Control can also be switched to speed control To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 8 TORQUE CTRL Connection example x1 1 10kohm J1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 1142 JAH External speed reference 1 0 10 V ia 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 2 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC q 5 AI2 External torque reference 4 20 mA 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA Note 1 KD 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA PETINE E 9 AGND Analog output circuit common RAYOS Rota HOn QIECNONLIN speed control
177. 6 as the timed function enable signal 7 ACTIVE Timed functions are enabled 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal This digital input must be de activated to enable the timed function e 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the timed function enable signal 3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 20 30 00 The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds Time period 2 If parameter value is 07 00 00 the timer is activated 17 00 00 i f at7 a m n Time period 4 The figure shows multiple timers on different 15 00 00 weekdays 13 00 00 12 00 00 Time period 3 10 30 00 Time period 1 09 00 00 00 00 00 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 3603 STOP TIME 1 Defines the daily stop time The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds If the parameter value is 09 00 00 the timer is deactivated at 9 a m 3604 START DAY 1 Defines the weekly start day 1 MONDAY 7 SUNDAY If parameter value is 1 timer 1 weekly is active from Monday midnight 00 00 00 3605 STOP DAY 1 Defines weekly stop day 1 MONDAY 7 SUNDAY If parameter value is 5 timer 1 weekly is deactivated on Friday midnight 23 59 58 3606 START TIME 2 Defines timer2 daily start time See parameter 3602 3607 STOP TIME 2 Defines timer 2 daily stop time See parameter 3603 3608 START DAY
178. 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual To change the direction of the motor rotation Disconnect input power from the drive and wait 5 minutes for the intermediate circuit capacitors to discharge Measure the voltage between each input terminal U1 V1 and W1 and earth with a multimeter to ensure that the drive is discharged Exchange the position of two motor cable phase conductors at the drive output terminals or at the motor connection box Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the check as described above SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION DECELERAT Set the minimum speed parameter 2001 Set the maximum speed parameter 2002 Set the acceleration time 1 parameter 2202 Note Check also acceleration time 2 parameter 2205 if two acceleration times will be used in the application Set the deceleration time 1 parameter 2203 Note Set also deceleration time 2 parameter 2206 if two deceleration times will be used in the application SAVING A USER PARAMETER SET AND FINAL The start up is now completed However it might be useful at this stage to set the parameters required by your application and save the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in section User parameter sets on page 87 Check that the drive state is OK Basic Control Panel Check that there are no f
179. 8 number of motors parameter 186 reference step parameters 175 start delay parameter 185 start frequency parameters 176 Index Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual PID process sets parameter groups external trimming parameter group 0 actual signal parameter 100 actual signal parameter actual input select parameters actual value max parameters actual value min parameters adjustment procedure comm value 1 data parameter comm value 2 data parameter control macro correction source parameter decimal point actual signal parameter derivation filter parameter derivation time parameter deviation data parameter error feedback inversion parameter external source activate parameter feedback multiplier parameter feedback select parameter feedback data parameter gain parameter integration time parameter internal setpoint parameter offset parameter output data parameter parameter set select parameter scaling 0 100 parameters setpoint maximum parameter setpoint minimum parameter
180. 8 and Corner grounded TN systems on page 267 WARNING Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals WARNING Do not control the motor with the disconnecting device disconnecting means instead use the control panel start and stop keys and CQ or commands via the I O board of the drive The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors i e power ups by applying power is six in ten minutes WARNING The ACS550 01 U1 is not field repairable Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning drive contact the factory or your local Authorized Service Center for replacement WARNING The ACS550 will start up automatically after an input voltage interruption if the external run command is on WARNING The heat sink may reach a high temperature See chapter Technical data on page 259 gt gt B BB Note For more technical information contact the factory or your local ABB representative Safety Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Table of contents 7 Safety Use of warnings and notes Aa es muto rh ean bx eee RR 5 Table of contents Installation Installation flow chart 11 Preparing for installatiton 12 Installing the drive i zoe RE em dne bobne do
181. 88 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 287 Outside dimensions Drives with IP21 UL type 1 enclosures X0031 IP21 UL type 1 dimensions for each frame size R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 Ref mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in 125 4 9 125 4 9 203 8 0 203 8 0 267 10 5 302 11 9 H 330 13 0 430 16 9 490 19 3 596 23 5 602 23 7 700 27 6 H2 315 12 4 415 16 3 478 18 8 583 23 0 578 22 8 698 27 5 H3 369 14 5 469 18 5 583 23 0 689 27 1 736 29 1 880 34 7 D 212 8 3 222 8 7 231 9 1 262 10 3 286 11 3 400 15 8 00467918 xls B Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 288 ACS550 User s Manual Drives with IP54 UL type 12 enclosures IP54 UL type 12 Dimensions for each frame size Ref R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in W 213 8 4 213 8 4 257 10 1 257 10 1 369 14 5 410 16 1 W2 222 8 8 222 8 8 267 10 5 267 10 5 369 14 5 410 16 1 H3 461 18 1 561 22 1 629 248 760 29 9 775 30 5 926 36 5 D 234 9 2 245 9 6 254 10 0 285 11 2 309 12 2 423
182. 94 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 252 ACS550 User s Manual Alarm t ode Display Description 2013 AUTORESET This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault Note 1 reset which may start the motor To control automatic reset use Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 2014 AUTOCHANGE This alarm warns that the PFC autochange function is active Note 1 To control PFC use Group 81 PFC CONTROL and the PFC macro on page 78 2015 PFC LOCK This alarm warns that the PFC interlocks are active which means that the drive cannot start the following Any motor when Autochange is used The speed regulated motor when Autochange is not used 2016 RESERVED Not used 2017 2018 PID SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active which means Note 1 that the motor could accelerate when the PID sleep function ends To control PID sleep use parameters 4022 4026 or 4122 4126 2019 ID RUN Performing ID Run 2020 RESERVED Not used 2021 START ENABLE 1 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing MISSING To control Start Enable 1 function use parameter 1608 To correct check Digital input configuration Communication settings 2022 START ENABLE 2 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing MISSING Tocontrol Start Enable 2 function use parameter 1609 To correct
183. A fieldbus adapter eID 3 zr AA RA fecto SU 5 see FBA drive parameters NOM to do common TASKS aa ee sre eee 44 be JO settings mode 61 conduitkit 18 A SEE 44 config file af Operation suka aaa done ce Uma E elis dar 43 CPI firmware revision parameter 171 output mode 47 fault Code e en 2T overview LILA id revision parameter 171 parameter backup mode 58 revision parameter 171 parameters mode ui ek hats ka 49 connections Soft keys sodes BAG UND Gadd Pp PN 42 control xs eas aa eR RR 22 start stop so casu sepa csi Debate a de 46 diagram criecbun lee 22 status line LOC REM arrow 43 ELT eo LL LOK LE aoe control panel Basic 62 x1 module 22 alarm codes sese meses ped sp 253 IPASA NGA OR OE ee envi rant xU By copy mode 69 constant speed direction of rotation 62 64 see speed constant GLO Le jo EVE MORAM ina 63 243 244 construction code 13 how to do common tasks 63 contamination levels MAIN MENU a man bach an sie er pni Edere 63 environment limit 289 operation 63 shipping limit 289 output mode 65 contrast control panel Assistant 48 OVEIVIEW 0 La 62 control paramete
184. AA MARI PINE VA edens 18 automatic torque boost 128 derating ni aere DE I See Seine iin 262 DC magnetizing 128 sleep selection PID parameter 164 flying start 128 slip compensation ratio parameter 138 start stop soft keys Assistant Control Panel 42 parameter group 128 specifications with Assistant Control Panel 46 control connections 281 with Basic Control Panel 64 input power KANA MEE start stop dir parameter group 107 Mainan a ND GN Ea NA EN fi al E 263 starting order counter 180 Index Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 307 start up toolS a o Padinue a ENA ae A GA 14 assistant se donu ned Loue 36 51 top cover see hood data parameter group 98 torque guided Assistant Control Panel 36 at fault history parameter 106 limited Assistant or Basic Control Panel 31 boost current parameter 129 state diagram data parameter 100 OMOMEP Baan Na je wale aids eds d 217 max limit select parameter 126 comm ABB drives 235 max limit parameter 127 station id RS 232 parameter 172 min limit select parameter 126 stat
185. ABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC UNDERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3107 AR AI lt MIN Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off O DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault AI lt MIN after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation WARNING When the analog input signal is restored the drive may restart even after a long stop Make sure that automatic long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and or damage equipment 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off O DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault EXT FAULT 1 or EXT FAULT 2 after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 144 Group 32 SUPERVISION ACS550 User s Manual This group defines supervision for up to three signals from Group 01 OPERATING DATA Supervision monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay output if the parameter passes a defined limit Use Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS to define the relay and
186. ACS550 User s Manual ACS550 01 Drives 0 75 132 kW ACS550 U1 Drives 1 200 hp AA EP ED PA ID IB Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 Drive Manuals GENERAL MANUALS OPTION MANUALS ACS550 01 U1 User s Manual 0 75 132 kW 1 200 hp 3AFE64804588 3AUA0000001418 English ACS550 02 U2 User s Manual 160 355 kW 200 550 hp 3AFE64804626 English Safety Installation Start up control with I O and ID Run Control panels Application macros Parameters Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus adapter Diagnostics Maintenance Technical data ACS550 Technical Reference Manual available in electronic format only Detailed Product Description Technical product description including dimensional drawings Cabinet mounting information including power losses Software and control including complete parameter descriptions User interfaces and control connections Complete options descriptions Spare parts Etc Practical Engineering Guides PID amp PFC engineering guides Dimensioning and sizing guidelines Diagnostics and maintenance information Etc delivered with optional equipment MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 English OHDI 01 115 230 V Digital Input Module User s Manual 3AUA0000003101 English OREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual 3AUA0
187. AO1 Output frequency 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA U 9 JAGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 411 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Activate to start 14 DI2 Fwd Rev Activate to reverse rotation direction 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Ramp pair selection Activate to select 2nd acc dec ramp pair 18 DI6 Not used 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable jee 1 The paa Spa P 20 RO1A Default operation E e pub d reference if a vector 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note 2 Code 23 RO2A fi Default operation Oo 0pen 1 o connected 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 DI3 DI4 Output 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 0 0 Reference through Al1 26 RO3A A Default operation 1 O coNsr SPEED 1 1202 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 0 1 coNST SPEED 2 1203 Fault z gt 25 connected to 26 1 1 CONST SPEED 3 1204 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference Al1 Start stop and direction DI1 2 Constant speed selecti Ramp pair 1 of 2 selection DI5 Analog output AO1 Frequency J1 Analog output AO2 Current gy Al1 0 10V on DI3 4 Relay output 1 Ready Q y AI2 0 4 20 mA Relay output 2 Running or Rel
188. AO1 or AO2 feeds constant current through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input AI1 or AI2 and converts it to degrees Celsius 2 2 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses two PT100 sensors Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 3 3 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses three PT100 sensors ohm Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 4000 4 PTC Sensor configuration uses PTC The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature 7 1 as does the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement function 550 reads the voltage through analog input Al1 and converts it into ohms The figure shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of 1330 the motor operating temperature 100 Temperature Resistance Normal 3 kohm Excessive gt 28 kohm 5 THERM 0 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect either a PTC sensor or a normally closed thermistor relay to a digital input The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table When the digital input is 0 the motor is overheated See the figures
189. Accuracy 3 9 AGND Analog output circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 Mohm 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 250 mA reference to GND short circuit protected 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common connected internally as floating 12 DCOM Digital input common To activate a digital input there must be gt 410 V or lt 10 V between that input and DCOM The 24 V may be provided by the a ACS550 X1 10 or by an external 12 24 V source of either polarity 3 Ng 25 13 DI1 Digital input 1 programmable Default start stop T 14 DI2 Digital input 2 programmable Default fwd rev 15 DI3 Digital input 3 programmable Default constant speed sel code 16 DI4 Digital input 4 programmable Default constant speed sel code 17 DI5 Digital input 5 programmable Default ramp pair selection code 18 DIE Digital input 6 programmable Default not used Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 23 X1 Hardware description 19 ROIC Relay output 1 programmable Default Ready 20 ROTA Maximum 250VAC 30VDC 2A NT Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 21 RO1B 2 3 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Default Running 3 23 RO2A Maximum 250 VAC 30 VDC 2A gt NT Minimum 500
190. Actual value 6 Actual value 7 Actual value 8 The content of these words is defined by profiles For details on the profiles used sees section ABB control profiles technical data on page 209 Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view Planning Network planning should address the following questions e e e What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network What control information must be sent down to the drives What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system Mechanical and electrical installation EFB the power source A WARNING Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from Drive terminals 28 32 are for RS485 communications e Use Belden 9842 or equivalent Belden 9842 is a dual twisted shielded pair cable with a wave impedance of 120 ohm Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link Use this pair to connect all A terminals together and all B terminals together Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground terminal 31 leaving one wire unused Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point Ground all devices on the network using their corresponding earthing terminals A
191. Adapter is on line 6 RESET Adapter is performing a hardware reset 5132 FBA CPI FW REV Contains the revision of the module s CPI program Format is xyz where x major revision number e y minor revision number e z correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5133 FBA APPL FW REV Contains the revision of the module s application program Format is xyz see parametrer 5132 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 172 ACS550 User s Manual Group 52 PANEL COMM This group defines the communication settings for the control panel port on the drive Normally when using the supplied control panel there is no need to change settings in this group In this group parameter modifications take effect on the next power up Code Description 5201 STATION ID Defines the address of the drive e Two units with the same address are not allowed on line e Range 1 247 5202 BAUD RATE Defines the communication speed of the drive in kbits per second kb s 9 6 kb s 19 2 kb s 38 4 kb s 57 6 kb s 115 2 kb s 5203 PARITY Sets the character format to be used with the panel communication 0 8 NONE 1 No parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 No parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 Even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 Odd parity one stop bit 5204 OK MESSAGES Contains a count of valid Modbus mes
192. At 100 the PID controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system Alow value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation but provides sluggish response If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short the system can become unstable Procedure e Initially set 4001 GAIN 0 1 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 7 20 seconds e Start the system and see if it reaches the setpoint quickly while maintaining stable operation If not increase GAIN 4001 until the actual signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Reduce GAIN 4001 until the oscillation stops Set GAIN 4001 to 0 4 to 0 6 times the above value e Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the feedback signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Increase INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the oscillation stops Set INTEGRATION TIME 4002 to 1 15 to 1 5 times the above value If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise increase the value of parameter 1303 FILTER AI1 or 1306 FILTER AI2 until the noise is filtered from the signal Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
193. B Booster and Time Period 3 selected in the timer Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 155 Code Description 21 T1 T3 B Booster and Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer 22 T2tT31B Booster and Time Periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer 23 T1 T2 T3 B Booster and Time Periods 1 2 and 3 selected in the timer 24 T4 B Booster and Time Period 4 selected in the timer 25 T1 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 1 and 4 selected in the timer 26 T2 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 2 and 4 selected in the timer 27 T1 T2 TA B Booster and Time Periods 1 2 and 4 selected in the timer 28 T3 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 3 and 4 selected in the timer 29 T1 T3 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 1 3 and 4 selected in the timer 30 T2 T3 T4 B Booster and Time Periods 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 31 71 2 3 4 B Booster and Time Periods 1 2 3 and 4 selected in the timer 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC See parameter 3626 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC See parameter 3626 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC See parameter 3626 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 156 ACS550 User s Manual Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE This group defines supervision of user adjustable load curves motor torque as a function of frequency The curve i
194. C 269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann type 124A 4 124 160 175 JJS 175 125A 4 125 157A 4 157 200 200 JJS 200 180A 4 180 250 250 JJS 250 195A 4 195 246A 4 245 350 JJS 350 00467918 xls B Fuses 500 600 V drives ACS550 U1 Input current Input power mains fuses see below A IEC 269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann type 02A7 6 27 10 10 JJS 10 03A9 6 3 9 06A1 6 6 1 09A0 6 9 0 16 15 JJS 15 011A 6 11 0 017A 6 17 0 25 25 JJS 25 022A 6 22 0 027A 6 27 35 40 JJS 40 032A 6 32 041A 6 41 50 50 JJS 50 052A 6 52 60 60 JJS 60 062A 6 62 80 80 JJS 80 077A 6 77 100 JJS 100 099A 6 99 125 150 JJS 150 125A 6 125 160 175 JJS 175 144A 6 144 200 200 JJS 200 00467918 xls B Emergency stop devices The overall design of the installation must include emergency stop devices and any other safety equipment that may be needed Pressing STOP on the drive s control panel does NOT generate an emergency stop of the motor separate the drive from dangerous potential Input power cables wiring Input wiring can be any of afour conductor cable three phases and ground protective earth Shielding is not required four insulated conductors routed through conduit Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 266 ACS550 User s Manual Size wiring according to
195. CS550 can either receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or becontrolled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Other devices d Connect using either Standard embedded fieldbus EFB at terminals X1 28 32 fieldbus adapter FBA module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx Two basic serial communications configurations are available embedded fieldbus EFB Using the RS485 interface at terminals X1 28 32 on the control board a control system can communicate with the drive using the Modbus protocol For protocol and profile descriptions see sections Modbus protocol technical data and ABB control profiles technical data later in this chapter fieldbus adapter FBA See chapter Fieldbus adapter on page 221 Control interface In general the basic control interface between Modbus and the drive consists of Output words Control Word Reference1 Reference2 nput words Status Word Actual value 1 Actual value 2 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 190 ACS550 User s Manual Actual value 3 Actual value 4 Actual value 5
196. Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON The drive Accelerates the motor Calculates values for proportional gain integration time and acceleration compensation Changes parameters 2301 2302 and 2304 to these values Resets 2305 to orr Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 135 Group 24 TORQUE CONTROL This group defines variables used for torque control operation Code Description 2401 TORQ RAMP UP Defines the torque reference ramp up time The minimum time for the reference to increase from zero to the nominal motor torque 2402 TORQ RAMP DOWN Defines the torque reference ramp down time The minimum time for the reference to decrease from the nominal motor torque to zero Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 136 ACS550 User s Manual Group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be avoided due for example to mechanical resonance problems at certain speeds Code Description 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL output Sets the critical speeds function on or off The critical speed A function avoids specific speed ranges O oFF Disables the critical speeds function SZ PP 1 ON Enables the critical speeds function 46 Example To avoid speeds at which a f
197. DI1 as the external fault input Activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the external fault input De activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input See DI1 INV above 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault See parameter 3003 above 3005 MOT THERM PROT Defines the drive response to motor overheating O NOT SEL No response and or motor thermal protection not set up 1 FAULT When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 C displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop 2 ALARM When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP 3006 MOT THERM TIME Motor load 4 Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature model e This is the time required for the motor to reach 63 of the final t temperature with steady load i e For thermal protectio
198. FBPAR 18 0 65535 1 0 5319 EFB PAR 19 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5320 EFB PAR 20 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 Group 81 PFC CONTROL 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 97 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 8109 START FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 0 Hz U1 0 0 Hz 8110 ISTART FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 0 Hz U1 0 0 Hz 8111 START FREQ 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 0 Hz U1 0 0 Hz 8112 Low FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 25 0 Hz U1 30 0 Hz 8113 Low FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 25 0 Hz U1 30 0 Hz 8114 Low FREQ 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 25 0 Hz U1 30 0 Hz 8115 AUX MOT START D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 5 0s 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1 s 3 0 s 8117 NR OF AUX MOT 0 4 1 1 Y 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 1 TEST MODE 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1h 0 0 h NOT SEL Y 0 1 336 h 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 0 0 100 096 0 196 5096 8120 NTERLOCKS 0 6 1 4 D14 Y 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL O NO 1 YES 1 O NO 8122 PFC START DELAY 0 00 10 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s 8123 PFC ENABLE O NOT SEL 1 ACTIVE 1 O NOT SEL Y 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s NOT SEL
199. ION TRIG 0 65535 Mrev 0 disables 1 Mrev O Mrev 2904 REVOLUTION ACT 0 65535 Mrev 1 Mrev O Mrev 2905 RUN TIME TRIG 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 0 disables 0 1 kh 0 0 kh 2906 IRUN TIME ACT 0 0 6553 5 kh 0 1 kh 0 0 kh Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 91 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 2907 USER MWh TRIG 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 0 disables 0 1 MWh 0 0 MWh 2908 UsER MWh ACT 0 0 6553 5 MWh 0 1 MWh 0 0 MWh Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS 3001 AISMIN FUNCTION 0 3 1 O NOT SEL 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 1 3 1 1 FAULT 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 6 6 1 O NOT SEL 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 6 6 1 O NOT SEL 3005 MOT THERM PROT O NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 ALARM 1 1 FAULT 3006 MOT THERM TIME 256 9999 s 1 500 s 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE 50 150 1 100 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25 150 1 70 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 1 250 Hz 1 35 Hz 3010 STALL FUNCTION O lt NOT SEL 1 lt FAULT 2 lt ALARM 1 O NOT SEL 3011 STALL FREQUENCY 0 5 50 Hz 0 1 Hz 20 Hz 3012 STALL TIME 10 400 s 1s 20s 3017 EARTH FAULT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE Y 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC O NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP 7 1 O NOT SEL 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME 0 60 0s 0 1 s 3 0 s 3021 A1 FAULT LIMI
200. MM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 4017 ACT2 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 2 ACT2 See also parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 1 AI1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT2 2 AI2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT2 3 CURRENT Uses current for ACT2 4 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT2 5 POWER Uses power for ACT2 6 COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT2 7 COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT2 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM Sets the minimum value for ACT1 Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1 defined P4019 cet is by parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT For parameter 4016 values 6 COMM ACT 1 and 7 COMM ACT 2 scaling is not done ACT1 Yo Par 4016 Source Source min Source max P 4018 1 Analog input 1 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 2 Analog input 2 1304 MINIMUM AI2 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Source min Source max 3 Current 0 2 nominal current Source signal 4 Torque 2 nominal torque 2 nominal torque 5 Power 2 nominal power 2 nominal power ACT 96 4 B See the figure A Normal B Inversion ACT1 MINIMUM gt ACT1 P 4018 MAXIMUM 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM Sets the maximum value for ACT1 See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4020 P 40194 T T ag Source min Source max
201. N TIME 0 00 10 00 s 0 01 s 0 30 s 2104 DC HOLD CTL O NOT SEL 1 DC HOLD 1 O NOT SEL v 2 DC BRAKING 2105 DC HOLD SPEED 0 360 rpm 1 rpm 5 rpm 2106 DC CURR REF 0 100 1 30 2107 DC BRAKE TIME 0 0 250 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 2108 START INHIBIT 0 OFF 1 lt ON 1 O OFF 2109 EMERG STOP SEL 6 6 1 O NOT SEL 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 15 300 1 100 2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 60 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s NOT SEL 2113 ISTART DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 00 s Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 90 ACS550 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User Group 22 ACCEL DECEL 2201 jacc DEC 1 2 SEL 6 7 1 5 DI5 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1 s 5 0 s 2203 DECELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1 s 5 0 s 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 0 0 LINEAR 0 1 1000 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s 2206 DECELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 0 0 LINEAR 0 1 1000 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1 s 1 0s 2209 RAMP INPUT O 6 7 1 O NOT SEL Group 23 SPEED CONTROL 2301 PROP GAIN 0 00 200 00 0 01 10 00 2302 INTEGRATION TIME 0 00 600 00 s 0 01 s 2 50 s 2303 DERIVATION TIME 0 10000 ms 1 ms 0 ms 230
202. NTROL WORD Bit 3 START LOCAL START 00005 CONTROL WORD Bit4 N A RESET RAMP OUT ZERO 00006 CONTROL WORD Bit5 RAMP HOLD EXT2 RAMP HOLD 00007 CONTROL WORD Bit 6 RAMP IN ZERO RUN DISABLE RAMP IN ZERO 00008 CONTROL WORD Bit 7 RESET STPMODE R RESET 00009 CONTROL WORD Bit 8 N A STPMODE EM N A 00010 CONTROL WORD Bit 9 N A STPMODE C N A 00011 CONTROL WORD Bit 10 N A RAMP 2 REMOTE CMD 00012 CONTROL WORD Bit 11 EXT2 RAMP OUT 0 EXT2 00013 CONTROL WORD Bit 12 N A RAMP HOLD N A 00014 CONTROL WORD Bit 13 N A RAMP IN 0 N A 00015 CONTROL WORD Bit 14 N A REQ LOCALLOCK N A 00016 CONTROL WORD Bit 15 N A TOROLIM2 N A 00017 CONTROL WORD Bit 16 Does not apply FBLOCAL_CTL Does not apply 00018 CONTROL WORD Bit 17 FBLOCAL_REF 00019 CONTROL WORD Bit 18 START DISABLE1 00020 CONTROL WORD Bit 19 START DISABLE2 00021 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 00032 00033 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 00034 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 00035 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 00036 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 00037 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 00038 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 1 Active low For the Oxxxx registers Status is always readable Forcing is allowed by user configuration of th
203. PEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Actual Value mapping See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 243 Diagnostics WARNING Do not attempt any measurement parts replacement or other service procedure not described in this manual Such action will void the warranty may endanger correct operation and increase downtime and expense WARNING All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter should only be undertaken by qualified service personnel The safety instructions in chapter Safety on page 5 must be followed Diagnostic displays The drive detects error situations and reports them using e e the green and red LED on the body of the drive the status LED on the control panel if an Assistant Control Panel is attached to the drive the control panel display if a control panel is attached to the drive the Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits parameters 0305 to 0309 See Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS on page 104 for the bit definitions The form of the display depends on the severity of the error You can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive to e
204. PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet All of the FBA protocols can also be configured for the ABB Drives profile Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used These details are provided in a user s manual supplied with the FBA module Details for the ABB Drives profile which apply for all protocols are provided in section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 232 Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 222 ACS550 User s Manual Control interface In general the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive consists of Output Words CONTROL WORD REFERENCE speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 output words Protocols limits may further restrict the total nput Words STATUS WORD Actual Value speed or frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 input words Protocols limits may further restrict the total Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view The meanings of the controller interface words are not restricted by the ACS550 However the profile used may set particular meanings Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Control Wor
205. QUE AT FLT 3276 8 3276 7 0 196 0 0409 STATUS AT FLT 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 0410 Di 1 3 AT FLT 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0 0411 Di 4 6 AT FLT 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 As par 0401 1 0 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 As par 0401 1 0 Group 10 START STOP DIR 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 0 14 1 2 DI1 2 Y 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 14 1 O NOT SEL Y 1003 DIRECTION 1 lt FORWARD 2 lt REVERSE 1 3 REOUEST Y 3 REQUEST 1004 JOGGING SEL 6 6 1 O NOT SEL Y Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL 1 REF1 Hz rpm 2 REF2 1 1 REF1 Hz rpm 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 6 12 1 0 ExT1 Y 1103 REF1 SELECT 0 17 20 21 1 1 KEYPAD Y 1104 REF1 MIN 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 0 0 Hz 0 rpm 1105 REF1 MAX 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 30000 rpm 0 1 Hz 1 rpm 01 50 0 Hz 1500 rpm U1 60 0 Hz 1800 rpm 1106 REF2 SELECT 0 17 19 21 1 2 AI2 Y 1107 REF2 MIN 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 196 0 0 1108 REF2 MAX 0 0 100 0 0 0 600 0 for torque 0 1 100 0 Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 14 19 1 9 DI3 4 Y 1202 CONST SPEED 1 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 300 rpm 5 0 Hz U1 360 rpm 6 0 Hz 1203 CONST SPEED 2 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 600 rpm 10 0 Hz U1 720 rpm 12 0 Hz 1204 CONST SPEED 3 0 30000 rpm 0 0 500 0 Hz 1 rpm 0 1 Hz 01 900 rpm 15 0 Hz U1 1080 rpm 18 0 Hz 1205 CONST SPEED 4 0 3000
206. R POT 5 HAND AUTO 6 PID CONTROL 7 PFC CONTROL 8 TORQUE CTRL 31 LOAD FD SET 0 USER S1 LOAD 1 USER ST SAVE 2 USER S2 LOAD 3 USER S2 SAVE 31 LOAD FD SET FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop file Parameter view is selected by parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives FlashDrop allows easy customization of the parameter list e g selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 English 1 USER S1 SAVE 3 USER S2 SAVE With these it is possible to save two different user parameter sets into the drive permanent memory for later use Each set contains parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification run O USER S1 LOAD 2 USER S2 LOAD With these the user parameter sets can be taken back in use 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Selects the motor control mode 1 VECTOR SPEED sensorless vector control mode Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm Reference 2 is speed reference in 100 is absolute maximum speed equal to the value of parameter 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED or 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum speed 2 VECTOR TORO Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm Reference 2 is torque reference in 100 is nominal torque 3 SCALAR FREQ scalar
207. RE the mounting location v REMOVE the front cover v MOUNT the drive v INSTALL wiring v CHECK installation v REINSTALL the cover v START UP See Preparing for installation on page 12 Prepare the mounting location on page 16 Remove the front cover on page 16 Mount the drive on page 17 Wiring overview on page 18 and Install the wiring on page 24 Check installation on page 29 Reinstall the cover on page 30 How to start up the drive on page 31 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 12 ACS550 User s Manual Preparing for installation Lifting the drive Lift the drive only by the metal chassis Unpacking the drive 1 Unpack the drive 2 Check for any damage and notify the shipper immediately if damaged components are found IP2040 3 Check the contents against the order and the shipping label to verify that all parts have been received Drive identification Drive labels To determine the type of drive you are installing refer to either serial number label attached on upper part of the chokeplate between the mounting holes or ACS550 01 08A8 a ag Type code ul 3 380 480 V ALL AUI I2N I2hd 8 86 9 A PN Phd 40 30 kW saro 06704 Serial number type code label attached on the heat sink on the right side of the drive cover Two examples of the typ
208. RQ LOW 2 0 600 1 15 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 0 600 1 300 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 43 Hz 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 0 600 1 25 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 0 600 1 300 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 50 Hz 3714 LOAD TORQ Low 4 0 600 1 30 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 0 600 1 300 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 0 500 Hz 1 Hz 500 Hz 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 0 600 1 30 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 0 600 1 300 Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 4001 GAIN 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4002 NTEGRATION TIME 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 1 s 60 0 s 4003 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 1 0s 4005 ERROR VALUE INV O NO 1 YES 1 O NO 4006 UNITS 0 127 1 4 96 4007 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4008 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 0 0 4007 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 94 ACS550 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User 4009 100 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 100 0 4007 4010 SET POINT SEL 0 2 8 17 19 20 1 1 A11 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 40 0 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4013 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 4014 FBK SEL 1 13 1 1 AcT1 4015
209. RR BN 16 Start up control with I O and ID Run How to start up the drive res 31 How to control the drive through the I O interface 38 How to perform the ID Run ees 39 Control panels About control panels 0 0 res 41 COMPANY x a Gp d te ee repe D ta Sat ceeded mex OR RESTE 41 Assistant Control Panel 42 Basic Control Panel visini ini stiti e p e KANG pack ke e Da We be reji 62 Application macros ABB Standard macro eee eens 72 S Wire macro nasa dade Z A Ana en PA aden o a nag ae ten dom ante tali 73 Alternate macto see ater bw need AG Sa Re Maio ad eee e Now Reds 74 Motor Potentiometer macro 75 Hand Auto macro enun ee JE wd LA qr hio dea ke Qa eee be 76 PID Control Macro irs siii ta ee eens 77 PFC Macro mma sara ew Y wade E wee kavi POE RR ets i Ta 78 Torque Control macro 79 Connection example of a two wire sensor 80 User parameter sets eae 81 Macro default values for parameters 82 Parameters Complete parameter list 85 Complete parameter descriptions 98 Embedded fieldbus ONEIVIEW rus a teh e t s bae Sash ets Gants Didi qe Kainan 189 PLANNING Ba ecrit gne anite ma fria ded ahaa bane Wa ce BAM daa aci Sh
210. SABLE No drive response to ground faults 1 ENABLE Ground faults display fault 16 EARTH FAULT and if running the drive coasts to stop Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 142 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost O NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 28 SERIAL 1 ERR and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2005 I o COMM and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value 3 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2005 i O Comm and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when fieldbus communication is lost 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC e Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME value 3021 A11 FAULT LIMIT Sets a fault level for analog input 1 See 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT Sets a fault level for analog input 2 e Se
211. SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110 a OPERATION READY TO HO SW Bit0 1 eB Ie INHIBITED switcH on o SW Bito 1 OPERATION INHIBITED CW xxxx x1xx xxxx X111 gt IH READY TO SW Bit1 1 OPERATE CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and gt SW Bit12 1 OPERATION s C D E ENABLED SW Bit2 1 zao A CW Bit5 0 CWzxxxx x1xx xxx1 1111 gt RFG OUTPUT D ENABLED PS B ed CW Bit6 0 SRNA CWzxxxx x1xx xx11 1111 KEY gt State State change RFG ACCELERATOR CW CONTROL WORD ENABLED SW STATUS WORD G lt RFG Ramp Function Generator CW xxxx x1xx x111 1111 Param 0104 CURRENT SW Bit8 1 f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ OPERATING n Speed D 2 Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 236 ACS550 User s Manual Reference As described earlier in section Control interface on page 222 the REFERENCE word is a speed or frequency reference Reference scaling The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives Profile FBA Reference Range Reference Scaling Remarks type REF1 32767 Speedor 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by 32767 frequency 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2001 2002 20000 corresponds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency REF2 32767 Speedor 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 32767 frequency 0 0 1107 1
212. See parameter 3405 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3406 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 149 Code Description 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3407 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 150 ACS550 User s Manual Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault motor overheating as detected by a temperature sensor Typical connections are defined below One sensor Three sensors a D AI n AT ie id Motor Ir I Motor ge JAGND E AGND E m poj ee T T T 4 7 E 5 laot AO1 ur x 1 JAGND y F 10 nF ie je Es A WARNING IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth To fulfil this requirement connect a thermistor and other similar components to the drive s control terminals using any of these alternatives Separate the
213. T same value as on the motor nameplate 2 V Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys and SAVE P y CA NOW EXIT 00 00 SAVE press gt to accept and continue with the Start up Assistant Note At any time if you press gt the Start up Assistant is stopped and the display goes to the Output mode Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 37 After completing a set up task the Start up Assistant suggests the REM CHOICE Do you want to next one cone n Press SS when fasta is highlighted to continue with the Biconcinucll ma suggested task EIF 00 00 0K Press key cv to highlight and then press X to move to the following task without doing the suggested task EXIT Press Cz to stop the Start up Assistant SAVING A USER PARAMETER SET AND FINAL CHECK The start up is now completed However it might be useful at this stage to set the parameters required by your application and save the settings as a user parameter set as instructed in section User parameter sets on page 87 After the whole set up is completed check there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and the panel LED is green and does not blink The drive is now ready for use Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412
214. T 0 100 0 1 0 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT 0 100 0 1 0 3023 WIRING FAULT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE Y 3024 CB TEMP FAULT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS 0 5 1 0 3102 TRIAL TIME 1 0 600 0 s 0 1 s 30 s 3103 DELAY TIME 0 0 120 0 s 0 1 s Os 3104 AR OVERCURRENT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE O lt DISABLE 1 lt ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE O lt DISABLE 1 lt ENABLE 1 O DISABLE 3107 JAR AI lt MIN O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 DISABLE 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT O lt DISABLE 1 lt ENABLE 1 O DISABLE Group 32 SUPERVISION 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 100 lt NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO 0 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI 0 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 104 parameter 0104 CURRENT 3205 SUPERV 2 LIMLO 0 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI 0 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 105 parameter 0105 TORQUE 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO 0 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI 0 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 92 ACS550 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User Group 33 INFORMATION 3301 FIRMWARE 0000 FFFF hex 1 Firmw
215. VE ON TIME LO 00 00 00 23 59 58 1 2s 0 0145 MOTOR TEMP Par 3501 1 3 10 200 C 1 Par 3501 4 0 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 6 0 1 0146 MECH ANGLE 0 32768 1 0147 MECH REVS 32768 32767 1 0148 Z PLS DETECTED O NOT DETECTED 1 DETECTED 1 DETECTED 0150 cB TEMP 20 0 150 0 C 1 0 C 0151 INPUT KWH R 0 0 999 9 kWh 1 0 kWh 0152 INPUT MWH 0 9999 MWh 1 MWh 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 32768 32767 1 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 32768 32767 1 Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 0303 FB STS WORD 1 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 87 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 0304 FB STS WORD 2 1 0 0305 FAULT WORD 1 1 0 0306 FAULT WORD 2 1 0 0307 FAULT WORD 3 1 0 0308 ALARM WORD 1 1 0 0309 ALARM WORD 2 1 0 Group 04 FAULT HISTORY 0401 LAST FAULT Fault codes panel displays as text 1 0 0402 FAULT TIME 1 Date dd mm yy power on time in days 1 day 0 0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time hh mm ss 2s 0 0404 SPEED AT FLT 32768 32767 1 rpm 0 0405 FREO AT FLT 3276 8 3276 7 0 1 Hz 0 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT 0 0 6553 5 0 1 V 0 0407 CURRENT AT FLT 0 0 6553 5 0 1A 0 0408 TOR
216. Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 120 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 Sets the maximum output current See MAXIMUM AO1 above 1512 FILTER AO2 Defines the filter time constant for AO2 See FILTER AO1 above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 121 Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS This group defines a variety of system level locks resets and enables Code Description 1601 RUN ENABLE Selects the source of the run enable signal 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal 17 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the run enable signal This digital input must be activated for run enable If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable signal Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the run disable signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the run enable signal This digital input must be de activated for run enable If this digital input activates the drive will coast to stop and not
217. Wiring IP54 UL type 12 enclosure with cables 1 Cut the cable seals as needed for the power motor and control cables The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive p ii IP5003 Onthe input power cable strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual wires On the motor cable strip the sheathing back far enough to expose the copper wire screen so that the screen can be twisted into a pig tail Keep the pig tail short to minimize noise radiation 360 grounding under the clamp is recommended e5 7 for the motor cable to minimize noise radiation In this case remove the sheathing at the cable RAYA clamp Route both cables through the clamps and tighten the clamps 5 Strip and connect the power motor wires and the power ground wire to the drive 10 11 Route control cable s through clamp s and terminals Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 269 Connect the pig tail created from the motor cable screen to the GND terminal Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail tighten clamp s 9 11 Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end
218. a Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 292 ACS550 User s Manual Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme EMCS was introduced by the Australian Communication Authority ACA and the Radio Spectrum Management Group RSM of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development NZMED in November 2001 The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical electronic products Compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 2004 See page 293 UL CSA markings An UL mark is attached to ACS550 drives to verify that the drive follows the NA US provisions of UL 508C A CSA mark is attached to ACS550 U1 type drives to verify that the drive follows the G provisions of C22 2 NO 14 The ACS550 is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 000 RMS symmetrical amperes 480 V maximum Branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with local codes The ACS550 has an electronic motor protection feature that complies with the requirements of UL 508C and for ACS550 U1 C22 2 No 14 When this feature is selected and properly adjusted additional overload protection is not required unless more than one motor is co
219. a 23 O offset PID parameter 168 ok messages count parameter 172 operating data parameter group 100 operation Assistant Control Panel 43 Basic Control Panel 63 OPEX link fault code 246 OPEX power fault code 246 OPUGNSS Naa nad alee d ox ded oa dele pa od 13 parameter group 187 CODE rush soe aso A AE NONE 13 output frequency data parameter 100 voltage data parameter 100 wiring fault code 247 output mode Assistant Control Panel 47 Basic Control Panel 65 overcurrent automatic reset parameter 143 fault code 244 overload curve see user load curve overspeed fault code 247 overvoltage control enable parameter 125 P panel communication parameter group 172 panel display variables parameter group 147 panel firmware version 41 45 panel loss fault code 245 parameter analog input scale fault code 248 analog output scale fault code 248 change lock 121 descriptions 98 external relay output fault code 248 fieldbus fault code 248 hz rpm fault code 248 listing ra
220. age is present when input power is connected After disconnecting the supply wait at least 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before removing the cover WARNING Even when power is switched off from the input terminals of the ACS550 there may be dangerous voltage from external sources on the terminals of the relay outputs RO1 RO3 WARNING When the control terminals of two or more drives are connected in parallel the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken from a single source which can either be one of the drives or an external supply Safety Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 ACS550 User s Manual WARNING If a drive whose internal EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohm power system the system will be connected to earth potential through the EMC filter capacitors of the drive This may cause danger or damage the drive gt If a drive whose internal EMC filter is not disconnected is installed on a corner grounded TN system the drive will be damaged Disconnect the internal EMC filter by removing EM1 and EM3 screws frame size R1 R4 see the diagram in section Power connection diagrams on page 20 or F1 and F2 screws frame size R5 or R6 see the diagram on page 27 Also see sections T systems on page 26
221. allation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 ACS550 User s Manual Wiring IP21 UL type 1 enclosure with conduit 1 Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit gland box See section Conduit Gland kit on page 18 2 Install thin wall conduit clamps not supplied 3 Install conduit gland box 4 Connect conduit runs to box 5 Route input power and motor wiring through conduits must be separate conduit runs 6 Strip wires 7 Connect power motor and ground wires to the drive terminals Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable are size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 269 8 Route the control cable through the conduit must be separate from input power and motor conduit runs 9 Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail 10 Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end 11 Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end 12 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table on page 22 13 Install the conduit gland box cover 1 screw 1P2005 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 27
222. allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected to a corner grounded TN system as this would damage the drive Liability limits The manufacturer is not responsible for Any costs resulting from a failure if the installation commissioning repair alteration or ambient conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant documentation Units subjected to misuse negligence or accident Units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser In no event shall the manufacturer its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for special indirect incidental or consequential damages losses or penalties This is the sole and exclusive warranty given by the manufacturer with respect to the equipment and is in lieu of and excludes all other warranties express or implied arising by operation of law or otherwise including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive please contact the local distributor or ABB office The technical data information and specifications are valid at the time of printing The manufacturer reserves the right to make modifications without prior notice Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual This pro
223. ameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE 1 ENABLE and e an encoder Z pulse has been detected 0150 CB TEMP Temperature of the drive control board in degrees Celsius Note Some drives have a control board OMIO that does not support this feature These drives always show the constant value of 25 0 C Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 103 Code Description 0151 INPUT KWH R Calculated actual intake energy in kWh 0152 INPUT MWH Calculated actual intake energy in MWh 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 104 Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS This group monitors fieldbus communications ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Bit 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 Command Word 1 The fieldbus command is the principal 0 PI E PELACAL CT means for controlling the drive from a 1 START FBLOCAL REF fieldbus controller The
224. ameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the Autochange function The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is performed Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 0 1 TEST MODE Forces the interval to value 36 48 s 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the Autochange function 0 1 336 The operating time interval the time when the start signal is on between automatic motor changes WARNING When enabled the Autochange function requires the interlocks 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 enabled During autochange the power output is interrupted and the drive coasts to stop preventing damage to the contacts PFC with Autochange mode Relay logic ACS550 magaya Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 180 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Sets an upper limit as a percent of output capacity for the autochange logic When the output from the PID PFC control block exceeds this limit autochange is prevented For example use this parameter to deny autochange when the Pump Fan system is operating near maximum capacity Autochange overview The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system At each autochange operation A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACS550 output the speed regul
225. ameter sets on page 81 and then uploaded to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET2 As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 59 How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing NEN if you are in the Output mode otherwise LOC W MAIN MENU 1 by pressing 7 repeatedly until you get to the Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys ENTER A and S w 7 and pressing Ew LOC U COPY MENU 1 BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL 3 To copy all parameters including user sets and internal parameters from the drive to the control panel select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Copy menu with keys Anand S w P and press E wl During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press 7 if you want to stop the operation After the upload is completed the display shows a message about the completion Press X to return to the Copy menu To perform
226. ameters are within limits 10 REV_REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction 0 Drive reference is in forward direction 11 REV ACT 1 Drive is running in reverse direction 0 Drive is running in forward direction 12 PANEL LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel or PC tool local mode 0 Control is not in control panel local mode 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode steals control panel local 0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode 14 EXT2 ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode 0 Control is in EXT1 mode 15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state 0 Drive is not in a fault state Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 215 DCU profile STATUS WORD See parameter 0304 Bit Name Value Status 16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on 0 No alarms are on 17 REQ_MAINT 1 A maintenance request is pending 0 No maintenance request is pending 18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON Direction change is locked out 0 Direction lock is OFF 19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON Local mode is locked out 0 Local mode lock is OFF 20 CTL_MODE 1 Drive is in vector control mode 0 Drive is in scalar control mode 21 25 Reserved 26 REO CTL 1 Copy the control word 0 no op 27 REO REF1 1 Reference 1 reguested in this channel 0 Reference 1 is not requeste
227. ameters to memory then value returns to 0 Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 227 Relay output control Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive parameter Value Description pears 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 36 CoMM 1 Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 controlled by fieldbus 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 controlled by fieldbus 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 controlled by fieldbus 14121 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 controlled by fieldbus 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Drive parameter Value Protocol reference 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3 status 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status Analog output control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller suppl
228. an system vibrates badly Determine problem speed ranges Assume they are found to 23 be 18 23 Hz and 46 52 Hz 18 Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 1 Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 18 Hz Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 23 Hz r gt fRer Hz Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 46 Hz fil fiH f2L f2H Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 52 Hz 18 23 46 52 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ then units are Hz 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO Units are rpm unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ then units are Hz 2504 CRIT SPEED 2LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 2 See parameter 2502 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 2 See parameter 2503 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 3 See parameter 2502 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 3 See parameter 2503 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 137 Group 26 MOTOR CONTROL This group defines variables used for motor contro
229. and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections 2002 OVERVOLTAGE Overvoltage controller is active Check for and correct Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 2003 UNDERVOLTAGE Undervoltage controller is active Check for and correct Undervoltage on mains Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 251 Alarm code Display Description 2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed Either Do not attempt to change the direction of motor rotation or Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change if reverse operation is safe 2005 IO COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE or Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL as appropriate Poor connections and or noise on line 2006 AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check nput source and connections Parameter that sets the minimum 3021 Parameter that sets the alarm fault operation 3001 2007 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check Input source a
230. arameter group 150 torque limit parameters 127 selu limit nee a dues qe UDA ia torgue select parameter 126 Ble Pat JE diee ish ete i ese eon e ute mechanical A EM d 245 ang oe Joe tase SF REET ee Kana 105 sensor selection parameter L 151 ninimi ees UG EU LEE MEUS pate PCIE TNT P ermal protection 7 feguenoy Parameter RE E E ie thermal protection fault parameter 140 aje Bales RE adesse E E EE 156 thermal time fault parameter 140 mus parameter motor auxiliary j aux Start order parameter 186 7 r SANg convention aF aux start delay PFC parameter 177 EFB discrete inputs Ed D AA 204 aux stop delay PFC parameter 177 EFB holding registers 205 NUMDEF OFAUN EU VU ragika 150 EFB input registers 205 D cus 286 EFB mapping details 202 PE ANDERE ance A 16 EFB mapping summary 202 MWh PALE p oaet aian naO AA EFB supported features 201 EFB technical data 201 counter data parameter 102 intake energy data parameter 103 power consumption maintenance trigger 139 N NEMA ratings see ratings noise random sw freq parameter 138 Index Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com NBN ue Sh ee AeA aha ID e ed
231. are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 183 Code Description No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI2 Free Not allowed DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI4 DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 First PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 2 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 3 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI6 Third PFC Relay DI6 Free 4 Not allowed DI1 DI2 Free DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI6 Fourth PFC Relay 5 6 Not allowed Not allowed No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI3 Free Not allowed DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI5 DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI4 Fi
232. are version 3302 LOADING PACKAGE 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 3303 TEST DATE yy ww 1 0 3304 DRIVE RATING 3305 PARAMETER TABLE 0000 FFFF hex 1 Par table version Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 103 parameter 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN 1 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX 1 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM O 9 1 9 DIRECT 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT 0 127 1 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN 1 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX 1 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM 100 lt NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 104 parameter 0104 CURRENT 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN 1 3410 SIGNAL2 MAX 1 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM 0 9 1 9 DIRECT 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT 0 127 1 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN 1 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX 1 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM 100 NOT SELECTED 101 159 1 105 parameter 0105 TORQUE 3416 SIGNAL3 MIN 1 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX 1 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 0 9 1 9 DIRECT 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT 0 127 1 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN 1 3421 DUTPUT3 MAX 1 Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 3501 SENSOR TYPE 0 6 1 O NONE 3502 INPUT SELECTION 1 8 1 1 A11 3503 ALARM LIMIT Par 3501 lt 1 3 10 200 C 1 110 C 1500 ohm O Par 3501 lt 4 0 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 6 0 1 3504 FAULT LIMIT Par 3501 1 3 10 200 C 1 130 C 4000 ohm 0 Par 3501 lt 4 0 5000 ohm Par 3501 5 6 0 1 Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 3601 TIMERS ENABLE 6 7 1 O NOT SEL 3602 START TIME 1 00 00 00 23 59 58 2 s 00 00 00
233. as determined using the following section Resistors are available from ABB R3 R6 does not include an internal brake chopper Connect a chopper and a resistor or a brake unit to the DC link terminals on the drive Contact your ABB representative for appropriate parts Selecting the braking resistors frame sizes R1 and R2 Braking resistor must meet three requirements e Resistance must be always higher than the minimum value Rymy defined for the drive type in the following tables Never use resistance below this value Resistance must be low enough to be able to produce the desired braking torque To achieve the maximum braking torque the larger of 150 of heavy duty or 110 of nominal duty the resistance must not exceed Rmax If maximum braking torque is not necessary resistor values can exceed Rmax The resistor power rating must be high enough to dissipate the braking power This requirement involves many factors the maximum continuous power rating for the resistor s the rate at which the resistor changes temperature resistor thermal time constant maximum braking time ON If the regeneration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power there is a limit to the ON time or the resistor overheats before the OFF period begins minimum braking time OFF If the regeneration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power the OFF time must be large enough for the resistor to cool bet
234. ascending order If the Autochange function is disabled the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on If the Autochange function is used the assignments rotate Initially the speed regulated motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on Relay logic ACS550 ACS550 j murag a Standard PFC mode PFC with Autochange mode e The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step low frequency and start frequency values as the third auxiliary motor Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 179 Code Description The table below shows the ACS550 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is disabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 Parameter setting ACS550 Relay assignment 1 1 Autochange disabled 4 4 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6 0 1 0 2 31 X 31 31 31 31 X 31 Aux X X Aux Aux X Aux Aux Aux X Aux Aux XX X X X Aux Aux 31 31 1 Aux Aux X X X One additional relay output for the PFC that is in use One motor is in
235. ate instructions given on page 39 in section How to perform the ID Run and then return to step DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION on page 34 IDENTIFICATION MAGNETIZATION WITH ID RUN SELECTION 0 OFF IDMAGN e e As stated above the identification magnetization is performed only if parameter 9904 is set to 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ or parameter 9904 is set to 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 is set to 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST Press key 2 to switch to local control LOC shown on the left Press to start the drive The motor model is now calculated by magnetizing the motor for 10 to 15 s at zero speed motor not rotating DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION Check the direction of the motor rotation If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left TT switch to local control by pressing 89 XXX Hz To go to the Main menu press S if the bottom line shows FWD OUTPUT otherwise press 7 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom Press keys ca lt v gt until you see rEF and press 7 Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value with key An Press to start the motor Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as indicated on the display FWD means forward and REV reverse Press CQ to stop the motor e e Start up contro with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888
236. ated motor The starting order of the other motors rotates The Autochange function requires External switchgear for changing the drive s output power connections Parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt 0 Autochange is performed when e The running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV The PFC input is below the level set by this parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Note The ACS550 always coasts to stop when autochange is performed In an autochange the Autochange function does all of the following see the figure a qa 4PFC A e Initiates a change when the running time since the last 100 autochange reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV and PFC 2PFC input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Stops the speed regulated motor P 8119 7 3PFC e Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor 3PFC 1 Increments the starting order counter to change the 4PFC starting order for the motors 2PFC T vee Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated motor 1PFC i Switches off the above motor s contactor if the motor was gt P 8122 running Any other running motors are not interrupted Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated r P8118 i4 P8118 gt motor The autochange switchgear connects this motor to the ACS550 power output A Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START
237. ation The panel reference is also saved if the user parameter set is saved and loaded in local control The remote control setting is saved into the user parameter set but the local control setting is not The steps below show how to save and load User Parameter Set 1 The procedure for User Parameter Set 2 is identical only the parameter 9902 values are different To save User Parameter Set 1 Adjust the parameters Perform the motor identification if it is needed in the application but it is not done yet Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification to the permanent memory by changing parameter 9902 to 1 USER S1 SAVE MENU SAVE ENTER Press bul Assistant Control Panel or Basic Control Panel To load User Parameter Set 1 Change parameter 9902 to 0 USER S1 LOAD MENU SAVE ENTER Press A Assistant Control Panel or Basic Control Panel to load The user parameter set can also be switched through digital inputs see parameter 1605 Note Loading the user parameter set restores the parameter settings including Group 99 START UP DATA and the results of the motor identification Check that the settings correspond to the motor used Hint The user can for example switch the drive between two motors without having to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the motor is changed The user needs only to adjust the settings and perform the motor
238. aults or alarms shown on the display If you want to check the LEDs on the front of the drive switch first to remote control otherwise a fault is generated before removing the panel and verifying that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking Assistant Control Panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and that the panel LED is green and does not blink Y nea y ION TIMES forward direction reverse direction 35 LOC 2001 PAR FWD LOC 2002 PAR FWD LOC 2202 PAR FWD LOC 2203 PAR FWD CHECK LOC 9902 PAR FWD The drive is now ready for use Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 36 ACS550 User s Manual How to perform the guided start up To be able to perform the guided start up you need the Assistant Control Panel Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand SAFETY The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions given in chapter Safety must be followed during the start up procedure The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on Check the installation See the checklist in chapter nstallation page 29 Check that the starting of the motor d
239. ay output 3 Fault 1 J1 f o A 1 0 10 V N 117 AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 88 8 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 3 wire macro 73 This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push buttons It provides three 3 constant speeds To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 2 3 WIRE Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start stop buttons are disabled Connection example x1 1 10kohmi1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AI1 External speed reference 1 0 10 V Ko 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 JAI2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common Dp 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA HAD 1 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 1719 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 413 DI1 Start Momentary activation with DI2 activated starts the drive 14 DI2 Stop Momentary deactivation stops the drive 15 DI3 Fwd Rev Activation reverses rotation direction 16 DI4 Constant sp
240. caling in section ABB control profiles technical data on page 209 Miscellaneous drive control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 40001 bit 3 40031 bit 6 inverted 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 40001 bit 7 40031 bit 4 1606 LOCAL LOCK 8 COMM Source for local lock selection is Does not 40031 bit 14 the fieldbus apply 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to 41607 memory then value returns to 0 1608 START ENABLE 1 7 COMM Source for start enable 1 is the Does not 40032 bit 2 fieldbus Command word apply 1609 START ENABLE 2 7 COMM Source for start enable 2 is the 40032 bit 3 fieldbus Command word 2013 MIN TOROUE SEL 7 COMM Source for minimum torgue 40031 bit 15 selection is the fieldbus 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 7 COMM Source for maximum torque selection is the fieldbus 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 7 COMM Source for ramp pair selection is 40031 bit 10 the fieldbus Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web
241. ce source 1 Al1 Defines analog input 1 A11 as the reference EXT REF 1 MIN source gt 2 AI2 Defines analog input 2 AI2 as the reference EXT REF 1 MIN source 3 AI1 JOYST Defines analog input 1 A11 configured for joystick operation as the reference source EXT REF 1 MAX The minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum 2V 4mA reference in the reverse direction Define the minimum OV OmA using parameter 1104 The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum reference in the forward direction Define the maximum EXT REF 1 MIN using parameter 1105 Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST WARNING Because the low end of the reference range commands full reverse operation do not use 0 V as the lower end of the reference range Doing so means that if the control signal is lost which is a O V input the result is full reverse operation Instead use the following set up so that loss of the analog input triggers a fault stopping the drive Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1304 MINIMUM AI2 at 20 2 V or 4 mA Set parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT to a value 5 or higher e Set parameter 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION to 1 FAULT 4 AI2 JOYST Defines analog input 2 A12 configured for joystick operation as the reference source EXT REF 1 MAX EXT REF 1 MIN Hysteresis 4 of full scale e See above AI1 JOYST description Parameters Phone 800 894
242. cification 1 OVERCURRENT 2310h 2 DC OVERVOLT 3210h 3 DEV OVERTEMP 4210h 4 SHORT CIRC 2340h 5 Reserved FF6Bh 6 DC UNDERVOLT 3220h 7 AH LOSS 8110h 8 AI2 LOSS 8110h 9 MOT OVERTEMP 4310h 10 PANEL LOSS 5300h 11 ID RUN FAIL FF84h 12 MOTOR STALL 7121h 14 EXT FAULT 1 9000h 15 EXT FAULT 2 9001h 16 EARTH FAULT 2330h 17 Obsolete FF6Ah 18 THERM FAIL 5210h 19 OPEX LINK 7500h 20 OPEX PWR 5414h 21 CURR MEAS 2211h 22 SUPPLY PHASE 3130h 23 ENCODER ERR 7301h 24 OVERSPEED 7310h 25 Reserved FF80h 26 DRIVE ID 5400h 229 The control panel display shows a fault code and text See chapter Diagnostics on page 243 for a complete description Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT1 and 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT2 store the most recent faults For fieldbus access the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value assigned and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification See the table below Not all profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification For profiles that support this specification the profile documentation defines the proper fault request process Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 230 Fieldbus fault code Drive fault code DRIVECOM
243. clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 209 ABB control profiles technical data Overview ABB Drives profile The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including Modbus and the protocols available on the FBA module Two implementations of the ABB Drives profile are available e ABB DRV FULL This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives ABB DRV LIM This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS400 drives This implementation does not support two control word bits supported by ABB DRV FULL Except as noted the following ABB Drives Profile descriptions apply to both implementations DCU profile The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits It is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that e e e The drive is in remote REM control The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands set using parameters such as 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 ExT2 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL T
244. command 2 REVERSE START DISABLE1 consists of two Command Words Bit coded instructions in the Command 3 LOCAL START DISABLE2 Words switch the drive between 4 RESET Reserved states To control the drive using the 9 EXT Reserved Command Words an external location 6 RUN DISABLE Reserved EXT1 or EXT2 must be active and set 7 STPMODE R Reserved to COMM See parameters 1001 and The control panel displays the word in 9 STPMODE C Reserved hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit 0 displays as 0001 All zeros and a 10 RAMP_2 Reserved 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 11 RAMP OUT 0 REF CONST 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 12 RAMP HOLD REF AVE Read only copy of the Fieldbus 13 RAMP IN 0 LINK ON Command Word 2 See parameter 0301 14 RREQ LOCALLOC REQ_STARTINH 15 TORQLIM2 OFF INTERLOCK 0303 FB STS WORD 1 penus only copy of the Status Word 1 Bit 0303 FB STS WORD 1 0304 FB STS WORD 2 The drive sends status information to the fieldbus controller The status O READY ALARM consists of two Status Words 1 ENABLED NOTICE e The control panel displays the word in 2 STARTED DIRLOCK hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros and a 3 RUNNING LOCALLOCK 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 4 ZERO_SPEED CTL_MODE 0304 FB STS WORD 2 5 ACCELERATE Reserved Read only copy of the Status Word 2 6 DECELERATE Reserved S ter 0303 Se PRIREJE 7 AT SETPOINT CPY CTL 8 LIMIT CPY REF1 9 SUPERVISION CPY REF2 10
245. d 0409 STATUS AT FLT The drive status hex code word at the time the last fault occurred 0410 DI 1 3 AT FLT The status of digital inputs 1 3 at the time the last fault occurred 0411 DI 4 6 AT FLT The status of digital inputs 4 6 at the time the last fault occurred 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 Fault code of the second last fault Read only 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 Fault code of the third last fault Read only Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 107 Group 10 START STOP DIR This group defines external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes locks direction or enables direction control To select between the two external locations use the next group parameter 1102 Code Description 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS Defines external control location 1 EXT1 the configuration of start stop and direction commands 0 NOT SEL No external start stop and direction command source 1 DI1 Two wire Start Stop Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start DI1 de activated Stop Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 2 DI1 2 Two wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop is through digital input DI1 DI1 activated Start DI1 de activated Stop
246. d CW Process l O References cyclic Status Word SW Actual Values Service C Messages Parameter R W Requests Responses lt gt gt E Acyclic Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that The drive is in remote REM control The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands from EXT1 set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT 1 EXT2 SEL The external plug in fieldbus adapter is activated Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 223 Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 4 EXT FBA The external plug in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile mode or drive profile objects The content of the CONTROL WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 232 Status Word The STATUS WORD is a 16 bit word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller The content of the STATUS WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provi
247. d Zero Speed the zero speed delay function activates During the delay the functions keeps the speed controller live The drive modulates motor is magnetized and drive is ready for a quick restart Note Parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION must be 2 RAMP for zero speed delay to operate 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the Zero Speed Delay function Zero Speed gt t Zero Speed gt t 2113 START DELAY Defines the Start delay After the conditions for start have been fulfilled the drive waits until the delay has elapsed land then starts the motor Start delay can be used with all start modes If START DELAY zero the delay is disabled During the Start delay alarm 2028 START DELAY is shown Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 131 Group 22 ACCEL DECEL This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration You define these ramps as a pair one for acceleration and one for deceleration You can define two pairs of ramps and use a digital input to select one or the other pair Code Description 2201 JACC DEC 1 2 SEL Defines control for selection of acceleration deceleration ramps Ramps are defined in pairs one each for acceleration and deceleration See below for the ramp definition parameters 0 NOT SEL Disables selection the first ramp pair is used 17 DI1
248. d in this channel 28 REQ_REF2 1 Reference 2 requested in this channel 0 Reference 2 is not requested in this channel 29 REQ_REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested in this channel 0 External PID reference 2 is not requested in this channel 30 ACK_STARTINH 1 A start inhibit from this channel is granted 0 A start inhibit from this channel is not granted 31 ACK_OFF_ILCK 1 Start inhibit due to OFF button 0 Normal operation Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 216 ACS550 User s Manual State diagram ABB Drives profile To illustrate the operation of the state diagram the following example ABB DRV LIM implementation of the ABB Drives profile uses the control word to start the drive First the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met See above When the power is first connected the state of the drive is not ready to switch on See dotted lined path in the state diagram below Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the OPERATING state is reached meaning that the drive is running and follows the given reference See the table below Step CONTROL WORD Value Description 1 CW 0000 0000 0000 0110 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO SWITCH ON bit 15 bit 0 Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding CW 0000 0000 0000 0111 This CW value changes the drive
249. dbus user s manual for detailed instructions Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 108 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 11 TIMED FUNC 1 Assigns Start Stop control to Timed Function 1 Timed Function activated START Timed Function de activated STOP See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 12 14 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Assigns Start Stop control to Timed Function 2 4 See TIMED FUNC 1 above 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS Defines external control location 2 EXT2 the configuration of start stop and direction commands See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above 1003 DIRECTION Defines the control of motor rotation direction 1 FORWARD Rotation is fixed in the forward direction 2 REVERSE Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction 3 REQUEST Rotation direction can be changed on command 1004 JOGGING SEL Defines the signal that activates the jogging function Jogging uses Constant Speed 7 parameter 1208 for speed reference and ramp pair 2 parameters 2205 and 2206 for accelerating and decelerating When the jogging activation signal is lost the drive uses ramp stop to decelerate to zero speed even if coast stop is used in normal operation parameter 2102 The jogging status can be parameterized to relay outputs parameter 1401 The jogging status is also seen in DCU Profile status bit 21 O NOT SEL Disables the jogging funct
250. ded with IP21 UL type 1 enclosures Wiring requirements be installed by a competent person in accordance with the considerations defined in WARNING Ensure the motor is compatible for use with the ACS550 The drive must section Preparing for installation on page 12 If in doubt contact your local ABB sales or service office As you install the wiring observe the following e There are four sets of wiring instructions one set for each combination of drive enclosure type IP21 UL type and IP54 UL type 12 and wiring type conduit or cable Be sure to select the appropriate procedure Determine electro magnetic compliance EMC requirements per local codes See section Motor cable requirements for CE amp C Tick compliance on page 274 In general Follow local codes for cable size Keep these four classes of wiring separated input power wiring motor wiring control communications wiring and braking unit wiring When installing input power and motor wiring refer to the following as appropriate Terminal Description Specifications and notes U1 V1 W11 3 phase power supply input Input power connections on page 263 PE Protective Ground Ground connections on page 266 U2 V2 W2 Power output to motor Motor connections on page 271 1 The ACS550 x1 xxxx 2 208 240 V series can be used with a single phase supply if output current is derated by 50 For single phase
251. ded with the FBA module and or section ABB Drives profile technical data on page 232 Reference The contents of each REFERENCE word can be used as speed or frequency reference is a 16 bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15 bit integer Negative references indicating reversed rotation direction are indicated by the two s complement of the corresponding positive reference value The use of a second reference REF2 is supported only when a protocol is configured for the ABB Drives profile Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the following sections as appropriate Reference scaling on page 236 ABB Drives profile technical data Reference scaling on page 240 Generic profile technical data Actual Values Actual Values are 16 bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive Drive Actual Values for example Group 10 START STOP DIR parameters can be mapped to Input Words using Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE parameters protocol dependent but typically parameters 5104 5126 Planning Network planning should address the following questions Whattypes and quantities of devices must be connected to the network What control information must be sent down to the drives What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com
252. dels are incompatible 5087 Download is not allowed because parameter sets do not match 5088 Operation failed because a drive memory error was detected 5089 Download failed because a CRC error was detected 5090 Download failed because a data processing error was detected 5091 Operation failed because a parameter error was detected 5092 Download failed because parameter sets do not match Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 255 Maintenance WARNING Read chapter Safety on page 5 before performing any maintenance on the equipment Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death Maintenance intervals Heatsink If installed in an appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB Maintenance Interval Instruction Heatsink temperature check Depends on the dustiness of the See Heatsink on page 255 and cleaning environment every 6 12 months Main cooling fan replacement Every six years See Main fan replacement on page 256 Internal enclosure cooling fan Every three years See Internal enclosure fan replacement replacement on 257 IP54 UL type 12 drives Capacitor reforming Every year when stored See Reforming on page 258 Capacitor replac
253. downloads select the appropriate operation here DOWNLOAD FULL SET is used as an example on the Copy menu with keys A and CV 7 and press SS The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press 7 if you want stop the operation After the download is completed the display shows a message about the completion Press to return to the Copy menu LOC WPAR BACKUP Copying parameters 50 ABORT 00 00 LOC G MESSAGE Parameter upload successful OK 00 00 LOC UPAR BACKUP Downloading parameters full set al 50 SS kal ABORT 00 00 LOC UMESSAGE Parameter_download successful ly completed OK 00 00 Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 60 How to view information about the backup ACS550 User s Manual Step Action Display Go to the Main menu by pressing EL if you are in the Output mode otherwise EXIT by pressing CZ repeatedly until you get to the Main menu LOC MAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR TEXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Par Backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys ENTER C A and S w gt and pressing S LOC U COPY MENU 1 BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL Select BACKUP INFO on the Copy menu with keys
254. duct is protected by one or more of the following US patents 4 920 306 5 612 604 6 094 364 6 252 436 6 370 049 6 741 059 6 940 253 6 977 449 7 034 510 7 082 374 D510 320 Product protection in the USA 5 301 085 5 654 624 6 147 887 6 265 724 6 396 236 6 774 758 6 934 169 6 984 958 7 036 223 7 084 604 D511 137 Other patents pending 5 463 302 5 799 805 6 175 256 6 305 464 6 448 735 6 844 794 6 956 352 6 985 371 7 045 987 7 098 623 D511 150 5 521 483 5 940 286 6 184 740 6 313 599 6 498 452 6 856 502 6 958 923 6 992 908 7 057 908 7 102 325 D512 026 5 532 568 5 942 874 6 195 274 6 316 896 6 552 510 6 859 374 6 967 453 6 999 329 7 059 390 D503 931 D512 696 295 5 589 754 5 952 613 6 229 356 6 335 607 6 597 148 6 922 883 6 972 976 7 023 160 7 067 997 D510 319 D521 466 Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Index Numerics Oxxxx register EFB function codes 204 EFB mapping 202 1xxxx register EFB function codes 205 EFB mapping 204 2 wire sensor connection example 80 3 wire MACrO 73 3xxxx register EFB function codes 205 EFB mapping 205 4xxxx register EFB function codes 207 EFB mapping
255. e the drive compares a reference signal setpoint to an actual signal feedback and automatically adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two signals The difference between the two signals is the error value Typically PID control mode is used when the speed of a motor needs to be controlled based on pressure flow or temperature In most cases when there is only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACS550 only parameter group 40 is needed The following is a schematic of setpoint feedback signal flow using parameter group 40 Panel REF1 P1101 Panel REF 2 57 15 REF1 0 17 GF REF2 5 Panel REF2 300 PID Setpoint 20 21 500 19 Al P4016 G40 Current PID1 PANEL Torque LOC REM Power selection A P4017 P4014 P4015 LOC Current Torque PID Act Value REM Power Panel REF 1 P1103 P1102 DI Cost oe ExT 1105 Al 1 Speed Comm REF 1 EXT2 Panel REF 2 S P1106 G12 Const Al Speed Comm REF 2 P1106 Panel bE P4010 PID Setpoint DNU P1107 al P4012 EE P1108 Al2 P4013 19 Comm A Internal 4
256. e 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3023 WIRING FAULT Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive is NOT running When the drive is not running it monitors for Improper connections of input power to the drive output the drive can display fault 35 OUTPUT WIRING if improper connections are detected Ground faults the drive can display fault 16 EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected Also see parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT O DISABLE No drive response to either of the above monitoring results 1 ENABLE The drive displays faults when this monitoring detects problems 3024 CB TEMP FAULT Defines the drive response to control board overheating Not for drives with an OMIO control board O DISABLE No response 1 ENABLE Displays fault 37 CB OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 143 Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET This group defines conditions for automatic resets An automatic reset occurs after a particular fault is detected The drive holds for a set delay time then automatically restarts You can limit the number of resets in a specified time period and set up automatic resets for a variety of faults Code Description 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS Example Three faults have occurred in Sets the number of allo
257. e code label are given below vt 3 380 480 V IP21 UL type 1 NEMA 1 n B 8 A RA ABB Oy i MADE IN F NLAND 48 63 Hz C We Output V 3 0 U1 V ho nz GL 0 500 Hr LULU Motor PN PhA 4 0 3 0 kW 50067 04 lt Serial number ACS550 01 08A8 4 lt 4 Type for wore ramban see User Manat Power pna 308A 1 nang i Date 12 January 2006 Orig Firmware V 2 068 14 m ini Serial number T T 50 U1 031 mm se code Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 13 Type code Use the following chart to interpret the type code found on both the type code and the serial number label ACS550 01 08A8 4 J404 AC Standard Drive 550 product series ee Construction region specific 01 Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance U1 Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance Output current rating e g 08A8 8 8 A see section Ratings on page 259 for details Voltage rating 2 208 240 VAC 4 380 480 VAC 6 500 600 VAC Options Examples of options B055 IP54 UL type 12 no specification IP21 UL type 1 0J400 No control panel J404 ACS CP C Basic Control Panel L511 OREL 01 Relay output extension K451 RDNA 01 DeviceNet K452 RLON 01 LonWorks K454 RPBA 01 PROFIBUS DP Ratings and frame size The chart in section Ratings on
258. e control REM 3 If the panel is not in the Reference mode rEF not visible press key Loc CA or Kw 2 until you see rEF and then press X7 Now the display r E F shows the current reference value with under the value MENU LOC 49 1 FWD 4 To increase the reference value press AN Loc 5 O 0 To decrease the reference value press amp w 7 ba The value changes immediately when you press the key It is stored in the FWD drive permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 67 Parameter mode In the Parameter mode you can view and change parameter values select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing N 7 if you are in the Output mode LOC otherwise by pressing 777 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom r E F MENU 2 If the panel is not in the Parameter mode PAr not visible press key LOC CAN or S v 2 until you see PAr and then press S The display DA ro shows the number of one of the parameter groups MENU WD P wg 1 PAR 3 Use keys An and SY 7 to find
259. e drive for fieldbus control Additional relay outputs are added sequentially Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 204 ACS550 User s Manual The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils Function code Description 01 Read coil status 05 Force single coil 15 OxOF Hex Force multiple coils 1xxxx Mapping Modbus discrete inputs The drive maps the following information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs bit wise map of the STATUS WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose discrete hardware inputs numbered sequentially beginning with input 33 The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set Modbus Internal location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE ref all profiles 5305 0 or 2 5305 1 10001 STATUS WORD Bit 0 RDY ON READY 10002 STATUS WORD Bit 1 RDY RUN ENABLED 10003 STATUS WORD Bit 2 RDY REF STARTED 10004 STATUS WORD Bit 3 TRIPPED RUNNING 10005 STATUS WORD Bit 4 OFF 2 STA ZERO SPEED 10006 STATUS WORD Bit 5 OFF 3 STA ACCELERATE 10007 STATUS WORD Bit 6 SWC ON INHIB DECELERATE 10008 STATUS WORD Bit 7 ALARM AT SETPOINT 10009 STATUS WORD Bit 8 AT SETPOINT LIMIT 10010 STATUS
260. e fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint reguires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1501 A01 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 controlled by writing to 0135 COMM VALUE 1 parameter 0135 40135 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 controlled by writing to 0136 COMM VALUE 2 parameter 0136 40136 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com PID control setpoint source ACS550 User s Manual Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops Modbus protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 4010 SET POINT SEL 8 COMM VALUE 1 Setpoint is input reference 2 40003 Set 1 4110 SET POINT SEL 9 COMM AI1 Set 2 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Trim 10 COMM AI1 AM Communication fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED Drive parameter Value Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC
261. e motor cables Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 274 ACS550 User s Manual Grounding and routing Motor cable shielding Motor cables reguire shielding using conduit armored cable or shielded cable Conduit When using conduit Bridge joints with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond conduit run to the drive enclosure Use a separate conduit run for motor cables also separate input power and control cables Use a separate conduit run for each drive Armored cable When using armored cable Use six conductor 3 phases and 3 grounds type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds Armored motor cable can share a cable tray with input power cables but not with control cables Shielded cable For shielded cable details see section Motor cable requirements for CE amp C Tick compliance on page 274 Grounding See section Ground connections on page 266 For CE compliant installations and installations where EMC emissions must be minimized see section Effective motor cable screens on page 275 Drive s motor connection terminals The drive s motor and input power terminals have the same specifications See section Drive s power connection terminals on page 268 Motor cable requirements for CE amp C Tick compliance The requirements in this section apply for CE or
262. e must be set to O DISABLE to ensure proper operation of the chopper 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off When on fthe DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit When the motor speed decreases the inertia of the load causes regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC bus charged and preventing an undervoltage trip The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride through on systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan 0 DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE TIME Enables controller with 500 ms time limit for operation 2 ENABLE Enables controller without maximum time limit for operation Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 126 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 2007 MINIMUM FREQ IM Freg 2007 value is lt 0 Defines the minimum limit for the drive output freguency P 2008 e A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two ranges one positive and one negative e A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range Frequency range allowed Tma 0 See the figure Note Keep MINIMUM FREQ lt MAXIMUM FREQ 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ mag Defines the maximum limit for the drive o
263. e of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI1 DI2 and DI3 Inverse operation uses three digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated O DI2 DI3 Function No constant speed Constant speed 1 1202 Constant speed 2 1203 Constant speed 3 1204 Constant speed 4 1205 Constant speed 5 1206 Constant speed 6 1207 O O Constant speed 7 1208 O O O Ol O O 1 O O O Bo 13 DI3 4 5 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI3 D14 and DI5 See above DI1 2 3 INV for code 14 DI4 5 6 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI4 DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 3 INV for code 1202 CONST SPEED 1 Sets value for Constant Speed 1 The range and units depend on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Range 0 30000 rpm when 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ Range 0 500 Hz when 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 1203 CONST SPEED 2 CONST SPEED 7 Each sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above 1208 Constant Speed 7 is used also as jogging speed See parameter 1004 JOGGING SEL Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 114 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 1209 TIMED MODE SEL Defines timed function activated constant speed
264. e running e See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least three auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 8109 START FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor starts if Noauxiliary motors are running f Hz ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit Fg 8109 1 Hz A BU aaa ng Output frequency stays above a relaxed limit fax 8109 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D E P 8109 1 After the first auxiliary motor starts P 8109 Output frequency decreases by the value 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 P 8112 1 In effect the output of the speed regulated motor drops to 5 compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor fMIN See the figure where e A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 Low FREQ 1 B Output frequency increase during the start delay C A e C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency 1 increases 1 On 0 Note 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between e 8112 LOW FREQ 1 e 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1 8110 START FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor starts if e One auxiliary motor is running ACS550 output frequency exceeds the limit 8110 1
265. e signals by specifying the minimum and maximum LOC UPAR EDIT display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN DIRECT For details see parameters 3406 and 3407 0 0 Hz Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Signal 2 parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN and 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX LOC UPAR EDIT 3407 OUTPUTI MAX 0 0 Hz CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 51 Assistants mode When the drive is first powered up the Start up Assistant guides you through the setup of the basic parameters The Start up Assistant is divided into assistants each of which guides you through the task of specifying a related parameter set for example Motor Set up or PID Control You can activate the assistants one after the other as the Start up Assistant suggests or independently The tasks of the assistants are listed in the table on page 52 In the Assistants mode you can use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to use an assistant The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through assistants The Motor Set up Assistant is used as an example Step Action
266. ear ne dri ia 190 Mechanical and electrical installation EFB 190 Communication set up EFB 191 Activate drive control functions EFB 193 Table of contents Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Feedback from the drive EFB 197 Diagnostics EFB psa exe hau eda ERRARE RP BA Gape awh Pewee oe 198 Modbus protocol technical data 201 ABB control profiles technical data 209 Fieldbus adapter M PULL 221 Planning AA eta ag die ate 223 Mechanical and electrical installation FBA 224 Communication set up FBA 225 Activate drive control functions FBA 225 Feedback from the drive FBA 228 Diagnostics FBA sire Bed tot ei uu gd EE Siew Dew ER 229 ABB Drives profile technical data 232 Generic profile technical data 240 Diagnostics Diagnostic displays s s E ed mee eb ee XAR he A ee Pars 243 Correcting faults zawa g yas don ed anus re amas Nov OE aw MARC en 244 Correcting alarms s banh sds Rep KA ed eee ee A en ee 250 Maintenance Maintenance intervals
267. ect Excessive load Insufficient motor power Parameters 3010 3012 13 RESERVED Not used 14 EXT FAULT 1 Digital input defined to report first external fault is active See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 15 EXT FAULT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active See parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 16 EARTH FAULT Possible ground fault detected in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running Detection is more sensitive when the drive is not running and can produce false positives Possible corrections Check for correct faults in the input wiring Verify that motor cable does not exceed maximum specified length Adelta grounded input power supply and motor cables with high capacitance may result in erroneous error reports during non running tests To disable response to fault monitoring when the drive is not running use parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT To disable response to all ground fault monitoring use parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT 17 OBSOLETE Not used 18 THERM FAIL Internal fault The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the drive is open or shorted Contact your local ABB representative 19 OPEX LINK Internal fault A communication related problem has been detected on the fiber optic link between the control and OINT boards Contact yo
268. ed in HVAC applications To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 5 HAND AUTO Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 OFF Connection example X1 1 10 kohm 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen N12 AIM External reference 1 0 10 V Hand Control oo 3 AGND Analog input circuit common j 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC D 5 Al2 External reference 2 0 20 mA Auto Control 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 7 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 719 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Hand Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Forward Reverse Hand Activation reverses rotation direction 15 DI3 EXT1 EXT2 Selection Activation selects auto control 16 DI4 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 17 DI5 Forward Reverse Auto Activation reverses rotation direction 18 DI6 Start Stop Auto Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A x Default operation 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A Mn Default operation 24 RO2B Running g
269. eed selection 17 DI5 Constant speed selection 18 DI6 Not used 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A x Default operation Note 1 Code 21 R01B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 0 open 1 connected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A _ Default operation DI4 DIS Output 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 0 JO Reference through Al1 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 1 JO CONST SPEED 1 1202 26 RO3A Default operation O 1 CONST SPEED 2 1203 27 RO3B Fault 1 lt gt 25 connected to 27 1 1 CONST SPEED 3 1204 Fault lt gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference Al1 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 e Start stop and direction DI1 2 3 Analog output AO2 Current o gt Al1 0 10 V e Constant speed selection DI4 5 Relay output 1 Ready 9 p A12 0 4 20 mA Relay output 2 Running or Relay output 3 Fault 1 1 gt O jg Al1 0 10 V 107 AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 74 ACS550 User s Manual Alternate macro This macro provides an I O configuration adopted to a sequence of DI control signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 3 ALTERNATE Connection example
270. eference correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 l l l l l 100 PT TTT TZ TTTTO l l l l i Al1 input signal 100 0 5 par 1108 gt Moe 50 10096 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 200 l l l l l 100 777A l l l l Al1input signal 0 gt 0 50 100 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 220 Reference handling ACS550 User s Manual Use Group 10 START STOP DIR parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and ExT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives profile Parameter Value setting Al reference scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Max ref Fieldbus Resultant ref reference 163 100 100 163 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE Fieldbus 163 100 Resultant ref 100 163 reference Max ref 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Max ref Fieldbus Resultant ref 163 100 reference Max ref 100 163 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web
271. ement Every nine to ten years See Replacement on page 258 frame sizes R5 and R6 Replace battery in the Assistant Every ten years See Battery on page 258 Control Panel The heatsink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air Since a dusty heatsink is less efficient at cooling the drive overtemperature faults become more likely In a normal environment not dusty not clean check the heatsink annually in a dusty environment check more often Clean the heatsink as follows when necessary Remove power from drive Remove the cooling fan see section Main fan replacement on page 256 Blow clean compressed air not humid from bottom to top and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust Note If there is a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment perform the cleaning in another room Reinstall the cooling fan Restore power Maintenance Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 256 ACS550 User s Manual Main fan replacement The drive s main cooling fan has a life span of about 60 000 operating hours at maximum rated operating temperature and drive load The expected life span doubles for each 10 C 18 F drop in the fan temperature fan temperature is a function of ambient temperatures and drive loads Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in
272. en the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions e g parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relay output Alarm codes Basic Control Panel The Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code A5xxx The following table lists the alarm codes and descriptions Code Description 5001 Drive is not responding 5002 The communication profile is incompatible with the drive 5010 The panel s parameter backup file is corrupted 5011 Drive is controlled from another source 5012 Rotation direction is locked 5013 Button is disabled because start is inhibited 5014 Button is disabled because drive is faulted 5015 Button is disabled because local mode lock is on 5018 Parameter default value can t be found 5019 Writing a non zero value is prohibited can only write a zero value 5020 Group or parameter does not exist or parameter value is inconsistent 5021 Group or parameter is hidden 5022 Group or parameter is write protected 5023 Modification is not allowed while the drive is running 5024 Drive is busy try again 5025 Write is not allowed while upload or download is in progress 5026 Value is at or below low limit 5027 Value is at or above high limit 5028 Value is invalid doesn t match any values
273. ents and tests IEC EN 61800 5 1 2003 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5 1 Safety requirements Electrical thermal and energy IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Agjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Agjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods UL 508C UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment third c UL US edition LISTED C22 2 No 14 CSA Standard for Industrial Control Eguipment for ACS550 U1 drives only CE marking C A CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC and Directive 89 336 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC Note The 600 V ACS550 U1 drives are not CE approved Compliance with the EMC Directive The Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used within the European Union The EMC product standard IEC EN 61800 3 2004 covers requirements stated for drives Compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 2004 See page 293 C Tick marking The drive carries C Tick marking C Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand A C Tick mark is attached to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 2004 Technical dat
274. er or by clearing and then restoring the station Id 5302 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 193 Activate drive control functions EFB Controlling the drive Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function For the protocol specific details see the document supplied with the FBA module Start Stop Direction control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent JY Modbus protocol reference Drive parameter Value Description ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM Start Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0 3 40031 bits O 1 with Ext1 selected 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 10 comm Start Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0 3 40031 bits O 1 with Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction by fieldbus 4002 4003 40031 bit 3
275. er Embedded fieldbus page 189 Code Description 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol Format XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Defines the node address of the RS485 link The node address on each unit must be unique 5303 EFB BAUD RATE Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second kb s 1 2 kb s 2 4 kb s 4 8 kb s 9 6 kb s 19 2 kb s 38 4 kb s 57 6 kb s 76 8 kb s 5304 EFB PARITY Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol O ABB DRV LIM Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS
276. er OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal OPERATION INHIBITED Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED RAMP OUT ZERO NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATION ENABLED RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 233 ABB Drives profile FBA CONTROL WORD Bit Name Value Commanded state Comments RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held RAMP IN ZERO RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING 0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero RESET 0 51 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM 0 OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unused 10 REMOTE_CMD Fieldbus control enabled CW 0 or Ref 0 Retain last CW and Ref CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled Refand deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRL LOC
277. er s Manual Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs Code Description 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 what relay output 1 means O NOT SEL Relay is not used and is de energized 1 READY Energize relay when drive is ready to function Requires Run enable signal present No faults exist Supply voltage is within range Emergency Stop command is not on 2 RUN Energize relay when the drive is running 3 FAULT 1 Energize relay when power is applied De energizes when a fault occurs 4 FAULT Energize relay when a fault is active 5 ALARM Energize relay when an alarm is active 6 REVERSED Energize relay when motor rotates in reverse direction 7 STARTED Energize relay when drive receives a start command even if Run Enable signal is not present De energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs 8 SUPRV1 OVER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 exceeds the limit 3203 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 144 9 SUPRV1 UNDER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 drops below the limit 3202 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 144 10 SUPRV2 OVER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 exceeds the limit 3206 See Group 32 SUPERVISION starting on page 144 1
278. ers For the ACS550 the 2 analog input Registers channels are mapped as input registers 1 amp 2 Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output For the ACS550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register For the ACS550 the entire Holding Register parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics Subcodes for Query 0x00 Restart 0x01 amp Listen Only 0x04 are supported Force Multiple Coils OxOF Write multiple discrete outputs For the ACS550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers For the ACS550 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Write Multiple 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single command Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 202 ACS550 User s Manual Mapping summary The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACS550 parameters and 1 0 and Modbus reference space For details see Modbus addressing bel
279. es Output Reference Parameter Copy and Fault The operation in the first four modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm code You can reset the fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Diagnostics After the power is switched on the panel is in the Output mode where you can start stop change the direction switch between local and remote control and monitor up to three actual values one at a time To do other tasks go first to the Main menu and select the appropriate mode How to do common tasks REM OUTPUT 491 MENU PAL FWD The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail Task Mode Page How to switch between local and remote control Any 64 How to start and stop the drive Any 64 How to change the direction of the motor rotation Any 64 How to browse the monitored signals Output 65 How to set the speed freguency or torgue reference Reference 66 How to change the value of a parameter Parameter 67 How to select the monitored signals Parameter 68 How to reset faults and alarms Output Fault 249 How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Copy 70 How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Copy 70 Cont
280. es according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte and if the drive is not provided with the RoHS marking the printed circuit boards contain lead both of which will be classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local ABB distributor Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 291 Applicable standards Drive compliance with the following standards is identified by the standard marks on the type code label Mark Applicable standards EN 50178 1997 Electronic equipment for use in power installations C IEC EN 60204 1 2005 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing anemergency stop device asupply disconnecting device IEC EN 60529 2004 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures IP code IEC 60664 1 2002 Insulation coordination for equipment within low voltage systems Part 1 Principles requirem
281. es or liquids and conductive contaminants such as dripping water condensation carbon dust and metallic particles IP54 UL type 12 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions If for some reason an IP21 drive needs to be installed without the conduit box or cover or an IP54 drive without the conduit plate or hood see the note in chapter Technical data page 292 Suitable mounting location Confirm that the mounting location meets the following constraints e e e LI The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth solid surface and in a suitable environment as defined above The minimum space requirements for the drive are the outside dimensions see section Outside dimensions on page 287 plus air flow space around the drive see section Cooling on page 283 The distance between the motor and the drive is limited by the maximum motor cable length See section Motor connection specifications on page 271 The mounting site must support the drive s modest weight See section Weight on page 288 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 16 ACS550 User s Manual Installing the drive WARNING Before installing the ACS550 ensure the input power supply to the drive is off Prepare the mounting location The ACS550 should only be mounted where all of the requiremen
282. es the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40012 5318 EFB PAR 18 For Modbus Sets additional delay in milliseconds before the ACS550 begins transmitting response to the master request 5319 EFB PAR 19 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Control Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word 5320 EFB PAR 20 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Status Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 175 Group 81 PFC CONTROL This group defines a Pump Fan Control PFC mode of operation The major features of PFC control are The ACS550 controls the motor of pump no 1 varying the motor speed to control the pump capacity This motor is the speed regulated motor Direct line connections power the motor of pump no 2 and pump no 3 etc The ACS550 switches pump no 2 and then pump no 3 etc on and off as needed These motors are auxiliary motors The ACS550 PID control uses two signals a process reference and an actual value feedback The PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pum
283. et from the control panel to a drive dL P Download Partial The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE and Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u1 Download User Set 1 A user set includes Group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when User Set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User parameter sets on page 81 and then uploaded to panel copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u2 Download User Set 2 As dL u1 Download User Set 1 above start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 70 ACS550 User s Manual How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Step Action Display 1 Go to the Main menu by pressing IT if you are in the Output mode LOC otherwise by pressing 77 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom PA ro MENU WD 2 If the panel is not in the Copy mode CoPY not visible press key A Loc or S v 2 until you see
284. et up FBA on page 225 section Activate drive control functions FBA on page 225 The protocol specific documentation provided with the module Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 225 Communication set up FBA Serial communication selection To activate the serial communication use parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL Set 9802 4 EXT FBA Serial communication configuration Setting 9802 together with mounting a particular FBA module automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Parameter 5101 is automatically configured Parameters 5102 5126 are protocol dependent and define for example the profile used and additional I O words These parameters are referred to as the fieldbus configuration parameters See the user s manual provided with the FBA module for details on the fieldbus configuration parameters Parameter 5127 forces the validation of changes to parameters 5102 5126 If parameter 5127 is not used changes to parameters 5102 5126 take affect only after the drive power is cycled Parameters 5128 5133 provide data about the FBA module currently installed e g component versions and status See Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE for parameter descriptions Acti
285. eters 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 1 controller reference value and actual value Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 2 controller reference value and actual value Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0134 COMM RO WORD Free data location that can be written from serial link Used for relay output control See parameter 1401 0135 COMM VALUE 1 Free data location that can be written from serial link Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 102 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 0136 COMM VALUE 2 Free data location that can be written from serial link 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 Process variable 1 Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 Process variable 2 Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 Process variable 3 Defined by parameters in Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 0140 RUN TIME The drive s accumulated running time in thousands of hours kh Cannot be reset 0141 MWH COUNTER The drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours Cannot be reset 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR The motor s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Param
286. eters mode 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI The drive s accumulated power on time in days Cannot be reset 0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO The drive s accumulated power on time in 2 second ticks 30 ticks lt 60 seconds Shown in format hh mm ss e Cannot be reset 0145 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature in degrees Celsius PTC resistance in ohms Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up See parameter 3501 0146 MECH ANGLE Defines the motor shaft s angular position to about 0 01 32 768 divisions for 360 The position is defined as 0 at power up During operation the zero position can be set by a Z pulse input if parameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE 1 ENABLE parameter 5011 POSITION RESET if parameter 5010 z PLS ENABLE 2 DISABLE any status change of parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 0147 MECH REVS A signed integer that counts full revolutions of the motor shaft The value increments when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 32767 to 0 e decrements when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from O to 32767 0148 Z PLS DETECTED Encoder zero pulse detector When a Z pulse defines the zero position the shaft must pass through the zero position to trigger a Z pulse Until then the shaft position is unknown the drive uses the shaft position at power up as zero This parameter signals when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE is valid The parameter starts at O NOT DETECTED on power up and changes to 1 DETECTED only if par
287. function using the value entered as the acceleration time 8125 DEC IN AUX START Sets the PFC deceleration time for a maximum to zero A speed regulated motor accelerating using Group 22 frequency ramp This PFC deceleration ramp ACCEL DECEL parameters 2202 or 2205 Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary B speed regulated motor decelerating using Group motor is switched on 22 ACCEL DECEL parameters 2203 or 2206 e Replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 At aux motor start speed regulated motor decelerates ACCEL DECEL using 8125 DEC IN AUX START e Applies only until the output of the regulated motor At aux motor stop speed regulated motor accelerates decreases by an amount equal to the output of the using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP auxiliary motor Then the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies O NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the deceleration time 8126 TIMED AUTOCHNG Sets the autochange using a Timed function See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL O NOT SEL 1 TIMED FUNC 1 Enables autochange when Timed function 1 is active 2 4 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Enables autochange when Timed function 2 4 is active 8127 MOTORS Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors maximum 7 motors 1 speed regulated 3 connected direct on line and 3 spare motors This value includes also the speed regulated motor This value must be com
288. fy a new value press keys A and amp w 7 LOC PAR EDIT 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 SAVE To ask for information on the requested parameter press key C Scroll the at ae Given om the EXIT help text with keys Anand S w P Close the help by pressing CZ morar nameplate voltage value must correspond to motor D Y connection EXIT 00 00 Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 52 ACS550 User s Manual Step Action Display 5 To accept the new value and continue to the setting of the next parameter LOC U PAR EDIT SAVE press s 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR To stop the assistant press CZ EXIT 00 00 SAVE The table below lists the tasks of the assistants and the relevant drive parameters Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the Start up Assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests Name Description Set parameters Language select Selecting the language 9901 Motor set up Setting the motor data 9904 9909 Performing the motor identification If the speed limits are notin 9910 the allowed range Setting the limits Application Selecting the application macro 9902 parameters associated to the macro Option modules Activating the option modules Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Group 52 PANEL COMM 9802
289. ges to a user parameter set are lost Note The value of this parameter 1605 is not included in the User Parameter Sets and it does not change if User Parameter Sets change Note You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2 See parameter 1401 O NOT SEL Defines the control panel using parameter 9902 as the only control for changing User Parameter Sets 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets See DI1 INV above 1606 LOCAL LOCK Defines control for the use of the LOC mode The LOC mode allows drive control from the control panel When LOCAL LOCK is active the con
290. gital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 Activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0 Ramp output will ramp to 0 according to the currently used ramp time after which it will stay at 0 De activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 e See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 13 of the Command Word 1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0 De activating the digital input forces ramp input to O Activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp function generator input to 0 See DI1 INV above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 133 Group 23 SPEED CONTROL This group defines variables used for speed control operation Code Description 2301 PROP GAIN Gain Kp 1 Sets the relative gain for the speed controller T Integration time 0 Larger values may cause speed oscillation A Tp Derivation time 0 The figure shows the speed controller output
291. gnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 245 Fault code Fault name in panel Description and recommended corrective action DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive Check for and correct Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Undersized brake chopper if present Verify that overvoltage controller is ON using parameter 2005 DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated Temperature is at or above limit R1 R4 8 R7 R8 115 C 239 F R5 R6 125 C 257 F Check for and correct Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load SHORT CIRC Fault current Check for and correct Ashort circuit in the motor cable s or motor Supply disturbances RESERVED Not used DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient Check for and correct Missing phase in the input power supply Blown fuse Undervoltage on mains AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 loss Analog input value is less than Al1 FAULT LIMIT 3021 Check for and correct Source and connection for analog input Parameter settings for Al1 FAULT LIMIT 3021 and 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION
292. he clock Maintenance Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Technical data Ratings 259 By type code the table below provides ratings for the ACS550 adjustable speed AC drive including IEC ratings NEMA ratings shaded columns frame size Ratings 208 240 V drives Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols on page 261 Type code Normal use Heavy duty use Frame ACS550 x1 by Py Py lna Pha Pha size see below A kW hp A kW hp Three phase supply voltage 208 240 V 04A6 2 4 6 0 75 1 3 5 0 55 0 75 R1 06A6 2 6 6 1 1 1 5 4 6 0 75 1 R1 07A5 2 7 5 1 5 2 6 6 1 1 1 5 R1 012A 2 11 8 2 2 3 7 5 1 5 2 R1 017A 2 16 7 4 5 11 8 2 2 3 R1 024A 2 24 2 5 5 7 5 16 7 4 5 R2 031A 2 30 8 7 5 10 24 2 5 5 7 5 R2 046A 2 46 2 11 15 30 8 7 5 10 R3 059A 2 59 4 15 20 46 2 11 15 R3 075A 2 74 8 18 5 25 59 4 15 20 R4 088A 2 88 0 22 30 74 8 18 5 25 R4 114A 2 114 30 40 88 0 22 30 R4 143A 2 143 37 50 114 30 40 R6 178A 2 178 45 60 150 37 50 R6 221A 2 221 55 75 178 45 60 R6 248A 2 248 75 100 192 55 75 R6 00467918 xls B Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 260 ACS550 User s Manual Ratings 380 480 V drives Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols
293. he right END In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID Run However you can stop the ID Run at any time by pressing CQ After the ID Run is completed the alarm display is not shown Loc FO 0 1 1 any more If the ID Run fails the fault display presented on the right is shown FWD Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 41 Control panels About control panels Use a control panel to control the drive read status data and adjust parameters The drive works with either of two different control panel types Basic Control Panel This panel described in section Basic Control Panel on page 62 provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values Assistant Control Panel This panel described below includes pre programmed assistants to automate the most common parameter setups The panel provides language support It is available with different language sets Compatibility The manual is compatible with the following panel versions Basic Control Panel ACS CP C Rev K Assistant Control Panel Area 1 ACS CP A Rev Y Assistant Control Panel Area 2 ACS CP L Rev E Assistant Control Panel Asia ACS CP D Rev M See page 45 for how to find out the version of your Assistant Control Panel See parameter 9901 LANGUAGE to
294. he serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control profile For example to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL requires both parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 1 STD MODBUS and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 2 ABB DRV FULL Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 210 ABB Drives profile ACS550 User s Manual The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 5319 Name Value commanded Comments state 0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL 7 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence Enter OFF1 ACTIVE Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence Enter OFF2 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL z NETT 7 0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence Enter OFF3 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven A eguipment can be stopped using t
295. he source for the start enable 2 signal Bit 3 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 2 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal See DIT INV above 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS Controls the visibility of the following alarms 2001 Overcurrent alarm e 2002 Overvoltage alarm e 2003 Undervoltage alarm 2009 Device overtemperature alarm For more information see section A arm listing on page 250 O NO The above alarms are suppressed 1 YES All of the above alarms are enabled 1611 PARAMETER VIEW Selects the parameter view i e which parameters are shown Note This parameter is visible only when it is activated by the optional FlashDrop device FlashDrop is designed for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives It allows easy customization of the parameter list e g selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 English FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting parameter 9902 to 31 LOAD FD SET O DEFAULT Complete long and short parameter lists are shown 1 FLASHDROP FlashDrop parameter list is shown Does not include short parameter list Parameters that are hidden by the Fla
296. his mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal 0 OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED 4 Unused ABB DRV LIM RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED ABB PRY FULL 0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force 5 RAMP HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 RAMP IN 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING ZERO 0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 211 ABB Drives profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 5319 Commanded Bit Name Value state Comments 7 RESET 0 21 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM 0 OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unused 10 Unused ABB DRV LIM REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled ARB BRVEULE NG CW 0 or Ref 0 Retain last CW and Ref
297. icates a nominal current rating of 8 8 A e Y The voltage rating of the drive where Y 2 indicates a 208 240 V rating 4 indicates a 380 480 V rating 6 indicates a 500 600 V rating 3305 PARAMETER TABLE Contains the version of the parameter table used in the drive Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY 147 This group defines the content for control panel display middle area when the control panel is in the Output mode Code Description 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM Selects the first parameter by number displayed on the control panel Definitions in this group define display content when the control panel is in the control mode Any parameter number in Group 01 OPERATING DATA can be selected Using the following parameters the display value can be scaled converted to convenient units and or displayed as a bar graph The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group 100 NOT SELECTED First parameter not displayed 101 159 Displays parameter 0101 0159 If parameter does not exist the display shows n a P 3404 P 3405 P 3401 137 P 3408 138 P 3415 139 LOC t i EME m4911 Hz m 0 2 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU P 3404 LOC V HZ NM 50 0 4 A 24 4 96 DIR 00 00 MENU
298. identification once for each motor and then to save the data as two user parameter sets When the motor is changed only the corresponding user parameter set needs to be loaded and the drive is ready to operate Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 82 ACS550 User s Manual Macro default values for parameters Parameter default values are listed in section Complete parameter list on page 85 Changing from the default macro ABB Standard that is editing the value of parameter 9902 changes the parameter default values as defined in the following tables Note There are two sets of values because the defaults are configured for 50 Hz IEC compliance ACS550 01 and 60 Hz NEMA compliance ACS550 U1 ACS550 01 5 T o E 2 E E B o Parameter m E 5 2 o ki B 8 se Ig S 2 st c O o 0 0 lt 2 a LL Ena o o o a 9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 2 4 9 2 2 1 1 2 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 0 0 0 7 6 6 2 1003 DIRECTION 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 3 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 0 0 0 0 3 2 3 3 1103 REF1 SELECT 1 1 1 12 1 1 1 1 1106 REF2 SELECT 2 2 2 2 2 19 19 2 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 9 10 9 5 0 9 0 4 1304 MINIMUM AI2 0 0 0 0 20 20 20 20 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2
299. ied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive parameter Value Description protocol reference 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 controlled by 0135 eon VALUE x writing to parameter 0135 1502 A01 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling tn M values 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 1506 FILTER A01 Filter time constant for Ao1 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 controlled by 0136 GOM VALUE writing to parameter 0136 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling a ts values 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 1512 FILTER AO2 Filter time constant for A02 Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 228 PID Control setpoint source ACS550 User s Manual Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops Drive parameter Value Setting Protocol reference 4010 SET POINT SEL Set 1 4110 SET POINT SEL Set 2 9 COMM AI1 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Trim 10 COMM A11 8 COMM VALUE 1 AM Setpoint is input reference 2 Communication fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost
300. ighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACS550 by its metal chassis frame size R6 by the lifting holes on both sides at the top sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module 1P2002 IP54 UL type 12 As required for access remove the rubber plugs For the IP54 UL type 12 enclosures rubber plugs are required in the holes provided for access to the drive mounting slots Push plugs out from the back of the drive R5 amp R6 Align the sheet metal hood not shown in front of the drive s top mounting holes Attach as part of next step 1 Position the ACS550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACS550 by its metal chassis frame size R6 by the lifting holes on both sides at the top Reinstall the rubber plugs 5 Non English speaking locations Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 18 ACS550 User s Manual Wiring overview Conduit Gland kit Wiring drives with the IP21 UL type 1 enclosure requires a conduit gland kit with the following items e e e e conduit gland box five 5 cable clamps ACS550 01 only screws cover The kit is inclu
301. in 2007 5 The ACS550 01 087A 4 an R4 frame size replaces the ACS550 01 096A 4 discontinued in 2007 6 The ACS550 01 125A 4 an R5 frame size replaces the ACS550 01 124 4 discontinued in 2007 Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 261 Ratings 500 600 V drives Abbreviated column headers are described in section Symbols on page 267 Type code Normal use Heavy duty use Frame ACS550 U1 by PN PN lona Pha Pha ibe see below A kW hp A kW hp Three phase supply voltage 500 600 V Note 1 02A7 6 2 7 1 5 2 2 4 1 1 1 5 R2 03A9 6 3 9 2 2 3 2 7 1 5 2 R2 06A1 6 6 1 4 5 3 9 2 2 3 R2 09A0 6 9 0 5 5 7 5 6 1 4 5 R2 011A 6 11 7 5 10 9 0 5 5 7 5 R2 017A 6 17 11 15 11 7 5 10 R2 022A 6 22 15 20 17 11 15 R3 027A 6 27 18 5 25 22 15 20 R3 032A 6 32 22 30 27 18 5 25 R4 041A 6 41 30 40 32 22 30 R4 052A 6 52 37 50 41 30 40 R4 062A 6 62 45 60 52 37 50 R4 077A 6 77 55 15 62 45 60 R6 099A 6 99 75 100 77 55 75 R6 125A 6 125 90 125 99 75 100 R6 144A 6 144 110 150 125 90 125 R6 00467918 xls B 1 Not available in ACS550 01 series Symbols Typical ratings Normal use 1096 overload capability lon continuous rms current 10 overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes Py typical motor power in normal use The kilowatt power ratings apply
302. in the introduction to this group 6 THERM 1 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital input The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the table above When the digital input is 1 the motor is overheated See the figures in the introduction to this group 3502 INPUT SELECTION Defines the input used for the temperature sensor 1 Ali PT100 and PTC 2 AI2 PT100 and PTC 3 8 DI1 DI6 Thermistor 3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR TEMP For thermistors 0 de activated 1 activated 3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault limit for motor temperature measurement At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and stops the drive For thermistors 0 de activated 1 activated Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS ACS550 User s Manual This group defines the timed functions The timed functions include four daily start and stop times four weekly start stop and boost times four timers for collecting selected periods together A timer can be connected to multiple time
303. ion 1 DI1 Activates de activates jogging based on the state of DI1 D11 activated jogging active D11 de activated jogging inactive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Activates jogging based on the state of DI1 D11 activated jogging inactive DI1 de activated jogging active 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Activates jogging based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 109 Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT This group defines how the drive selects between command sources characteristics and sources for REF1 and REF2 Code Description 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL Selects the reference controlled in local control mode 1 REF1 Hz rpm Reference type depends on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE Speed reference rpm if 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ Frequency reference Hz if 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ 2 REF2 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations ExT1 or ExT2 Thus defines the source for Start Stop Direction commands and reference signals O EXT1 Selects external control location 1 EXT1 See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for EXT1 s Start Stop Dir definitions e See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT
304. ired 15 4 A 0 80 19 25 A Where 0 80 is the derating for 8 kHz switching frequency see section Switching frequency derating on page 262 Referring to gt y in the ratings tables starting from page 259 the following drives exceed the oy requirement of 19 25 A ACS550 x1 023A 4 or ACS550 x1 024A 2 Temperature derating In the temperature range 40 C 50 C 104 F 122 F the rated output current is decreased 1 for every 1 C 1 8 F above 40 C 104 F Calculate the output current by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 C x 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 x gt y or 0 90 x hpg Altitude derating In altitudes 1000 4000 m 3300 13 200 ft above sea level the derating is 1 for every 100 m 330 ft If the installation site is higher than 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level please contact your local ABB distributor or office for further information Single phase supply derating For 208 240 V series drives a single phase supply can be used In that case the derating is 50 Switching frequency derating When using the 8 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 either Derate Pu Pha and lon lona to 80 or Set parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL 1 ON which allows the drive to reduce the switching frequency if when the drive s internal temperat
305. isible scroll the lines with keys A and Cw LOC U HELP external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes EXIT 00 00 After reading the text return to the previous display by pressing 7 LOC UPAR GROUPS 10 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 00 00 SEL How to find out the panel version Step Action Display If the power is switched on switch it off Keep key 2 pressed down while you switch on the power and read the information The display shows the following panel information Panel FW panel firmware version ROM CRC panel ROM check sum Flash Rev flash content version Flash content comment When you release the key the panel goes to the Output mode PANEL VERSION INFO Panel FW X XX ROM CRC XXXXXXXXXX Flash Rev X XX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 46 How to start stop and switch between local and remote control ACS550 User s Manual You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control Step Action Display 1 To switch between remote control REM shown on the status line and local control LOC sh
306. isplayed on the panel 0 Resets the parameter 2905 RUN TIME TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s run time counter Value is compared to parameter 2906 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 2906 RUN TIME ACT Defines the actual value of the drive s run time counter When parameter 2905 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter 2907 USER MWh TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter Value is compared to parameter 2908 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 2908 USER MWh ACT Defines the actual value of the drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours counter When parameter 2907 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2907 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 140 ACS550 User s Manual Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and defines how the drive should respond if the fault is detected Code Description 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION Defines the drive resp
307. isting in section Complete parameter list on page 85 7 3 122 for resolution which indicates the decimal point location and the units of measure 8 Bar meter displayed 9 Decimal point location and units as for the source signal Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 148 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Selects the units used with the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT O NOUNIT 9 C 18 MWh 27z ft 36 l s 45 Pa 54 Ib m 63 Mrev 1 A 10 Ib ft 19 m s 28 MGD 37 z l min 46 GPS 55 Ib h 64 d 2 V 11 lt mA 20 m3 h 29 inHg 38 l h 47 gal s 56 FPS 65 inWC 3 Hz 122 mV 21 dm s 30 lt FPM 39 m s 48 gallm 57 ft s 66 m min 4 13 kW 22 bar 31 kb s 402 m m 49 z gal h 58 inH20 67 Nm 5 s 14 W 23 kPa 32 kHz 41 kg s 50 ft s 59 in wg 6 h 15 kWh 24 GPM 33 ohm 42 kg m 51 f m 60 ft wg 7 rpm 16 F 25 PSI 34 ppm 43 kg h 52 f5 h 61 Ibsi 8 kh 17 hp 26 CFM 35 pps 44 mbar 53 Ib s 62 ms The following units are useful for the bar display 117 ref 119 z dev 121 SP 123 lout 125 Fout 127 Vdc 118 lt Yact 120 lt LD 1222 FBK 124 Vout 126 Tout 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if paramete
308. ive requires drive parameter value set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 8 COMM Ref selected by fieldbus Required only if 2 references used 1103 REF1 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 1supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM AI1 10 COMM AI1 1106 REF2 SELECT 8 COMM Input reference 2 supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM AI Required only if 2 references used 10 COMM AI Note Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the following sections as appropriate Reference scaling on page 236 ABB Drives profile technical data Reference scaling on page 240 Generic profile technical data System control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive parameter Value Description reference 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered par
309. izes the motor for the time defined here and then starts the motor Setthe pre magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization Too long a time heats the motor excessively 2104 DC HOLD CTL Motor 4 Selects whether DC current is used for braking or DC Hold speed lee pala O NOT SEL Disables the DC current operation 1 DC HOLD Enables the DC Hold function See the diagram J A T Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED Stops generating sinusoidal current and injects DC into the motor when both the reference and the motor speed drop below the value of parameter Ref 2105 When the reference rises above the level of parameter 2105 the drive resumes normal operation DC hold Ipa GM E 2 DC BRAKING Enables the DC Injection Braking after modulation has speed stopped If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 COAST braking is applied after start is removed If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 2 RAMP braking is applied after ramp Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 129 Code Description 2105 DC HOLD SPEED Sets the speed for DC Hold Requires that parameter 2104 Dc HOLD CTL 1 DC HOLD 2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 2107 DC BRAKE TIME Defines the DC brake time after modulation has s
310. ko O IEC344 G motor nominal voltage parameter 9905 REM 9 9 0 5 PAR FWD motor nominal current parameter 9906 REM 9 9 0 6 Allowed range 0 2 2 0 long A PAR FWD motor nominal frequency parameter 9907 REM 9 9 0 7 PAR FWD motor nominal speed parameter 9908 REM 9 9 0 8 PAR FWD motor nominal power parameter 9909 REM 9 9 0 9 PAR FWD Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 34 ACS550 User s Manual Select the motor identification method parameter 9910 The default value 0 OFF IDMAGN using the identification magnetization is suitable for most applications It is applied in this basic start up procedure Note however that this requires that parameter 9904 is set to 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ or parameter 9904 is set to 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 is set to 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST If your selection is 0 OFF IDMAGN move to the next step Value 1 ON which performs a separate ID Run should be selected if vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and or the operation point is near zero speed and or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required If you decide to do the ID Run value 1 ON continue by following the separ
311. l Code Description 2601 FLUX OPT ENABLE Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy consumption and noise and it should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load 0 orF Disables the feature 1 ON Enables the feature 2602 FLUX BRAKING Braking Provides faster deceleration by raising the level of torque Rated motor power magnetization in the motor when needed instead of 120 With flux braki D 2 2 kW limiting the deceleration ramp By increasing the flux in ithout fux Braking 2 15 kW the motor the energy of the mechanical system is 3 37 kw changed to thermal energy in the motor 80 Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED OR 2 VECTOR TORQ 0 OFF Disables the feature 1 ON Enables the feature 4 75 kW 2603 IR COMP VOLT IR compensation Sets the IR compensation voltage used for 0 Hz When enabled IR compensation provides an extra Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE voltage boost to the motor at low speeds Use IR 3 SCALAR FREQ compensation for example in applications that require a Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent high breakaway torque overheating 4 Motor Typical IR compensation values are voltage 380 480 V drives Pn kW 3 7 5 15 37 132 IR comp V 18 15 12 8 3 A z IR compensated B No
312. l 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as a fault reset source Activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source See DI1 above 7 START STOP Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source Do not use this option when fielbus communication provides the start stop and direction commands 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The bit 4 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 resets the drive 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a fault reset source De activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source See DI1 INV above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 122 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 1605 USER PAR SET CHG Defines control for changing the user parameter set See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets During a change the drive will not start Note Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings or performing a motor identification Whenever the power is cycled or parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO is changed the drive loads the last settings saved Any unsaved chan
313. l 2 parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Signal 3 parameter 3419 OUTPUTS UNIT 4 Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and LOC maximum display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is a Hz set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameters 3406 and 3407 PAR FWD Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Loc D 0 0 0 Signal 2 parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX B NG Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN and 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX PAR FWD Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 69 Copy mode The Basic Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to two user sets of drive parameters to the control panel The control panel memory is non volatile In the Copy mode you can e copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel uL Upload This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters such as those created by the ID Run restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive dL A Download All This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system copy a partial parameter s
314. l panel if attached to the drive sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter 0308 or 0309 See Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS on page 104 for the bit definitions overrides the control panel display with the display LOC t ALARM of an alarm code and or name in the Fault mode figures on the right ALARM 2008 Alarm messages disappear from the control panel display after a few seconds The message returns periodically as long as the alarm condition exists LOC A2 0 0 8 Correcting faults PANEL LOSS 00 00 FWD The recommended corrective action for faults is Use the table in section Fault listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem Reset the drive See section Fault resetting on page 249 Fault listing The following table lists the faults by code number and describes each The fault name is the long form shown in the Fault mode of the Assistant Control Panel when the fault occurs The fault names shown for Assistant Control Panel only in the Fault Logger mode see page 55 and the fault names for parameter 0401 LAST FAULT may be shorter Fault Fani namen Description and recommended corrective action code panel p 1 OVERCURRENT Output current is excessive Check for and correct Excessive motor load Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections Dia
315. lers and slave devices Modbus is a serial asynchronous protocol Transactions are half duplex featuring a single Master controlling one or more Slaves While RS232 can be used for point to point communication between a single Master and a single Slave a more common implementation features a multi drop RS485 network with a single Master controlling multiple Slaves The ACS550 features RS485 for its Modbus physical interface RTU The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes ASCII and RTU The ACS550 supports RTU only Feature summary The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACS550 Holding Registers Function Code Hex Description Read Coil Status 0x01 Read discrete output status For the ACS550 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Read Discrete Input 0x02 Read discrete inputs status For the ACS550 the individual bits Status of the status word are mapped to Inputs 1 16 or 1 32 depending on the active profile Terminal inputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Input 33 e g DI1 Input 33 Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers For the ACS550 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Multiple Input 0x04 Read multiple input regist
316. local safety regulations appropriate input voltage and the drive s load current In any case the conductor must be less than the maximum limit defined by the terminal size see section Drive s power connection terminals on page 268 The table below lists copper and aluminium cable types for different load currents These recommendations apply only for the conditions listed at the top of the table IEC NEC Based on Based on EN 60204 1 and IEC 60364 5 2 2001 NEC Table 310 16 for copper wires PVC insulation 90 C 194 F wire insulation 30 C 86 F ambient temperature e 40 C 104 F ambient temperature e 70 C 158 F surface temperature not more than three current carrying cables with concentric copper shield conductors in raceway or cable or earth directly buried not more than nine cables laid on cable ladder 4 side by side copper cables with concentric copper shield Max load Cu cable Max load Al cable Max load Cu wire size current current current A mm A mm A AWGikcmil 14 3x1 5 Aluminium cable 22 8 14 cannot be used with 20 3x2 5 frame sizes R1 R5 27 3 12 27 3x4 because of its lower 36 4 10 capacity 34 3x6 50 1 8 47 3x10 68 3 6 62 3x16 86 5 4 79 3x25 100 3 98 3x35 91 3x50 118 2 119 3x50 117 3x70 137 1 153 3x70 143 3x95 155 1 0 186 3x95 165 3x120 178 2 0 215 3x120 191 3x150 205 3 0 249
317. m the control panel REM Drive control is remote such as the drive l O or fieldbus 2 State vU Forward shaft direction S Reverse shaft direction Rotating arrow Drive is running at setpoint Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary arrow Drive is stopped Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present but the motor is not running e g because start enable is missing 3 Panel operation Name of the current mode mode Name of the list or menu shown Name of the operation state e g PAR EDIT 4 Reference value Reference value in the Output mode or number of the Number of the highlighted item e g mode selected item parameter group or fault Operation You operate the control panel with menus and keys The keys include two context sensitive soft keys whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the display above each key You select an option e g operation mode or parameter by scrolling the an and v arrow keys until the option is highlighted in reverse video and then pressing the relevant soft key With the right soft key you usually enter a mode accept an option or save the changes The left soft key is used to cancel the made changes and return to the previous operation level The Assistant Control Panel has nine panel modes Output Parameters Assistants Changed Parameters Fault Logger Clock Set Parameter Backup I O Settings and Fault The operation in the first eigh
318. mable 0 1H CONST SPEED 2 1203 26 RO3A A Default operation 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 1 1 CONST SPEEDIS 1204 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Analog reference Al1 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Actual value Al2 Analog output AO2 Current 9 P Al1 0 10 V Start stop hand PID D11 6 Relay output 1 Ready 9 AI2 0 4 20 mA EXT1 EXT2 selection DI2 Relay output 2 Running or Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 3 Fault 1 J1 Run enable DI5 ET o Al1 0 10 V 207 Al2 0 4 20 mA Note Use the following switch on order 1 EXT1 EXT2 2 Run Enable 3 Start Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 78 PFC macro ACS550 User s Manual This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control PFC applications To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 7 PFC CONTROL Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 OFF Connection example X1 1 10kohm 41 SCR Signal cable shield screen 1 2 JAH External ref 1 Manual or Ext ref 2 PID PFC 0 10 v im 3 AGND Analog input circuit common Note 1 gt Na 10V Reference vol
319. mail info clrwtr com 300 ACS550 User s Manual EFB embedded fieldbus 189 embedded fieldbus actual value scaling 197 see EFB actual values 197 see EFB drive parameters analog output control activate 195 EMC comm fault response 196 CE marking 291 configuration 192 C Tick marking 291 configure for loss of communication 199 motor cable reguirements 274 control interface 189 emergency control WOrd mana paanan exar 209 deceleration time parameter 132 diagnostics ER 198 stop devices 265 drive control of functions activate 193 stop select parameter 129 Dec s seater Minos Prior dus D enclosure Nang aNG Di que E ed protection class code 13 pot code 31 200 OS aa a RR Nood ag maa ag race 289 ault code 32 200 encoder fault code 33 200 parameter group doute eon a paste eu 170 fault tracing parameters 198 enable parameter 170 fault duplicate stations 199 error fault code a aa MOP re ek Mad 246 fault intermittent off line 200 fault parameter AG AN KAG pires i 170 fault no master station online 199 number of pulses parameter l
320. mergency ramp stop mode no op STPMODE C Coast stop mode no op 10 RAMP 2 Ramp pair 2 Ramp pair 1 11 RAMP OUT 0 Ramp output to 0 no op 12 RAMP HOLD Ramp freeze no op 13 RAMP IN 0 Ramp input to 0 no op 14 RREQ LOCALL Local mode lock In lock drive will not switch to local mode OC no op 15 TORQLIM2 Torque limit pair 2 oj S oO gt OF OF S O OF gt oj gt o Torque limit pair 1 DCU profile CONTROL WORD See parameter 0302 Bit Name Value Function Comments 16 26 Reserved 27 REF_CONST Constant speed ref no op 28 REF_AVE Average speed ref no op These bits are only for supervision purposes 29 LINK_ON 4 O Oo Master is detected in link Link is down 30 REQ_STARTINH Start inhibit request is pending Start inhibit request is OFF 31 OFF_INTERLOCK Panel OFF button pressed For the control panel or PC tool this is the OFF button interlock no op Status Word The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual ABB Drives profile 213 The
321. meter and Reference modes 2 RESET EXIT Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed values Resets faults in the Output and Fault modes 3 MENU ENTER Enters deeper into menu level In the Parameter mode saves the displayed value as the new setting 4 Up Scrolls up through a menu or list Increases a value if a parameter is selected Increases the reference value in the Reference mode Holding the key down changes the value faster 5 Down Scrolls down through a menu or list Decreases a value if a parameter is selected Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode Holding the key down changes the value faster LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive DIR Changes the direction of the motor rotation STOP Stops the drive in local control START Starts the drive in local control o oo NIO Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Operation 63 You operate the control panel with menus and keys You select an option e g operation mode or parameter by scrolling the an and X w arrow keys until the option is visible in the display and then pressing the Y7 key With the 7 key you return to the previous operation level without saving the made changes The Basic Control Panel has five panel mod
322. meters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 169 Code Description 4232 CORRECTION SRC Defines the trimming reference for the correction source 1 PID2REF Uses appropriate REF MAX SWITCH A OR B 1105 REF1 MAX when REF is active A 1108 REF2 MAX when REF2 is active B 2 PID2OUTPUT Uses the absolute maximum speed or frequency Switch C 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED if 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ if 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 3 SCALAR FREQ Add Ramped ref R Trimmed ref Switch Select ue se par 4230 Trim scale Mul Mul gt gt y Ext ref 1 max A p off x xX gt I gt Ext ref 2 max B proportional Abs max speed direct Select freq C par 4232 Trimming PID2 ref PID2 ref PID 2 yy Trimming PID2 out Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 170 ACS550 User s Manual Group 50 ENCODER This group defines the setup for encoder use Sets the number of encoder pulses per shaft revolution Enables the encoder operation Defines how mechanical angle and revolution data is reset See also User s Manual for Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 3AUA0000001938 E
323. n according to UL requirements for NEMA Temp rise class motors use the rule of thumb MOTOR THERM TIME equals 100 35 times t6 where t6 in seconds is specified by the motor 63 4 manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at six times its rated current e The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class P 3006 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 141 Code Description 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE Output current relative Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR When set to 100 the maximum allowable load is equal to the value of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 150 Adjust the load curve level if the ambient temperature differs from nominal P3007 100 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD l Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR P3008 50 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ Frequency Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve gt P 3009 Example Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 MOT THERM TIME 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD have default values A lol A p 1 ON 3 0 4 60 s 251 TN lo Output current IN Nominal m
324. n can be twisted into a pig tail Keep the pig tail short to minimize noise radiation X m m 360 grounding under the clamp is recommended 8 m MN for the motor cable to minimize noise radiation In this case remove the sheathing at the cable clamp IP2001 5 Route both cables through the clamps 6 Strip and connect the power motor wires and the power ground wire to the drive terminals ae Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 269 X0005 7 Connect the pig tail created from the motor cable screen to the GND terminal 8 Install conduit gland box and tighten the cable clamps 9 Install the cable clamp s for the control cable s T0 11 12 13 14 15 Power motor cables and clamps not shown in the figure Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail X0006 Route control cable s through clamp s and tighten clamp s Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See section Control terminals table on page 22 Install the conduit gland box cover 1 screw 1P2003 Inst
325. nce C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B value Where e C Main reference value COMM for values 9 10 and AI1 for values 14 17 e B Correcting reference AM for values 9 10 and AI2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where e C 25 e P 4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 e P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 e B varies along the horizontal axis Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 111 Code Description 1104 REF1 MIN A Exirel Sets the minimum for external reference 1 The minimum analog input signal as a percent of the full signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF1 MIN in 009 1 e rus taces este Hz rpm MAX Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference P 1104 1105 REF1 MAX MIN Sets the maximum for external reference 1 P 1301 P 1302 e The maximum analog input signal as a percent of full or 1304 or 1305 the signal in volts or amperes corresponds to REF1 MAX in Hz rpm Ext ref Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 13
326. nce limits the reference value 0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value 9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 0 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter s value supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value supervision low limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION 0 Supervised parameter s value supervision low limit Bit remains 0 until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See Group 32 SUPERVISION 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 EXT2 selected 0 External control location 1 EXT1 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received 0 No External Run Enable signal received 13 15 Unused Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 235 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 No OFF3 OFF2 e FAULT SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 ACTIVE ACTIVE SW Bit4 0 CW Bit7 1 n f 0 I lt 0 V L L From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 SWITCH ON SW Bit1 0 OFF1 MAINS OFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 ACTIVE n f 0 11 0 Power ON CW Bit0 0 gt A B C D NOT READY Lt TO SWITCH on o
327. ncy or torque reference adjust the display contrast start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control EXIT You get to the Output mode by pressing EY repeatedly The top right corner of the LOC t display shows the reference 49 1 Hz value The center can be A configured to show up to three 10 7 96 signal values or bar graphs see DIR 00 00 MENU LOC v 5 OHz HZ 50 0 4 A 24 4 DIR 00 00 MENU page 50 for instructions on selecting and modifying the monitored signals How to change the direction of the motor rotation Step Action Display 1 If you are not in the Output mode press 7 repeatedly until you get there REM V 49 1 Hz 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 2 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local LOC V control by pressing ED The display briefly shows a message about changing 49 H 1 Hz the mode and then returns to the Output mode 0 E 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 3 To change the direction from forward shown on the status line to reverse 3 LOC J shown on the status line or vice versa press CZ 49 1 HZ 0 5 A 10 7 Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 REQUEST DIR 00 00 MENU Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 48 How to set the speed freque
328. ncy or torque reference ACS550 User s Manual Step Action Display 1 If you are not in the Output mode press CZ repeatedly until you get there REM 49 1 Hz 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 2 If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local LOC v control by pressing 5 The display briefly shows a message about changing 49 1 HZ the mode and then returns to the Output mode 0 x 5 A O Note With Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference 10 7 modification in remote control DIR 00 00 MENU 3 To increase the highlighted reference value shown in the top right corner of the LOC V display press A The value changes immediately It is stored in the drive 50 0 HZ permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off 0 5 A O To decrease the value press Cw 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU How to adjust the display contrast Step Action Display i If you are not in the Output mode press 7 repeatedly until you get there LOC V 49 1 Hz 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU 2 To increase the contrast press keys SS and A simultaneously LOC V To decrease the contrast press keys X and XV 2 simultaneously 1 i ing 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User
329. nd connections Parameter that sets the minimum 3022 Parameter that sets the alarm fault operation 3001 2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check Communication lines and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Parameters in Group 10 START STOP DIR and Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is REM 2009 DEVICE OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is hot This alarm warns that a DEVICE OVERTEMP fault may be near R1 R4 8 R7 R8 100 C 212 F R5 R6 110 C 230 F Check for and correct Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load 2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor is hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback This alarm warns that a MOT OVERTEMP fault trip may be near Check Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS 2011 RESERVED Not used 2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region This alarm warns that a MOTOR STALL fault trip may be near Diagnostics Phone 800 8
330. ng Deceleration to zero rating P Type code rcont ACS550 P 3 Pag P 39 P 60 Continuous ON 01 101 R Ruy S3SON lt 10sON lt 30sON lt 60sON gt 60sON see below MAX MN gt 27 s OFF gt 50 s OFF gt 180 s OFF gt 180 s OFF A lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty lt 14 Duty lt 25 Duty gt 25 Duty ohm ohm WwW W Ww Ww Ww Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 03A3 4 641 120 65 120 175 285 1100 04A1 4 470 120 90 160 235 390 1500 05A4 4 320 120 125 235 345 570 2200 06A9 4 235 80 170 320 470 775 3000 08A8 4 192 80 210 400 575 950 4000 012A 4 128 80 315 590 860 1425 5500 015A 4 94 63 425 800 1175 1950 7500 023A 4 64 63 625 1175 1725 2850 11000 1 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds 500 600 V drive Resistance Resistor minimum continuous power rating Deceleration to zero rating P Type code rcont ACS550 Pra Prio Pr30 Po Continuous ON Ul IR Ren lt 3SON lt 10SON lt 30sON lt 60sON gt 60sON see below MAX MN gt 27 s OFF gt 50s OFF gt 180 s OFF gt 180 s OFF 10 Duty lt 17 Duty lt 14 Duty lt 25 Duty gt 25 Duty ohm ohm Ww Ww Ww Ww Ww Three phase supply voltage 500 600 V 02A7 6 548 80 93 175 257 425 1462 03A9 6 373 80 137 257 377 624 2144 06A1 6 224 80 228 429 629 1040 3573 09A0 6 149 80 342 643 943 1560 5359 011A 6 110 60 467 877 1286 2127 7308 017A 6 75 60 685 1286 1886 3119 10718
331. nges resolutions defaults 85 PCU 1 power control unit fault code 249 PCU 2 power control unit fault code 248 PFC IO fault code 249 PFC mode fault code 248 PFC ref neg fault code 248 save changes 122 table version parameter 146 user load curve fault code 249 view parameter 124 parameter mode Assistant Control Panel 49 Basic Control Panel 67 parameter restore Assistant Control Panel 58 Basic Control Panel 69 ACS550 User s Manual parity RS 232 parameter 172 errors count parameter 172 patents iii pn cua Ee hee a 295 PE earth earth fault parameter 141 PE earth connection terminal size 268 tOlqUe s s mona baud px RU EA 268 PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage 23 PFC control parameter group 175 acceleration time parameter 186 aux start order parameter 186 aux motor start delay parameter 177 aux motor stop delay parameter 177 deceleration time parameter 186 enable parameter 185 low frequency parameters 177 TINA GIO be oui 290 eR aha tts Sd eta dca eee ie 78 number of aux motors parameter 17
332. nglish Code Description 5001 PULSE NR Sets the number of pulses provided by an optional encoder for each full motor shaft revolution ppr 5002 ENCODER ENABLE Enables disables an optional encoder O DISABLE Drive uses speed feedback derived from the internal motor model applies for any setting of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 ENABLE Drive uses feedback from an optional encoder This function requires the Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 and an encoder Operation depends on the setting of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED The encoder provides improved speed feedback and improved low speed torque accuracy 9904 2 VECTOR TORQ The encoder provides improved speed feedback and improved low speed torque accuracy 9904 3 SCALAR SPEED The encoder provides speed feedback This is not closed loop speed regulation However using parameter 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO and an encoder improves steady state speed accuracy 5003 ENCODER FAULT Defines the drive operation if a failure is detected in communication between the encoder and the encoder interface module or between the module and the drive 1 FAULT The drive generates fault ENCODER ERR and the motor coasts to a stop 2 ALARM The drive generates alarm ENCODER ERR and operates as if parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE O DISABLE that is speed feedback is derived from the internal motor model 5010 Z PLS
333. nment First environment category C31 category C2 Basic unit na u Frame 1 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 1 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz 1 4 kHz 8 12 kHz filters size m ft m ft m ftm ft m ft m ft m ft m ft m ft R1 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 100 330 100 330 150 490 R2 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 100 330 30 98 200 660 100 330 250 820 R3 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 75 245 75 245 200 660 100 330 250 820 R4 300 980 300 980 300 980 300 980 75 245 75 245 200 660 100 330 300 980 R5 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 100 330 300 980 150 490 300 980 R6 100 330 100 330 3 3 100 330 100 330 3 3 300 980 11502 490 300 980 1 See the new terms in section EC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions on page 292 2 42kHz switching frequency is not available 3 Not tested Sine filters further extend the cable lengths WARNING Using a motor cable longer than specified in the table above may cause permanent damage to the drive Examples for using the table Requirements Checking and conclusions R1 frame size Check operational limits for R1 and 8 kHz gt for a 150 m 490 ft 8 kHz fsw cable a du dt filter is needed Category C2 Check EMC limits gt EMC
334. nnected to the drive or unless additional protection is required by applicable safety regulations See parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT and 3006 MOT THERM RATE The drives are to be used in a controlled environment See section Ambient conditions on page 289 for specific limits Note For open type enclosures i e drives without the conduit box and or cover for IP21 UL type 1 drives or without the conduit plate and or hood for IP54 UL type 12 drives the drive must be mounted inside an enclosure in accordance with National Electric Code and local electrical codes Brake choppers when applied with appropriately sized brake resistors will allow the drive to dissipate regenerative energy normally associated with quickly decelerating a motor Frame sizes R1 and R2 have a built in brake chopper as standard equipment For frame sizes R3 R6 contact your ABB representative for appropriate parts See section Brake components on page 277 IEC EN 61800 3 2004 Definitions EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility It is the ability of electrical electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 293 Likewise the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality First environment includes establishments connected to a low
335. nput reference sel activate 226 FlashDrop installation s oe EQ hp domat 224 application macro parameter 98 PID control setpoint source activate 228 connection 20 PIANNING s se ma acute ee ga hea he 223 parameter view parameter 124 reference 223 floating network relay output control activate oat NO IT system FTD 5 P start stop direction control activate 225 flux braking parameter 137 state diagram ABB drives 235 flux optimization parameter 137 status word 0 0 00 2 2 o oaaao aaa aau 223 force trip fault code 247 status word ABB drives 233 frame errors count parameter 172 frame siZ8 2 ace ane subset kc ets 259 free fall stress testing 290 frequency at fault history parameter 106 max limit parameter 126 min limit parameter 126 motor resolution 271 motor specification 271 switching parameter 138 Index Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 302 fuses 208 240 V drives 264 380 480 V drives 264 500 600 V drives 265 G gain PID parameter 160 generic p
336. ns 5 qualified installer 5 welght kaaa GA sand e REA eU u e ksa 288 wiring wen PPP a teenie PP 22 fault parameter 142 installation 24 installation steps IP21 cables 25 installation steps IP21 conduit 26 installation steps IP54 cables 27 installation steps IP54 conduit 28 overview 18 requirements general 18 XYZ zero pulse detected data parameter 102 enable parameter 170 zero speed delay parameter 130 load fault parameter 141 Index Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
337. nvironmental requirements Ambient environment requirements Installation site Storage and transportation in the protective package Altitude e 0 1000 m 0 3 300 ft e 1000 2000 m 3 300 6 600 ft if Py and hn derated 1 every 100 m above 1000 m 300 ft above 3 300 ft Ambient temperature Min 15 C 5 F no frost allowed Max fsw 1 or 4 40 C 104 F 50 C 122 F if Py and lzy derated to 90 Max fsw 8 40 C 104 F if Py and lzy derated to 80 Max fsw 12 30 C 86 F if Py and hn derated to 65 to 50 for 600 V R4 frame sizes that is for ACS550 U1 032A 6 ACS550 U1 062A 6 40 70 C 40 158 F Relative humidity 95 non condensing Contamination levels IEC 721 3 3 No conductive dust allowed The ACS550 should be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification Cooling air must be clean free from corrosive materials and free from electrically conductive dust Chemical gases Class 3C2 Solid particles Class 392 Storage Transportation No conductive dust allowed Chemical gases Class 1C2 Solid particles Class 1S2 No conductive dust allowed Chemical gases Class 2C2 Solid particles Class 252 Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 290 ACS550 User s Manual The following table lists the s
338. o the stored reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI3U 4D NC above except Uses digital inputs DI5 and DI6 14 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 15 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 16 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 AI2 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 17 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 19 INTERNAL A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides reference 20 PID2OUT Defines PID controller 2 output parameter 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT as the reference source Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 163 Code Description Analog input reference correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value setting Calculation of the Al reference C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 5096 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value
339. ode 246 timed functions V parameter group 152 vector autochange parameter 186 speed mode 98 booster parameter 154 torque mode 98 enable parameter 153 garsona A er d A AA Neo Seed pueda ng SR AERE ew oat P firmware parameter 60 146 start time parameter 153 loading package parameter 146 stop time parameter 153 pana NA se NEO na d zoo timed mode parameter 114 P SIS bani ase SES Index Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 308 ACS550 User s Manual vibration stress testing 290 voltage at fault history parameter 106 rating code 13 voltage freguency ratio parameter 137 W wake up delay PID parameter 165 deviation PID parameter 165 warning automatic start up 6 dangerous voltages 5 disconnecting device disconnecting means 6 ELV Extra Low Voltage 23 EM1 EM3 F1 and F2 screws 6 filter on corner grounded TN system 6 filter on IT system 6 high temperatures 6 Eno ni AA ila rta 5 not field repairable 6 parallel control connectio
340. oes not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation or an ID Run needs to be performed during the drive start up ID Run is essential only in applications that require the ultimate in motor control accuracy POWER UP i j i REM CHOICE Apply input power The control panel first asks if you want to use Be vou Wane Eu the Start up Assistant use the start up Press 25 when REB is highlighted to run the Start up ag a Assistant NO l EXIT 00 00 OK EXIT Press wal if you do not want to run the Start up Assistant iahli x d REM CHOICE Press key cv to highlight fg and then press ss if you want to show Start up make the panel ask or not ask the question about running the assistant on ibus Assistant again the next time you switch on the power to Qa e drive NO EXIT 00 00 OK SELECTING THE LANGUAGE If you decided to run the Start up Assistant the display then asks REM PAR EDIT you to select the language Scroll to the desired language with 9901 LANGUAGE keys 7A K w and press 4 to accept ENGLISH If you press wa the Start up Assistant is stopped a 00 00 SAVE STARTING THE GUIDED SET UP The Start up Assistant now guides you through the set up tasks REM UPAR EDIT starting with the motor set up Set the motor data to exactly the 9905 MOTOR NOM VOL
341. oint e Must be smaller than 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 Defines the torque value of the fourth overload curve definition point 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 Defines the frequency value of fifth load curve definition point 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 Defines the torque value of the fifth underload curve definition point e Must be smaller than 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition point Correspondence with the obsolete underload supervision The now obsolete parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE provided five selectable curves shown in the figure The parameter characteristics were as described below Ifthe load drops below the 7 set curve for longer than 4 Underload curve types the time set by parameter 80 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME obsolete the underload protection is activated 6057 Curves 1 3 reach maximum at the motor 40 7 rated frequency set by 4 parameter 9907 MOTOR 20 NOM FREQ Ty nominaltorqueofthe Lf T T T motor N 2 4 fy fy nominal frequency of the motor If you want to emulate the behavior of an old underload curve with parameters as in the shaded columns set the new parameters as in the white columns in the two tables below Obsolete parameters New parameters Underload supervision with 3013 3014 3701 3702 3703 parameters 30
342. onse if the analog input Al signal drops below the fault limits and Al is used in reference chain e 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits O NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 7 A11 LOSS or 8 AI2 LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2006 A11 Loss or 2007 AI2 Loss and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2006 Al1 Loss or 2007 AI2 LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the analog input signal is lost 3002 PANEL COMM ERR Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error 1 FAULT Displays a fault 10 PANEL LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP 7 Displays an alarm 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays an alarm 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds WARNING If you select CONST SP 7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the control panel communication is lost 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault O NOT SEL External fault signal is not used 1 DI1 Defines digital input
343. otherwise LOC U MAIN MENU 1 by pressing 7 repeatealy until you get to the Main menu PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER 2 Go to the Changed Parameters mode by selecting CHANGED PAR on the LOC U CHANGED PAR menu with keys lt An and S w gt and pressing S KONG D ga 03 CONST SPEED 1204 CONST SPEED 3 9902 APPLIC MACRO EXIT 00 00 EDIT 3 Select the changed parameter on the list with keys Anand SY 7 The LOC U PAR EDIT value of the selected parameter is shown below it Press X to modify the 1202 CONST SPEED 1 value 0 0 Hz CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 4 Specify a new value for the parameter with keys Anand amp w 7 LOC UPAR EDIT Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key 1202 CONST SPEED 1 down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the 5 a 0 HZ displayed value with the default value CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 5 To accept the new value press xc If the new value is the default value the LOC CHANGED PAR parameter is removed from the list of changed parameters 0 CONST HE To cancel the new value and keep the original press je 1504 CONST SDEED 3 9902 APPLIC MACRO EXIT 00 00 EDIT Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Fault Logger mode In the Fault Logger mode you can 55 view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults after a power off
344. otor current 20 4 fo Output frequency 180 s fark Break point frequency 1 5 4 300 s A Trip time 600 s 1 0 ko si 0 5 4 fo fBRK 0 r r 0 02 04 06 08 10 1 2 3010 STALL FUNCTION This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function This protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region see the figure for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME The User Limit is defined in Group 20 LIMITS by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 2018 MAX TORQUE i 2 or the limit on the coMM input Torgue V 0 NOT SEL Stall protection is not used Current 1 FAULT When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME Stall region The drive coasts to stop 95 A fault indication is displayed U 2 ALARM When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set peri by 3012 STALL TIME n An alarm indication is displayed The alarm disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME f 3011 STALL FREQUENCY P 3011 This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function Refer to Stall frequency the figure 3012 STALL TIME This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function 3017 EARTH FAULT Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running Also see parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 0 DI
345. ow ACS550 Modbus reference Supported function codes Control Bits Coils 0xxxx 01 Read Coil Status Relay Outputs 05 Force Single Coil 15 Force Multiple Coils Status Bits Discrete Inputs 1xxxx 02 Read Input Status Discrete Inputs Analog Inputs Input Registers 3xxxxx 04 Read Input Registers Parameters Holding Registers 4xxxx 03 Read 4X Registers Control Status Words 06 Preset Single 4X Register References 16 Preset Multiple 4X Registers 23 Read Write 4X Registers Communication profiles When communicating by Modbus the ACS550 supports multiple profiles for control and status information Parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE selects the profile used ABB DRV LIM The primary and default profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile This implementation of the ABB Drives profile standardizes the control interface with ACS400 drives The ABB Drives profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface It is discussed in detail in the following sections DCU PROFILE The DCU PROFILE profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits It is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment ABB DRV FULL ABB DRV FULL is the implementation of the ABB Drives profile that standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives This implementation supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB
346. own on the status line press 29 Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press ED The result depends on how long you press the key If you release the key immediately the display flashes Switching to the local control mode the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 48 f you press the key for about two seconds the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings To stop the drive in local control press D To start the drive in local control press C45 LOC UMESSAGE Switching to_the local control mode 00 00 The arrow tb or 5 on the status line stops rotating The arrow Vu or 5 on the status line starts rotating It is dotted until the drive reaches the setpoint Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Output mode In the Output mode you can 47 monitor actual values of up to three signals in Group 01 OPERATING DATA change the direction of the motor rotation setthe speed freque
347. p command 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command See DI1 INV above 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 130 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 2112 ZERO SPEED DELAY Defines the delay for the Zero Speed Delay function If parameter value is set to zero the Zero Speed Delay function is disabled The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position No Zero Speed Delay With Zero Speed Delay Speed Speed Speed controller switched off Motor coasts to stop Speed controller remains live Motor is decelerated to true 0 speed lt gt Delay Zero speed delay can be used e g with jogging function or mechanical brake No Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero Speed the speed controller is switched off The drive modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill With Zero Speed Delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit calle
348. p such that the actual value follows the process reference When demand defined by the process reference exceeds the first motor s capacity user defined as a frequency limit the PFC control automatically starts an auxiliary pump The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s addition to total output Then as before the PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference If demand continues to increase PFC adds additional auxiliary pumps using the same process When demand drops such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit user defined by a frequency limit the PFC control automatically stops an auxiliary pump The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s missing output An Interlock function when enabled identifies off line out of service motors and the PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence An Autochange function when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear equalizes duty time between the pump motors Autochange periodically increments the position of each motor in the rotation the speed regulated motor becomes the last auxiliary motor the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor etc Code Description 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference
349. page 259 lists technical specifications and identifies the drive s frame size significant since some instructions in this document vary depending on the drive s frame size To read the ratings table you need the Output current rating entry from the type code Also when using the ratings table note that the table is broken into sections based on the drive s Voltage rating Serial number The format of the drive serial number shown on the labels is described below Serial number is of format CYYWWXXXXX where C Country of manufacture YY Year of manufacture WW Week of manufacture 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 XXXXX Integer starting every week from 0001 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 ACS550 User s Manual Motor compatibility The motor drive and supply power must be compatible Motor specification Verify Reference Motor type 3 phase induction motor Nominal current Motor value is within this Type code label on drive entry for Output long range 0 2 2 0 long or aha drive heavy duty Type code on drive and rating table in chapter current Technical data on page 259 Nominal frequency 10 500 Hz Voltage range Motor is compatible with 208 240 V for ACS550 X1 XXXX 2 or the ACS550 voltage range 380 480 V for ACS550 X1 XXXX 4 or 500
350. page 267 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 22 ACS550 User s Manual Control terminals table The following provides information for connecting control wiring at X1 on the drive X1 Hardware description 1 SCR Terminal for signal cable screen Connected internally to chassis ground 2 JAH Analog input channel 1 programmable Default frequency reference Resolution 0 1 accuracy 1 Two different DIP switch types can be used J1 Al1 OFF 0 10 V R 312 kohm l p gt 9 J1 AI1 ON 0 20 mA R 100 ohm Sp JE AGND Analog input circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 Mohm Q 4 10V_ Potentiometer reference source 10 V 296 max 10 mA 1 kom lt R lt 10 kohm D 2 Al2 Analog input channel 2 programmable Default not used Resolution 0 1 s accuracy t196 Two different DIP switch types can be used J1 Al2 OFF 0 10 V R lt 312 kohm al 9 J1 AI2 ON 0 20 mA R 100 ohm Sp Jt 9 6 AGND Analog input circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 Mohm AO1 Analog output programmable Default frequency 0 20 mA load 500 ohm Accuracy 3 8 AO2 Analog output programmable Default current 0 20 mA load 500 ohm
351. patible with the number of relays allocated to PFC if the Autochange function is used If Autochange function is not used the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to PFC but it needs to be included in this value 8128 AUX START ORDER Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors 1 EVEN RUNTIME Time sharing is active The start order depends on the run times 2 RELAY ORDER The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 187 Group 98 OPTIONS This group configures for options in particular enabling serial communication with the drive Code Description 9802 COMM PROT SEL Selects the communication protocol 0 NOT SEL No communication protocol selected 1 STD MODBUS The drive communicates with Modbus via the RS485 channel X1 communications terminal See also Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 4 EXT FBA The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive See also Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 189 Embedded fieldbus Overview The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the A
352. pecification and Duty cycle lt column specification Find the row that matches your drive The minimum power rating for deceleration to zero is the value in the selected row column Foroverhauling loads double the rating in the selected row column or use the Continuous ON column 208 240 V drives Resistance Resistor minimum continuous power rating Deceleration to zero rating P Type code cont ACS550 Py Pag P 30 P 60 Continuous ON 01 U1 R Run S3SON lt 10sON lt 30sON lt 60sON gt 60sON see below MAX MN gt 27 s OFF 50s OFF gt 180 s OFF gt 180 s OFF lt 10 Duty lt 17 Duty x 14 Duty lt 25 Duty gt 25 Duty ohm ohm Ww Ww Ww Ww Ww Three phase supply voltage 208 240 V 04A6 2 234 80 45 80 120 200 1100 06A6 2 160 80 65 120 175 280 1500 07A5 2 117 44 85 160 235 390 2200 012A 2 80 44 125 235 345 570 3000 017A 2 48 44 210 390 575 950 4000 024A 2 32 30 315 590 860 1425 5500 031A 2 23 22 430 800 1175 1940 7500 1 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 279 380 480 V drives Resistance Resistor minimum continuous power rati
353. pment Note If motor parameters are changed after ID Run repeat the ID Run WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of the nominal speed during the ID Run The motor will rotate in the forward direction Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run See also section How to perform the ID Run on page 39 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 100 ACS550 User s Manual Group 01 OPERATING DATA This group contains drive operating data including actual signals The drive sets the values for actual signals based on measurements or calculations You cannot set these values Code Description 0101 SPEED amp DIR The calculated signed speed of the motor rpm The absolute value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is the same as the value of 0102 SPEED The value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is positive if the motor runs in the forward direction e The value of 0101 SPEED amp DIR is negative if the motor runs in the reverse direction 0102 SPEED The calculated speed of the motor rpm Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The frequency Hz applied to the motor Parameter 0102 or 0103 is shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0104 CURRENT The motor current as measured by the ACS550 Shown by default in the control panel Ou
354. quency 48 63 Hz Imbalance Max 3 of nominal phase to phase input voltage Fundamental power factor cos phi 0 98 at nominal load Cable temperature rating 90 C 194 F rating minimum Disconnecting device for isolation Install a hand operated input disconnecting device disconnecting means between the AC power source and the drive The disconnecting device must be of a type that can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work Europe To meet the European Union Directives according to standard EN 60204 1 Safety of Machinery the disconnecting device must be one of the following types a switch disconnector of utilization category AC 23B EN 60947 3 a disconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the disconnector EN 60947 3 acircuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947 2 Other regions The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations Fuses Branch circuit protection must be provided by the end user and sized per national and local electric codes The following tables provide fuse recommendations for short circuit protection on the drive s input power Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 264 Fuses 208 240 V drives
355. r 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 9 DIRECT 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM Selects the second parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3402 3410 SIGNAL2 MAX Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3403 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter See parameter 3404 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Selects the units used with the second display parameter See parameter 3405 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3406 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3407 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM Selects the third parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3416 SIGNAL3 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3402 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3403 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter See parameter 3404 3419 OUTPUTS UNIT Selects the units used with the third display parameter
356. r example Feedback Parameter s integer resol tion Feedback integer Parameter resolution Scaled value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 1 1 Where parameters are in percent the Complete parameter descriptions section specifies what parameter corresponds to 100 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 198 ACS550 User s Manual For example Feedback Parameter Hoa titan Feedback integer Parameter resolution o integer resolution defines 100 Value of 100 ref 100 Scaled value 10 0 1 1500 rpm 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 50 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Diagnostics EFB Fault queue for drive diagnostics For general ACS550 diagnostics information see chapter Diagnostics on page 243 The three most recent ACS550 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined below Modbus protocol reference
357. r how to check the date of manufacture from the serial number shown on the drive labels For information on reforming the capacitors refer to Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 150 350 550 3AFE68735190 English available on the Internet go to ABB website and enter the code in the Search field Replacement The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors Their life span is from 35 000 90 000 hours depending on drive loading and ambient temperature Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure Capacitor failure is usually followed by a input power fuse failure or a fault trip Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected Replacements for frame size R5 and R6 are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Control panel Cleaning Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window Battery A battery is only used in Assistant Control Panels that have the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel Replace the battery with type CR2032 Note The battery is NOT reguired for any control panel or drive function except t
358. r mode 67 connection specifications 281 reference mode 66 location data parameter 100 Sta VSO 5 1 oa a cure e c ea 64 terminal specifications 282 control word through I O interface 38 ABB drives FBA description 232 EFB description 209 PBA S sad eE ETAS Bawa ded NID Bb abated 222 FBA generic profile 240 Index Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual cooling diagnostics Na NN ora ci ti vee Pee 243 al TloW erc t xx e ace Ret 283 EFB commissas up bx eed ees wee 198 fan maintenance triggers 139 FBA COMM i gapan ah pere ewe eR 229 Neat l088 2 552 d Ves aou eL eade 283 digital cable requirements 282 space requirement 283 digital input copy mode Basic Control Panel 69 at fault history parameters 106 corner grounded TN system 267 connections 22 warning about filters 6 specifications 23 warning about screws atEM1 EM3 20 status data parameter 101 warning about screws atF1 F2 21 digital output correction source PID parameter 169 connections 22 cover specifications
359. rameters 144 see user load curve supply phase fault code 246 undervoltage switching freguency 271 automatic reset parameter 143 control parameter 138 control enable parameter 125 WELL ank a magaya TTE TET 262 ungrounded network baranigtefi io ou sius dr beds NG anan 138 See IT system symmetrically grounded network units PID parameter 161 see corner grounded TN system unknown drive type fault code 248 system controls parameter group 121 unpacking AVE sen DA M Se 12 unsymmetrically grounded networks T see corner grounded TN system user load curve Na derating Cc E 262 parameter group 156 emplate mounting 16 fault code 247 me A wp CE 270 frequency parameters 156 157 erminats function parameter 156 control description 22 mode Barometer PY A EP Pp AA 156 control specifications 282 time parameter XX 0 ad saad kaaa 156 location diagram R1 R4 20 torque parameters 156 157 location diagram R5 R6 21 user parameter set 81 termination 191 change control parameter RNI acts 122 test date parameter 146 download 58 thermal fail fault c
360. rd PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay DIS Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Sixth PFC Relay Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 182 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Free Not allowed DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI3 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 DI6 Free DI4 DI6 Free 2 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 3 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 4 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Free 5 Not allowed DI1 Free DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Fifth PFC Relay 6 Not allowed Not allowed 2 DI2 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI2 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments
361. ready removed See T systems on page 268 and Corner grounded TN systems on page 267 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 21 The following diagram shows the power and ground terminal layout for frame sizes R5 and R6 R5 R6 j 1 J aa bog d 1 F1 i ej e ur ar F2 jo ic m e KJ I Pa wi OOS PE GND nm Power input Power output to motor U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 F1 ODO Filter Connection 1 Optional braking Frame Terminal Brake options nnnnn O6 8n0naommennnn size labels Lay R5 R6 UDC UDC e Braking unit Chopper and resistor X0013 GND Power input Power output to motor U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 WARNING For IT systems and corner grounded TN systems disconnect the internal EMC filter by removing screws F1 and F2 See T systems on page 268 and Corner grounded TN systems on
362. registers Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs Function code 02 Description Read input status 3xxxx Mapping Modbus inputs The drive maps the following information to the 3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input registers e any user defined analog inputs The following table summarizes the input registers Modbus ACS550 Remarks reference all profiles 30001 Alt This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 0 100 30002 AI2 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 0 100 The ACS550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers Function code 04 Description Read 3xxxx input status 4xxxx Register mapping The drive maps its parameters and other data to the 4xxxx holding registers as follows e 40001 40099 map to drive control and actual values These registers are described in the table below 40101 49999 map to drive parameters 0101 9999 Register addresses that do not correspond to drive parameters are invalid If there is an attempt to read or write outside the parameter addresses the Modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual The following table
363. rence to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation O DISABLE Disables DC stabilizer 1 ENABLE Enables DC stabilizer Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 139 Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG This group contains usage levels and trigger points When usage reaches the set trigger point a notice displayed on the control panel signals that maintenance is due Code Description 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG Sets the trigger point for the drive s cooling fan counter Value is compared to parameter 2902 value 0 0 Disables the trigger 2902 COOLING FAN ACT Defines the actual value of the drive s cooling fan counter When parameter 2901 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2901 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 Resets the parameter 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG Sets the trigger point for the motor s accumulated revolutions counter Value is compared to parameter 2904 value 0 Disables the trigger 2904 REVOLUTION ACT Defines the actual value of the motor s accumulated revolutions counter When parameter 2903 has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2903 a maintenance notice is d
364. requirements for Category C2 are met 150 m 490 ft cable vith a 150 m 490 ft cable R3 frame size Check operational limits for R3 and 4 kHz gt a 300 m 980 ft cable 4 kHz fsw cannot be used even with a du dt filter A sine filter must be used and Category C3 the voltage drop of the cable must be taken into account in the 300 m 980 ft cable installation Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C3 are met with a 300 m 980 ft cable R5 frame size Check operational limits for R5 and 8 kHz gt for a 150 m 490 ft 8 kHz fsw cable the basic unit is sufficient Category C3 Check EMC limits gt EMC requirements for Category C3 cannot be T90 ISO a met with a 300 m 980 ft cable The installation configuration is not possible An EMC plan is recommended to overcome the situation R6 frame size Check operational limits for R6 and 4 kHz gt for a 150 m 490 ft 4 kHz fsw cable the basic unit is sufficient S ole not EMC limits do not need to be checked as there are no EMC 150 m 490 ft cable equirements Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 273 Motor cable length for 600 V drives The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for 600 V drives with different switching frequencies As the 600 V drives are not CE approved cable lengths for EMC limits are not given
365. responds to 100 speed or 2007 2008 frequency Torque 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 0 0 2015 2017 torque1 or 2016 10000 par 1108 2018 torgue2 10000 corresponds to 100 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 4112 4113 PID set2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or COMM AI1 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives and DCU profiles Reference Value Al reference scaling setting REF1 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1105 1 l l l l l 100 eS l l l l AH input signal 100 0 5 par 1105 gt T gy 50 10096 Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 219 ABB Drives and DCU profiles Reference stno Al reference scaling REF1 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus reference correction coefficient 20096 i l l l l l 100 5l l l l l Al1 input signal 100 0 5 par 1105 P Apo 50 10095 REF2 COMMtAI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus r
366. rofile FBA actual value mapping 241 actual value scaling 241 overview 240 reference scaling 240 technical data 240 gland kit Ebo a o a ares 18 ground cable wire requirements 266 fault protection 273 H hand auto macro 76 heat OSS voa i 2 anal PP ee rated 283 hood IP54 UL type 12 17 30 how to do common tasks with Assistant Control Panel 44 with Basic Control Panel 63 l I O settings Assistant Control Panel 61 I O control through 38 id run fail fault code 246 parameter asi eee 99 performing 39 identification magnetization 99 IEC ratings see ratings impedance grounded network ACS550 User s Manual integration time PID parameter 161 integration time parameter 133 interlocks parameter 181 internal setpoint PID parameter 163 IR compensation frequency parameter 137 parameters 137 voltage parameter 137 isolation between AC power source and drive 263 IT system connections 268 warning about filters 6 276 warning about screws at EM1 EM3
367. rol The drive fmax uses the normal PFC reference 1106 REF2 SELECT 1 yes Enables Regulator by pass control The process PID regulator is bypassed Actual value of PID is used as the PFC reference input Normally EXT REF2 is used as the PFC reference The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 FBK SEL or 4114 for the PFC freguency reference The figure shows the relation between the control signal 4014 FBK SEL OR 4114 and the speed regulated motor s freguency in a three motor system Example In the diagram below the pumping station s P 4014 outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow A M A gt p pa C 96 Y A No auxiliary motors running B One auxiliary motor running C Two auxiliary motors running Mains 3 Contactors Inlet pipe 8122 PFC START DELAY Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system Using the delay the drive works as follows Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor connecting the motor to the ACS550 power output Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY Starts the speed regulated motor Starts auxiliary motors See parameter 8115 for delay A WARNING Motors eguipped with star delta starters reguire a PFC Start Delay After the ACS550 relay output switches a motor on the star delta starter must switch to the star connection and then back to the delta connection
368. rol the panel display shows text REM STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR O0 OUTPUT FWD n OUTPUT FWD E MOTOR a OUTPUT REV a OUTPUT FWD m 00 a OUTPUT FWD Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 39 How to perform the ID Run The drive estimates motor characteristics automatically using identification magnetization when the drive is started for the first time and after any motor parameter Group 99 START UP DATA is changed This is valid when parameter 9910 ID RUN has value 0 OFF IDMAGN and parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ or parameter 9904 3 SCALAR FREQ and parameter 2101 3 SCALAR FLYST or 5 FLY BOOST In most applications there is no need to perform a separate ID Run 9910 ID RUN 1 ON The ID Run should be selected if vector control mode is used parameter 9904 1 VECTOR SPEED or 2 VECTOR TORQ and or the operation point is near zero speed and or operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque over a wide speed range and without any measured speed feedback is required Note If motor parameters Group 99 START UP DATA are changed after the ID Run it must be repeated ID Run procedure The general parameter setting procedure is not repea
369. rol panel shows fault code 28 SERIAL 1 ERR check for either of the following The master system is down To correct resolve problem with master system The communication connection is bad To correct check communication connection at the drive The time out selection for the drive is too short for the given installation The master is not polling the drive within the specified time out delay To correct increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Faults 31 33 EFB1 EFB3 The three EFB fault codes listed for the drive in chapter Diagnostics on page 243 fault codes 31 33 are not used Intermittent off line occurrences The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with ACS550 serial communication Intermittent problems might also be caused by e marginally loose connections wear on wires caused by equipment vibrations insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the communication cables Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 201 Modbus protocol technical data Overview The Modbus protocol was introduced by Modicon Inc for use in control environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers Due to its ease of use and implementation this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de facto standard for integration of a wide variety of master control
370. rol panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 64 ACS550 User s Manual How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control Step Action Display control LOC shown on the left press 29 Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 OUTPUT LOCAL LOCK 1 To switch between remote control REM shown on the left and local LOC 4 9 1 p Hz FWD After pressing the key the display briefly shows message LoC or rE LOC as appropriate before returning to the previous display L O C FWD The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press D The result depends on how long you press the key If you release the key immediately the display flashes LoC the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 66 If you press the key for about two seconds release when the display changes from LoC to LoC r the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings Text FWD or
371. rst PFC Relay DI5 First PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 2 DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFC Relay DI5 First PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI6 Second PFC Relay DI6 Free 3 Not allowed DI1 DI3 Free DI4 First PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI6 Third PFC Relay 4 6 Not allowed Not allowed 3 DI3 Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input starting with DI3 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled 4 DI4 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI4 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 184 ACS550 User s Manual Code Description 5 DI5 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI5 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignment
372. rt the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated during the pulse in DI2 Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI3 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 6 DI6 Two wire Start Stop Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FORWARD 7 DI6 5 Two wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI5 DI5 activated Reverse de activated Forward 8 KEYPAD Control Panel Start Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 9 DI1F 2R Start Stop Direction commands through DI1 and DI2 combinations Start forward DI1 activated and DI2 de activated Start reverse DI1 de activated and DI2 activated Stop both DI1 and DI2 activated or both de activated Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 10 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start stop and direction commands Bits 0 1 2 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the start stop and direction commands See Fiel
373. running enables external PID control 8 ON Defines the power on as the control for enabling external PID control Activating power to the drive enables external PID control 9 12 TIMED FUNC 1 4 Defines the Timed function as the control for enabling external PID control Timed function active enables external PID control See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the digital input disables external PID control De activating the digital input enables external PID control 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control See DI1 INV above 4229 OFFSET Defines the offset for the PID output When PID is activated output starts from this value When PID is deactivated output resets to this value Parameter is active when 4230 TRIM MODE 0 trim mode is not active 4230 TRIM MODE Selects the type of trim if any Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference O NOT SEL Disables the trim function 1 PROPORTIONAL Adds a trim factor that is proportional to the rpm Hz reference 2 DIRECT Adds a trim factor based on the control loop s maximum limit 4231 TRIM SCALE Defines the multiplier as a percent plus or minus used in the trim mode Para
374. s EFB on page 193 The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data For example Modbus protocol technical data on page 201 Communication set up EFB Serial communication selection To activate the serial communication set parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 1 STD MODBUS Note If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel your drive does not have that protocol software in the application memory Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 192 Serial communication configuration ACS550 User s Manual Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined below In particular note that the station Id may require adjustment Protocol reference Code Description Modbus 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Do not edit Any non zero value entered Contains the identification and program revision of for parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL the protocol sets this parameter automatically The format is XXYY where XX protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Set each drive on the network with a Defines the node address of the RS485 link unique value for this parameter When this protocol is selected the default value for this parameter is 1 Note For a new address to take affect the drive power m
375. s 0 1 s 0 1 s Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS 1601 RUN ENABLE 6 7 1 O NOT SEL Y 1602 PARAMETER LOCK O LOCKED 1 OPEN 2 NOT SAVED 1 1 OPEN 1603 PASS CODE 0 65535 1 0 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 6 8 1 O KEYPAD 1605 USER PAR SET CHG 6 6 1 O NOT SEL 1606 LOCAL LOCK 6 8 1 O NOT SEL 1607 PARAM SAVE O DONE 1 SAVE 1 O DONE 1608 START ENABLE 1 6 7 1 O NOT SEL v 1609 START ENABLE 2 6 7 1 0 NOT SEL Y 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS O NO 1 YES 1 O NO 1611 PARAMETER VIEW O DEFAULT 1 FLASHDROP 1 O DEFAULT Group 20 LIMITS 2001 MINIMUM SPEED 30000 30000 rpm 1 rpm O rpm Y 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 01 1500 rpm Y U1 1800 rpm 2003 IMAX CURRENT 0 1 8 long 0 1A 1 8 long Y 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL O DISABLE 1 ENABLE TIME 1 1 ENABLE TIME 2 ENABLE 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 500 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Y 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 01 50 0 Hz Y U1 60 0 Hz 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL 6 7 1 O MIN TORQUE 1 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL 6 7 1 O MAX TORQUE 1 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 600 0 0 096 0 196 300 0 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 600 0 0 0 0 1 300 0 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 0 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 0 0 600 0 0 1 300 0 Group 21 START STOP 2101 ISTART FUNCTION IVector control modes 1 2 8 1 8 RAMP v Scalar control mode 1 5 8 2102 STOP FUNCTION 1 COAST 2 RAMP 1 1 COAST 2103 DC MAG
376. s always the grounding wires should not form any closed loops and all the devices should be earthed to a common ground Connect the RS485 link in a daisy chained bus without dropout lines Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 191 To reduce noise on the network terminate the RS485 network using 120 Q resistors at both ends of the network Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect the termination resistors See following diagram and table Terminated Terminated station Station Station station 00000 00000 00000 00000 X1 Identification Hardware description 28 Screen RS485 Multidrop application RS485 interface 29 B Positive SCR 28 SCR J2 J2 30 A Negative o A A ON 31 AGND GND 31 AGND ON 2 SCR 32 Screen SCR 3 OFF position ON position T Bus termination GND Connect the shield at each end of the cable to a drive On one end connect the shield to terminal 28 and on the other end connect to terminal 32 Do not connect the incoming and outgoing cable shields to the same terminals as that would make the shielding continuous For configuration information see the following sections Communication set up EFB on page 191 Activate drive control function
377. s are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled DI5 Speed Reg Motor DI6 Free No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI4 Free Not allowed DI1 DI4 Free DI5 Speed Reg Motor DI6 First PFC Relay DI1 DI4 Free DI5 First PFC Relay DI6 Free 2 Not allowed DI1 DI4 Free DI5 First PFC Relay DI6 Second PFC Relay 3 6 Notallowed Not allowed motor Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 6 DI6 Enables the Interlock function and assigns digital input DI6 to the interlock signal for the speed regulated No PFC Autochange disabled Autochange enabled relays 0 DI1 DI5 Free Not allowed DI6 Speed Reg Motor 1 Not allowed Di1 DI5 Free DI6 First PFC Relay 2 6 Not allowed Not allowed Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 185 Code Description 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL Selects Regulator by pass control When enabled Regulator by pass control provides a simple control mechanism without a PID regulator Use Regulator by pass control only in special four applications 0 NO Disables Regulator by pass cont
378. s defined by five points Code Description 3701 USER LOAD C MODE Motor torque Supervision mode for the user adjustable load curves A This functionality replaces the former underload supervision in Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS To P3706 P3709 emulate it see section Correspondence with the P3712 Bin 8 obsolete underload supervision on page 157 P3714 P3717 O NOT SEL Supervision is not active 1 UNDERLOAD Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload curve 2 OVERLOAD Supervision for the torque exceeding the overload curve P3705 3 BOTH Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload curve or exceeding the overload curve ESOS zi Li P3704 P3707 P3710 P3713 P3716 Output frequency Hz Overload area Allowed operating area Underload area 3702 USER LOAD C FUNC Action wanted during load supervision 1 FAULT A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 2 ALARM An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 3703 USER LOAD C TIME Defines the time limit for generating a fault e Half of this time is used as the limit for generating an alarm 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 Defines the frequency value of the first load curve definition point
379. sages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5205 PARITY ERRORS Contains a count of the characters with a parity error that is received from the bus For high counts check Parity settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5206 FRAME ERRORS Contains a count of the characters with a framing error that the bus receives For high counts check Communication speed settings of devices connected on the bus they must not differ Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors 5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the buffer Longest possible message length for the drive is 128 bytes e Received messages exceeding 128 bytes overflow the buffer The excess characters are counted 5208 CRC ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive receives For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors CRC calculations for possible errors Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 173 Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL This group defines set up variables used for an embedded fieldbus EFB communication protocol The standard EFB protocol in the ACS550 is Modbus See chapt
380. sconnect the drive before conducting any voltage tolerance Hi Pot test or insulation resistance Megger test on the motor or motor cables Do not conduct these tests on the drive Motor connection specifications Motor connection specifications Voltage U2 0 U 3 phase symmetrical Umax at the field weakening point Frequency 0 500 Hz Frequency resolution 0 01 Hz Current See section Ratings on page 259 Field weakening point 10 500 Hz Selectable See the availability in the table below 1 4 and 8 kHz 12 kHz 208 240 V All types Frame sizes R1 R4 Switching frequency 380 480 V All types except for Frame sizes R1 R4 ACS550 01 246A 4 only 1 jexcept ACS550 01 087A 4 and 4 kHz and ACS550 U1 097A 4 500 600 V All types Frame sizes R2 R4 Cable temperature rating 90 C 194 F rating minimum Maximum motor cable See sections Motor cable length for 400 V drives on page 272 and length Motor cable length for 600 V drives on page 273 Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 272 ACS550 User s Manual Motor cable length for 400 V drives The table below shows the maximum motor cable lengths for 400 V drives with different switching freguencies Examples for using the table are also given Maximum cable length for 400 V drives EMC limits Operational limits Second enviro
381. ser s Manual 269 Power terminal considerations R6 frame size WARNING For R6 power terminals if screw on terminal lugs are supplied they can only be used for wire sizes that are 95 mm 2 3 0 AWG or larger Smaller wires will loosen and may damage the drive They require crimp on ring lugs as described below Crimp on ring lugs On the R6 frame size if screw on terminal lugs are supplied but the cable size used is less than 95 mm 3 0 AWG or if no screw on terminal lugs are supplied at all use crimp on ring lugs according to the following procedure 1 Select appropriate ring lugs from the following table 2 Remove the screw on terminal lugs if supplied 3 Attach the ring lugs to the drive end of the cables 4 Isolate the ends of the ring lugs with insulating tape or shrink tubing 5 Attach the ring lugs to the drive Wire size MERO ima EN Manufacturer Ring lug E E m S Burndy YAV6C L2 MY29 3 1 lIsco CCL 6 38 ILC 10 2 bi 4 Burndy YA4C L4BOX MY29 3 1 lIsco CCL 4 38 MT 25 1 Burndy YA2C L4BOX MY29 3 2 35 2 lIsco CRC 2 IDT 12 1 lIsco CCL 2 38 MT 25 1 Burndy YA1C L4BOX MY29 3 2 in i lIsco CRA 1 38 IDT 12 1 lIsco CCL 1 38 MT 25 1 Thomas 8 Betts 54148 TBM 8 3 Burndy YA25 LABOX MY29 3 2 T NG lIsco CRB 0 IDT 12 1 lIsco CCL 1 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54109 TBM 8 3 Technical data
382. shDrop device are not visible Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 125 Group 20 LIMITS This group defines minimum and maximum limits to follow in driving the motor speed frequency current torque etc Code Description 2001 MINIMUM SPEED Speed 2001 value is lt 0 Defines the minimum speed rpm allowed P 2002 A positive or zero minimum speed value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range Speed range allowed Time See the figure 0 P 2001 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Speed 2001 value is gt 0 Defines the maximum speed rpm allowed P 2002 Speed range allowed P 2001 0 Time P 2001 Speed range allowed P 2002 2003 MAX CURRENT Defines the maximum output current A supplied by the drive to the motor 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL Sets the DC overvoltage controller on or off Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the DC bus voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the trip limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque by increasing output frequency 0 DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE Enables controller Note If a braking chopper or a braking resistor is connected to the drive this parameter valu
383. signal range See example below The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN MINIMUM AI cannot be greater than MAXIMUM Al These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference e See the figure at parameter 1104 Example To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA Configure the analog input for 0 20 mA current signal Calculate the minimum 4 mA as a percent of full range 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA 100 20 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 Defines the maximum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX See the figure at parameter 1104 TOUS PIETER AM y A Unfiltered signal Defines the filter time constant for analog input 1 A11 The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time na specified 100 634 Filtered signal pi angg Time constant 1304 MINIMUM Al2 Defines the minimum value of the analog input See MINIMUM Al1 above 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 Defines the maximum value of the analog input See MAXIMUM Al1 above 1306 FILTER Al2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 A12 See FILTER Al1 above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 116 ACS550 Us
384. single 4xxxx register 16 0x10 Hex Preset multiple 4xxxx registers 23 0x17 Hex Read write 4xxxx registers Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 208 ACS550 User s Manual Actual values The contents of the register addresses 40005 40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are specified using parameters 5310 5317 Read only values containing information on the operation of the drive 16 bit words containing a sign bit and a 15 bit integer when negative values written as the two s complement of the corresponding positive value scaled as described earlier in section Actual value scaling on page 197 Exception codes Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive The ACS550 supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below Exception Name Meaning code 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported Command 02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The data address received in the query is not allowable It is not a defined parameter group 03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for the ACS550 because it is one of the following Outside min or max limits Parameter is read only Message is too long Parameter write not allowed when start is active Parameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www
385. situations involving chopper shorts Equip the drive with a main contactor Wire the contactor so that it opens if the resistor thermal switch opens an overheated resistor opens the contactor Below is a simple wiring diagram example L1 L2 L3 4 off Pepe Fuses 2 1 3 5 13 3 d Gn e On E gt 259 pose A a 7 Ta i acs550 U1 V1 W1 Ta Thermal switch standard in ABB resistors Parameter set up To enable dynamic braking switch off the drive s overvoltage control Set parameter 2005 0 DISABLE Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Control connections 281 Control connection specifications Control connection specifications Analog inputs and See section Control terminals table on page 22 digital outputs outputs Digital inputs la input impedance 1 5 kohm Maximum voltage for digital inputs is Max contact voltage 30 V DC 250 V AC Max contact current power 6 A 30 V DC 1500 VA 250 V AC Relays Max continuous current 2 A rms cos g 1 1 Arms cos 0 4 Minimum load 500 mW 12 V 10 mA Contact material Silver nickel AgN Isolation between relay digital outputs test voltage 2 5 kV rms 1 minute Cable specifications See section Control terminals table on page 22 Control
386. specification 27 CONFIG FILE 630Fh 28 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510h 29 EFB CON FILE 6306h 30 FORCE TRIP FF90h 31 EFB 1 FF92h 32 EFB 2 FF93h 33 EFB 3 FF94h 34 MOTOR PHASE FF56h 35 OUTP WIRING FF95h 36 INCOMPATIBLE SW 630Fh 37 CB OVERTEMP 4110h 38 USER LOAD CURVE FF6Bh 101 SERF CORRUPT FF55h 102 Reserved FF55h 103 SERF MACRO FF55h 104 Reserved FF55h 105 Reserved FF55h 201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100h 202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100h 203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100h 204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100h 205 Reserved obsolete 5000h 206 CB ID ERROR 5000h 207 EFB LOAD ERR 6100h 1000 PAR HZRPM 6320h 1001 PAR PFC REF NEG 6320h 1002 Reserved obsolete 6320h 1003 PAR Al SCALE 6320h 1004 PAR AO SCALE 6320h 1005 PAR PCU 2 6320h 1006 PAR EXT RO 6320h 1007 PAR FIELDBUS MISSING 6320h 1008 PAR PFC MODE 6320h 1009 PAR PCU 1 6320h 1012 PAR PFC IO 1 6320h 1013 PAR PFC 10 2 6320h 1014 PAR PFC IO 3 6320h 1016 PAR USER LOAD C 6320h ACS550 User s Manual Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 231 Serial communication diagnostics Besides the drive fault codes the FBA module has diagnostic tools Refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 232 ABB Drives profile technical data Overview ACS550 User s Manual The ABB Drives
387. spite of heatsink cleaning If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing Replacement fans are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Frame sizes R1 R4 To replace the fan 1 Remove power from drive 2 Remove drive cover 3 For frame size R1 R2 Press together the retaining clips on the fan cover sides and lift R3 R4 Press in on the lever located on the left side of the fan mount and rotate the fan up and out 4 Disconnect the fan cable 5 Install the fan in reverse order 6 Restore power Frame sizes R5 and R6 To replace the fan 1 Remove power from drive NN 2 Remove the screws attaching the fan j p 3 Remove the fan AZ x5023 R5 Swing the fan out on its hinges 4 R6 Pull the fan out 4 Disconnect the fan cable 5 Install the fan in reverse order 6 Restore power Arrows in the fan show the directions of the rotation and air flow X0022 Maintenance Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 257 Internal enclosure fan replacement IP54 UL type 12 enclosures have an additional internal fan to circulate air inside the enclosure Frame sizes R1 R4 To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R1 to R3 located at the top of the dri
388. state to READY TO OPERATE 4 CW 0000 0000 0000 1111 This CW value changes the drive state to OPERATION ENABLED The drive starts but will not accelerate 5 CW 0000 0000 0010 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED 6 CW 0000 0000 0110 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to OPERATING The drive accelerates to the given reference and follows the reference Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 217 The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits for the ABB Drives profile From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 oe OFF3 OFF2 NN FAULT SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 ACTIVE ACTIVE SW Bit4 0 CW Bit7 1 n f 0 I 0 v L L From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 SWITCH ON a SW Bit1 0 OFF1 MAINS OFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 ACTIVE n f 0 I lt 0 Power ON CW Bit0 0 gt A B C D NOT READY T TO SWITCH on o SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110 OPERATION READY TO tO lt z SW BitO 1 PESO INHIBITED switcH ON o SW Bit0 1 OPERATION INHIBITED CW Xxxx x1xx xxxx x111 L T EL ah SW Bit1 1 OPERATE CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and
389. stem and motor cable capacitance is large This fault can be disabled using parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 36 INCOMPATIBLE The drive cannot use the software SW Internal fault The loaded software is not compatible with the drive Call support representative 37 CB OVERTEMP Drive control board is overheated The fault trip limit is 88 C Check for and correct Excessive ambient temperature Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Not for drives with an OMIO control board 38 USER LOAD Condition defined by parameter 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid CURVE longer than the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 248 ACS550 User s Manual Fault Red naro im Description and recommended corrective action code panel 101 SYSTEM ERROR Error internal to the drive Contact your local ABB representative and report 199 the error number 201 SYSTEM ERROR Error in the system Contact your local ABB representative and report the 299 error number UNKNOWN Wrong type of panel i e panel that supports drive X but not the ACS550 DRIVE TYPE has been connected to the ACS550 ACS550 SUPPORTED DRIVES X Faults that indicate conflicts in the parameter settings are listed below Fault Faultname in Description and recommended corrective action code panel
390. story on panel NO RECORD n Fault code of the last recorded fault The fault code is displayed as a name See section Fault listing on page 244 for the fault codes and names The fault name shown for this parameter may be shorter than the corresponding name in the fault listing which shows the names as they are shown in the fault display 0402 FAULT TIME 1 The day on which the last fault occurred Either as e A date if real time clock is operating The number of days after power on if real time clock is not used or was not set 0403 FAULT TIME 2 The time at which the last fault occurred Either as Real time in format hh mm ss if real time clock is operating e The time since power on minus the whole days reported in 0402 in format hh mm ss if real time clock is not used or was not set Format on the Basic Control Panel The time since power on in 2 second ticks minus the whole days reported in 0402 30 ticks 60 seconds E g Value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds 514 30 0404 SPEED AT FLT The motor speed rpm at the time the last fault occurred 0405 FREQ AT FLT The frequency Hz at the time the last fault occurred 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT The DC bus voltage V at the time the last fault occurred 0407 CURRENT AT FLT The motor current A at the time the last fault occurred 0408 TORQUE AT FLT The motor torque 96 at the time the last fault occurre
391. supply voltage connect power at U1 and W1 To locate input power and motor connection terminals see section Power connection diagrams on page 20 For specifications on power terminals see section Drive s power connection terminals on page 268 For corner grounded TN systems see section Corner grounded TN systems on page 267 For IT systems see section T systems on page 268 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 19 For frame size R6 see section Power terminal considerations R6 frame size on page 269 to install the appropriate cable lugs Fordrives using braking optional refer to the following as appropriate Frame size Terminal Description Braking accessory R1 R2 BRK BRK Braking resistor Braking resistor See section Brake components on page 277 R3 R4 R5 R6 UDC UDC DC bus Contact your ABB representative to order either braking unit or chopper and resistor Wheninstalling control wiring refer to the following chapters or sections as appropriate Control terminals table on page 22 Control connections on page 281 Application macros on page 71 Complete parameter descriptions on page 98 Embedded fieldbus on page 189 Fieldbus adapter on page 221 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clr
392. t 22 connected to 24 Note 1 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable The sensor needs to be powered 26 RO3A _ Default operation See the manufacturer s instructions 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 A connection example of a two wire Fault gt 25 connected to 26 sensor is shown on page 80 Input signals Output signals Jumper setting Two analog references Al1 2 Analog output AO1 Speed J1 Start stop hand auto DI1 6 Analog output AO2 Current 9 Al1 0 10 V Direction hand auto DI2 5 Relay output 1 Ready 9 p gt Al2 0 4 20 mA Control location selection DI3 Relay output 2 Running or Run enable D14 Relay output 3 Fault 1 31 f o Alt 0 10 V n Y0 AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 77 PID Control macro This macro provides parameter settings for closed loop control systems such as pressure control flow control etc To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 6 PID CONTROL Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 OFF Connection example
393. t making changes press CZ EXIT 00 00 SEL To specify the date format select DATE FORMAT on the menu press SI LOC UDATE FORMAT 1 and select a suitable format Press SS to save or wa to cancel your mm yy changes dd mm yyyy mm dd yyyy CANCEL 00 00 OK To specify the time format select TIME FORMAT on the menu press 5 LOC UTIME FORMAT 1 OK CANCEL and select a suitable format Press Ew to save or CZ to cancel your hour changes CANCEL 00 00 OK To set the time select SET TIME on the menu and press Specify the LOC USET TIME hours with keys A and amp w 2 and press Then specify the minutes Press SS to save or tz to cancel your changes 41 CANCEL 00 00 OK Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 57 Step Action SEL To set the date select SET DATE on the menu and press Specify the first part of the date day or month depending on the selected date format with keys Anand SY 7 and press SS Repeat for the second part After CANCEL ipis OK specifying the year press wil To cancel your changes press CZ To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press SS Pressing p opens the help that shows the beginning and end dates of the period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area whose da
394. t modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm You can reset it in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Diagnostics Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 44 ACS550 User s Manual Initially the panel is in the Output mode where you can LOC t start stop change the direction switch between local and 49 1 Hz remote control modify the reference value and monitor up A to three actual values To do other tasks go first to the 10 7 96 Main menu and select the appropriate mode on the menu DIR 00 00 MENU The status line see section Status line on page 43 shows LOC UMAIN MENU 1 the name of the current menu mode item or state PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR How to do common tasks EXIT 00 00 ENTER The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail Task Mode Page How to get help Any 45 How to find out the panel version At power up 45 How to adjust the display contrast Output 48 How to switch between local and remote control Any 46 How to start and stop the drive Any 46 How to change the direction of the motor rotation Output 47 How to set the speed frequency or torque reference Output 48 How to
395. tage 10 V DC Manual 0 10V gt 0 50 Hz D 5 AI Actual signal PID 4 20 mA PID PFC 0 10V gt 0 100 1116 AGND Analog input circuit common PID setpoint lt 7 AO1 Output freguency 0 20 mA HD 8 JAO2 Actual 1 PI controller actual value 0 4 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 410124V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 42 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Manual Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive F 15 DI3 EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects PFC control I 16 D14 Interlock Deactivation always stops the drive I 17 DIS Interlock Deactivation stops constant speed motor _ __ 18 DI6 Start Stop PFC Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable Note 2 20 ROTA x Default operation The sensor needs to be powered 21 ROTB Running gt 19 connected to 21 See the manufacturer s instructions 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable A connection exemple ON A UNO IE 23 ROZA A Default operation sensor is shown on page 80 24 RO2B Fault 1 gt 22 connected to 24 Fault gt 22 connected to 23 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 26 RO3A A Default operation 27 RO3B Auxiliary motor switched on gt 25 connected to 27 Input signals Analog ref and actual Al1 2 Start stop manual PFC DI1
396. tandard stress testing that the ACS550 passes Stress tests Without shipping package Inside shipping package Mechanical conditions In accordance In accordance with ISTA 1A and 1B Sinusoidal with IEC 60721 3 3 Class 3M4 specifications vibration 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in 9 200 Hz 10 m s 33 ft s Shock Not allowed In accordance with IEC 68 2 29 max 100 m s 330 ft s 11ms Not allowed 76 cm 30 in frame size R1 61cm 24 in frame size R2 Free fall 46cm 18 in frame size R3 e 31cm 12 in frame size R4 e 25cm 10 in frame size R5 15cm 6 in frame size R6 Materials Material specifications Drive enclosure PC ABS 2 5 mm color NCS 1502 Y or NCS 7000 N Hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 2 mm thickness of coating 20 micrometers If the surface is painted the total thickness of the coating zinc and paint is 80 100 micrometers Cast aluminium AISi Extruded aluminium AISi Package Corrugated board expanded polystyrene plywood raw wood heat dried Package wrap consists of one or more of the following PE LD plastic wrap PP or steel bands Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstanc
397. ted here For Assistant Control Panel see page 49 and for Basic Control Panel page 67 in chapter Control panels AN De couple the motor from the driven equipment Check that the values of the motor data parameters 9905 9909 are equivalent to those on the motor nameplate as shown in the steps on page 33 If parameter values Group 01 OPERATING DATA to Group 98 OPTIONS are changed before the ID Run check that the new settings meet the following conditions 2001 MINIMUM SPEED lt 0 rpm 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED gt 80 of the motor rated speed 2003 MAXIMUM CURRENT gt ong 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 gt 50 or 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 gt 50 depending on which limit is in use according to parameter 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL Check that the Run Enable signal is on parameter 1601 Ensure that the panel is in local control LOC shown on the left at the top Press key to switch between local and remote control PRE CHECK WARNING The motor will run at up to approximately 50 80 of the nominal speed during the ID Run The motor will rotate in the forward direction Ensure that it is safe to run the motor before performing the ID Run Start up control with I O and ID Run Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 40 ACS550 User s Manual ID RUN WITH THE ASSISTANT CONTROL PANEL Change parameter 997
398. ternate power source for the motor such as a bypass connection is connected no voltage is applied to the output of the drive Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 30 ACS550 User s Manual Reinstall the cover IP21 UL type 1 1 IP54 UL type 12 1 2 2 Tighten the captive screw 3 4 Continue with start up See chapter Start up Align the cover and slide it on Reinstall the control panel control with I O and ID Run on page 31 Align the cover and slide it on Tighten the captive screws around the edge of the cover Slide the hood down over the top of the cover Only needed for UL type 12 installations Install the two screws that attach the hood Only needed for UL type 12 installations Install the control panel Note The control panel window must be closed to comply with IP54 UL type 12 6 Optional Add a lock not supplied to secure the control panel window 7 Continue with start up See chapter Start up control with I O and ID Run on page 31 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 31 Start up control with I O and ID Run The chapter instructs how to perform the start up start stop
399. ters 104 F config file fault code 247 control profile parameter 173 Fl and F2 screws p CRC errors count parameter 173 location ace EL La ae eas fault codes 247 on corner grounded TN system 267 fault function parameter 142 on IT systems Hi Joy 2s fault time parameter 142 baba Ul iari oa ere a Eb tn Fried tace ok messages count parameter 173 fan maintenance 256 257 parameters 173 174 parity parameter 173 protocol id parameter 173 protocol select parameter 187 relay output word data parameter 101 station id parameter 173 status words data parameters 104 status parameter 173 UART errors count parameter 173 values data parameter 101 efficiency utes mad ay ca php abala 282 ELV Extra Low Voltage 23 EM1 and EM3 screws location RP Raa eed ead 20 on corner grounded TN system 267 on IT systems 268 warning 20 267 268 Index Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual fault FBA drive parameters 171 functions parameter group
400. the stop delay C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency C decreases 1 On i Grey path Shows hysteresis if time is reversed the path 1 t backwards is not the same For details on the path for starting 0 see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1 Note 8112 LOW FREQ 1 value must be between 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 1 e 8109 START FREQ 1 8113 LOW FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor See 8112 Low FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor stops if Two auxiliary motors are running e ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit 8113 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8113 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8114 LOW FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor e See 8112 Low FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor stops if Three auxiliary motors are running ACS550 output frequency drops below the limit 8114 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8114 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8115 AUX MOT START D Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit parameter 8109 8110 or 8111 for this time period before the auxiliary motor starts e See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the
401. thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced insulation Protect all circuits connected to the drive s digital and analog inputs Protect against contact and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit Use an external thermistor relay The relay insulation must be rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit The figure below shows alternate thermistor connections At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible leave the shield unconnected Thermistor relay THERM 0 or THERM 1 THERM 0 Thermistor relay Control board N E Control board DIG 24 V DC c DI6 i NE 1 424 VDC A D amp nF l Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 151 For other faults or for anticipating motor overheating using a model see Group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS Code Description 3501 SENSOR TYPE Identifies the type of motor temperature sensor used PT100 C PTC ohm or thermistor See parameters 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL and 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL O NONE 1 1 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses one PT 100 sensor Analog output
402. tion 2 EXT2 selected External control location 1 EXT1 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE External Run Enable signal received Oj Oo No External Run Enable signal received 15 13 Unused Embedded fieldbus Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 214 ACS550 User s Manual DCU profile The following tables describe the STATUS WORD content for the DCU profile DCU profile STATUS WORD See parameter 0303 Bit Name Value Status 0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command 0 Drive is not ready 1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal received 0 No external run enable signal received 2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command 0 Drive has not received start command 3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating 0 Drive is not modulating 4 ZERO SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed 0 Drive has not reached zero speed 5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating 0 Drive is not accelerating 6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating 0 Drive is not decelerating 7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint 0 Drive has not reached setpoint 8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by Group 20 LIMITS settings 0 Operation is within Group 20 LIMITS settings 9 SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter Group 32 SUPERVISION is outside its limits 0 All supervised par
403. tion time parameter 133 run time proportional gain parameter 133 data parameter 100 102 vector speed mode 98 maintenance trigger 139 speed constant parameter group 112 S digital input selection parameter 112 parameters 113 Satetyz ee dana ke terete dead Ven AM 5 stall save changes parameter 122 freguency fault parameter 141 scalar freguency mode 98 function fault parameter 141 scaling LEGION eet PN 141 actual value FBA ABB drives profile 239 time fault parameter 141 actual value FBA generic profile 241 standards d so siu a oe Moura VERA 291 actual values EFB comm 197 22 2 NG ba ides nama matin PAG dad 291 reference EFB ABB drives profile 218 CE marking 422a tt ned ett oed 291 reference FBA ABB drives profile 236 CSA marking ou su serie tar du stem 292 reference FBA generic profile 240 C Tick marking aoaaa itis race Evi 291 screw on terminal lugs 270 EN 50178 uae meae RIT ea 291 S curve ramp parameter 131 IEC 60664 1 291 second environment IEC EN 60204 1 291 C3 compliance with IEC EN 61800 3 293 IEC EN 60529 291 C3 motor cable length
404. to REM does not copy the reference 13 DI5U 6D NC Same as DI5U 6D above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 14 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 15 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 16 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 AI2 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 17 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog input reference correction below 20 KEYPAD RNC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset Changing the control source ExT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to ExT1 does not copy the reference 21 KEYPAD NC Defines the control panel as the reference source A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 does not copy the reference Analog input reference correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value setting Calculation of the Al refere
405. topped if parameter 2104 is 2 DC BRAKING 2108 START INHIBIT Sets the Start inhibit function on or off The Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in any of the following situations a new start command is reguired A fault is reset Run Enable parameter 1601 activates while start command is active Mode changes from local to remote Control switches from EXT1 to EXT2 e Control switches from EXT2 to EXT1 O oFF Disables the Start inhibit function 1 ON Enables the Start inhibit function 2109 EMERG STOP SEL Defines control of the Emergency stop command When activated Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME e Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart O NOT SEL Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command De activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command De activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command Activating the digital input removes the Emergency sto
406. tput AO1 Speed J1 e Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO2 Current Sp Al1 0 10V e Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 1 Ready Q y AI2 0 4 20 mA Ramp pair 1 2 selection DI5 Relay output 2 Running or Run enable DI6 Relay output 3 Fault 1 v1 ET JejA1 0 10 V TI AI2 0 4 20 mA Application macros Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 75 Motor Potentiometer macro This macro provides a cost effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the motor using only digital signals To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 4 MOTOR POT Connection example 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 JAH Not used 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 V DC 5 JAI2 Not used 6 7 8 AGND Analog input circuit common AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 719 JAGND Analog output circuit common r 10 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V DC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start stop Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Forward reverse Activation reverses rotation direction 15 DI3 Reference up Activation increases the reference 16 DI4 Reference down
407. tput mode 0105 TORQUE Output torque Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in of motor nominal torque Shown by default in the control panel Output mode 0106 POWER The measured motor power in kW 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE The DC bus voltage in V DC as measured by the ACS550 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE The voltage applied to the motor 0110 DRIVE TEMP The temperature of the drive power transistors in degrees Celsius 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 External reference REF1 in rpm or Hz units determined by parameter 9904 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 External reference REF2 in 96 0113 CTRL LOCATION Active control location Alternatives are O LOCAL 1 lt EXT1 2 lt EXT2 0114 RUN TIME R The drive s accumulated running time in hours h Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode 0115 KWH COUNTER R The drive s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameters mode 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT Application block output signal Value is from either PEC control if PFC Control is active or Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 101 Code Description
408. trol panel cannot change to LOC mode O NOT SEL Disables the lock The control panel can select LOC and control the drive 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock Activating the digital input locks out local control De activating the digital input enable the LOC selection 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock e See DI1 above 7 ON Sets the lock The control panel cannot select LOC and cannot control the drive 8 coMM Defines bit 14 of the Command Word 1 as the control for setting the local lock The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock De activating the digital input locks out local control Activating the digital input enable the LOC selection 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock See DI1 INV above 1607 PARAM SAVE Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 2 NOT SAVED parameters altered from the control panel are not saved To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1 OPEN parameters altered from the
409. ts defined in section Preparing for installation on page 72 are met 1 Mark the position of the mounting holes with the help of 1 the mounting template provided with the drive 2 Drill the holes X0002 Note Frame sizes R3 and R4 have four holes along the top Use only two If possible use the two outside holes to allow room to remove the fan for maintenance Note ACS400 drives can be replaced using the original mounting holes For R1 and R2 frame sizes the mounting holes are identical For R3 and R4 frame sizes the inside mounting holes on the top of ACS550 drives match ACS400 mounts Remove the front cover IP21 UL type 1 1 Remove the control panel if attached 2 Loosen the captive screw at the top 3 Pull near the top to remove the cover IP2000 Installation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 17 IP54 UL type 12 R6 R1 R5 1 If hood is present Remove screws Ene 2 holding hood in place 1 que Mount the drive IP21 UL type 1 1 Remove the cover Non English speaking locations Add a warning If hood is present Slide hood up and off of the cover Loosen the captive screws around the edge of the cover Position the ACS550 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely t
410. ue is a percent of the motor nominal torque Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 128 ACS550 User s Manual Group 21 START STOP This group defines how the motor starts and stops The ACS550 supports several start and stop modes Code Description 2101 START FUNCTION Selects the motor start method The valid options depend on the value of parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE 1 AUTO Selects the automatic start mode Vector control modes Optimal start in most cases The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor SCALAR FREQ mode Immediate start from zero frequency 2 DC MAGN Selects the DC Magnetizing start mode Note The DC Magnetizing start mode cannot start a rotating motor Note The drive starts when the set pre magnetizing time parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME has passed even if motor magnetization is not complete Vector control modes Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time This selection guarantees the highest possible break away torque SCALAR FREQ mode Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time 3 SCALAR FLYST
411. ur local ABB representative 20 OPEX PWR Internal fault Low voltage condition detected on OINT power supply Contact your local ABB representative 21 CURR MEAS Internal fault Current measurement is out of range Contact your local ABB representative 22 SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high Check for and correct Missing mains phase Blown fuse 23 ENCODER ERR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal Check for and correct Encoder presence and proper connection reverse wired loose connection or short circuit Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range A working and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module OTAC 01 Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR A wrong value will only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is greater than 4 times the rated slip of the motor Encoder is not being used but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE 1 ENABLE Diagnostics Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 247 Pelt Eau namen Description and recommended corrective action code panel 24 OVERSPEED Motor speed is greater than 120 of the larger in magnitude of 2001 MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED Check for and correct Parameter settings for 2001 and 200
412. ure exceeds 90 C See the parameter description for 2607 for details When using the 12 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 either Derate PN Pha and on long to 65 to 50 for 600 V R4 frame sizes that is for ACS550 U 1 032A 6 ACS550 U1 062A 6 and derate ambient temperature maximum to 30 C 86 F and note that the current is limited to a maximum value of lhg or Set parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL 1 ON which allows the drive to reduce the switching frequency if when the drive s internal temperature exceeds 80 C See the parameter description for 2607 for details Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual Input power connections 263 WARNING Do not operate the drive outside the nominal input line voltage range Overvoltage can result in permanent damage to the drive Input power specifications Input power mains connection specifications Voltage U 208 220 230 240 V AC 3 phase or 1 phase 15 10 for ACS550 x1 xxxx 2 400 415 440 460 480 V AC 3 phase 15 10 for ACS550 x1 xxxx 4 500 525 575 600 V AC 3 phase 15 10 for ACS550 U1 xxxx 6 Prospective short circuit current Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current in the supply is 100 kA providing that the input power cable of the drive is protected with IEC 629 appropriate fuses US 100 000 AIC Fre
413. us at fault history parameter 106 min m parare II E tee status word ramp down parameter ABB drives FBA description 233 ramp up parameter 135 EFB comm definition 212 torque control EBA use secet me mist uaa nana 223 parameter group 135 FBA generic profile 240 MACO zoe lesse ead eh pert ep eA 79 stop ramp down parameter 135 parameter group 128 ramp up parameter a usa varese as 135 aux motor PFC parameters 177 vector torque mode 98 aux motor delay 177 ANI us su erre tbt E ps RR d xc Chet in 309 DC brake time parameter 129 trim DC current control parameter 128 mode PID parameter 168 DC current ref parameter 129 scale PID parameter 168 emergency devices 265 two wire sensor connection example 80 emergency select parameter 129 type cedars st adore an O BAN AN Gan 12 13 flux braking parameter 137 function parameter 128 U ile leo DIL MEL LU MDC EE 290 U f ratio parameter 137 pervision parameter group 144 UL CSA markings 292 parameter low limit parameters 144 underload curve parameter selection pa
414. ust be cycled or 5302 must first be set to O before selecting a new address Leaving 5302 O places the RS485 channel in reset disabling communication 5303 EFB BAUD RATE When this protocol is selected the Defines the communication speed of the RS485 default value for this parameter is 9 6 link in kbits per second kbits s 1 2 kb s 19 2 kb s 2 4 kb s 38 4 kb s 4 8 kb s 57 6 kb s 9 6 kb s 76 8 kb s 5304 EFB PARITY When this protocol is selected the Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be default value for this parameter is 1 used with the RS485 communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8 NONE 1 8 data bits no parity one stop bit 1 8 NONE 2 8 data bits no parity two stop bits 2 8 EVEN 1 8 data bits even parity one stop bit 3 8 ODD 1 8 data bits odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE When this protocol is selected the Selects the communication profile used by the default value for this parameter is 0 EFB protocol 0 ABB DRV LIM Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 Note After any changes to the communication settings the protocol must be reactivated by either cycling the drive pow
415. utput frequency Freq 2007 value is gt 0 P 2008 Frequency range allowed P 2007 0 p lime P 2007 Frequency range allowed P 2008 2013 MIN TORQUE SEL Defines control of the selection between two minimum torque limits 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 and 2016 MIN TORQUE 2 O MIN TORQUE 1 Selects 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 as the minimum limit used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used e See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is parameter 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input D11 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value De activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used See DIT INV above 2014 MAX TORQUE SEL Defines control of the selection between two maximum torque limits 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and 2018 MAX TORQUE 2 O MAX TORQUE 1 Selects 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 as the maximum limit used 1 DI
416. value Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 Minimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be converted to an analog output These parameters content and current min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the output See the figure 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX Sets the maximum content value Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will be converted to an analog output 1504 MINIMUM AO1 Sets the minimum output current 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 Sets the maximum output current 1506 FILTER AO1 Defines the filter time constant for A01 The filtered signal reaches 6396 of a step change within the time specified See the figure in parameter 1303 P 1505 P 1511 P 1504 P 1510 P 1505 P 1511 P 1504 P 1510 AAO mA P 1502 1508 A AO mA AO CONTENT P 1503 1509 l l AO CONTENT P 1502 1508 P 1503 1509 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL Defines the content for analog output A02 See AO1 CONTENT SEL above 1508 A02 CONTENT MIN Sets the minimum content value See AO1 CONTENT MIN above 1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX Sets the maximum content value See AO1 CONTENT MAX above 1510 MINIMUM AO2 Sets the minimum output current See MINIMUM AO1 above Parameters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773
417. vate drive control functions FBA Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function The last column in each table below is deliberately blank See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry Start Stop Direction control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires drive parameter values set as defined below fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive parameter Value Description Protocol reference 1001 ExT1 10 COMM Start Stop controlled by fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext1 selected Fieldbus adapter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 226 ACS550 User s Manual Drive parameter Value Description Protocol reference 1002 ExT2 10 COMM Start Stop by controlled fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction controlled by fieldbus Input reference select Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the dr
418. ve and R4 located in front of the drive 1 Remove power from drive 2 Remove the front cover 3 The housing that holds the fan in place has barbed retaining clips at each corner Press all four clips toward the center to release the barbs 4 When the clips barbs are free pull the housing up to remove from the drive 5 Disconnect the fan cable 6 Install the fan in reverse order noting that The fan air flow is up refer to the arrow on fan The fan wire harness is toward the front The notched housing barb is located in the right rear corner The fan cable connects just forward of the fan at the E top of the drive cR Frame sizes R5 and R6 To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R5 or R6 Remove power from drive Remove the front cover Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable Install the fan in reverse order Qr db DI CB Restore power Maintenance Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 258 ACS550 User s Manual Capacitors Reforming The drive DC link capacitors need to be reformed re aged if the drive has been non operational for more than one year Without reforming capacitors may be damaged when the drive starts to operate It is therefore recommended to reform the capacitors once a year See section Serial number on page 13 fo
419. vironment limit 289 shipping limit 289 analog cable requirements 282 analog I O connections 22 specifications 22 analog input parameter group 115 data parameter 101 fault limit parameters 142 filter parameters 115 less than min auto reset parameter 143 less than min fault parameter 140 loss fault codes 245 maximum parameters 115 minimum parameters 115 analog output parameter group 119 content max parameters 119 content min parameters 119 current max parameters 119 current min parameters 119 data content parameters 119 data parameters 101 filter parameters 119 angle mechanical data parameter 102 application block output data parameter 100 application macro parameter 98 application macros see macros arrow Assistant Control Panel 43 assistant Assistant Control Panel Start up ere Oscars Saves NEGA Nman 51 TASKS x ess dott Anan AUNG aman PE Are wo Da 52 Assistant Control Panel see control panel Assistant assistants mode Assistant Control Panel
420. voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly supplying domestic premises Drive of category C2 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment Note A professional is a person or organisation having necessary skills in installing and or commissioning power drive systems including their EMC aspects Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment restricted distribution EMC standard IEC EN 61800 3 does not any more restrict the distribution of the drive but the using installation and commissioning are defined Drive of category C3 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second environment unrestricted distribution Compliance with the IEC EN 61800 3 2004 The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC EN 61800 3 category C2 see page 292 for IEC EN 61800 3 definitions The emission limits of IEC EN 61800 3 are complied with the provisions described below First environment drives of category C2 1 The internal EMC filter is connected 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual
421. w drive is shipped with EM3 removed see section Power connection diagrams on page 20 Frame sizes R5 R6 Remove both the F1 and F2 screws see section Power connection diagrams page 21 Corner grounded TN systems EM1 EM3 F1 and F2 must be out Grounded at the L1 Grounded at the L1 corner of the mid point of a delta delta leg t12 if L2 L3 L3 Single phase L1 Three phase L1 grounded at an Variac without L1 end point solidly grounded neutral L2 I N The screws M4x16 make an internal ground connection that reduces electro magnetic emission Where EMC electro magnetic compatibility is a concern and the system is symmetrically grounded the screws may be installed For reference the diagram on the right illustrates a symmetrically grounded TN system L3 7 pow L2 L3 Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 268 IT systems ACS550 User s Manual WARNING Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals For IT systems an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohm power system Disconnect the ground connection to the internal EMC filters ACS550 01 frame sizes R1 R4 Remove both the EM1 and EM3 screws see section Power connection diagrams on page 20 ACS550
422. wed automatic resets within a trial period defined the trial time The last is reset only if the by 3102 TRIAL TIME value for 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS is 3 or If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit within the trial more time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains stopped Trial time Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control Time panel or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL x Xx Pa Piber BE TIME x Automatic reset Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets See 3101 NUMBER OF TRIALS 3103 DELAY TIME Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart If DELAY TIME zero the drive resets immediately 3104 AR OVERCURRENT Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off O DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault OVERCURRENT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off O DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation 3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off O DIS
423. ween ON periods A Braking ON Time Braking OFF ON time OFF time kat pt l Dut fac ON time k Cycle time x uly cycle Cycle time the peak braking power requirement type of braking deceleration to zero vs overhauling load During deceleration to zero the generated power steadily decreases averaging half of the peak power For an overhauling load the braking is countering an external force gravity for example and the braking power is constant The total heat generated from an overhauling load is double the heat generated from deceleration to zero speed for the same peak torque and ON time Technical data Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 278 Power Deceleration curve Avg braking power overhauling load Avg braking power ACS550 User s Manual Overhauling load curve during deceleration Time to zero Temperature 2x Xe pa ee Time The many variables in the last requirement above are most easily dealt with using the following tables First determine your maximum braking time ON ONyAx minimum braking time OFF OFF m n and load type deceleration or overhauling load Calculate duty cycle ONmax ONyax OF Fin Duty cycle 100 n the appropriate table find the column that best matches your data ONwmax lt column s
424. whether the relay activates when the signal is too low or too high Code Description 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM Selects the first supervised parameter e Must be a parameter number from Group 01 OPERATING DATA e 100 NOT SELECTED No parameter selected e 101 159 Selects parameter 0101 0159 Ifthe supervised parameter passes a limit a relay output is energized e The supervision limits are defined in this group The relay outputs are defined in Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS definition also specifies which supervision limit is monitored LO HI Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal exceeds a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value drops below the low limit Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal falls below a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value rises above the high limit LO gt HI The lowest limit Hi 3203 is active initially and remains active until the supervised parameter goes above the highest limit LO 3202 making that limit the active limit That limit remains active until the supervised parameter goes below the lowest limit Hi 3203 making that limit active Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or
425. wtr com Power connection diagrams ACS550 User s Manual The following diagram shows the terminal layout for frame size R3 which in general applies to frame sizes R1 R6 except for the R5 R6 power and ground terminals J1 Al1 in voltage position Al2 in current position DIP switches for analog inputs two types can be used Diagram shows the R3 frame Other frames have similar layouts Panel connector Digital inputs and 24 V Es voltage output X1 Relay outputs FlashDrop option Power LED green Fault LED red J2 DIP switch for RS485 termination J2 J2 E e uj A j A ON ON off position on position i Power input z l Frame sizes EA E R5 R6 differ See next page EM1 LE PE Optional module 1 Communications RS485 bis Bl ET Optional module 2 Power output to motor NBI U2 V2 W2 Jd EM3 C 3AUA0000001571 Optional braking Frame size Terminal labels Brake options R1 R2 BRK BRK Brake resistor R3 R4 UDC UDC Braking unit Chopper and resistor internal EMC filter by removing On ACS550 01 screws EM1 and EM3 A WARNING For IT systems and corner grounded TN systems disconnect the On ACS550 U1 screw EM1 drive is shipped with EM3 al
426. www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com ACS550 User s Manual 221 Fieldbus adapter Overview The ACS550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACS550 can either receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or becontrolled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Fieldbus controller Fieldbus LN Other devices Connect using either Standard embedded fieldbus EFB at terminals X1 28 32 fieldbus adapter FBA module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx Two basic serial communications configurations are available embedded fieldbus EFB See chapter Embedded fieldbus on page 189 fieldbus adapter FBA With one of the optional FBA modules in the drive s expansion slot 2 the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the following protocols Profibus DP amp LonWorks amp CANopen DeviceNet ControlNet The ACS550 detects automatically which communication protocol is used by the plug in fieldbus adapter The default settings for each protocol assume that the profile used is the protocol s industry standard drive profile e g PROFldrive for
427. ylight saving changes you can select to be followed To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving SEL changes select Off and press wil To enable automatic clock transitions select the country or area whose SEL daylight saving changes are followed and press Ew To return to the previous display without making changes press eZ Display LOC USET DATE ie 03 05 CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC DAYLIGHT SAV 1 EU US Australial NSW Vict Australia2 Tasmania EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC HELP EU On Mar last Sunday off Oct last Sunday US EXIT 00 00 Control panels Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www cirwtr com Email info clrwtr com 58 ACS550 User s Manual Parameter Backup mode The Parameter Backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another or to make a backup of the drive parameters Uploading to the panel stores all drive parameters including up to two user sets to the Assistant Control Panel The full set partial parameter set application and user sets can then be downloaded from the control panel to another drive or the same drive The control panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on the panel battery In the Parameter Backup mode you can copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel UPLOAD TO PANEL This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable
428. ze relay based on input from fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according to the following Par 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 ROS RO2 RO1 0 000000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 000001 1 1 1 1 1 0 2 000010 1 1 1 1 0 1 3 000011 1 1 1 1 0 0 4 000100 1 1 1 0 1 1 63 111111 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 37 TIMED FUNC 1 Energize relay when Timed Function 1 is active See Group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS 38 40 TIMED FUNC 2 4 Energize relay when Timed Function 2 4 is active See TIMED FUNC 1 above 41 MNT TRIG FAN Energize relay when cooling fan counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 42 MNT TRIG REV Energize relay when revolutions counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 43 MNT TRIG RUN Energize relay when run time counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 44 MNT TRIG MWH Energize relay when MWh counter is triggered See Group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG 46 START DELAY Energize relay when a start delay is active 47 USER LOAD C Energize relay when a user load curve fault or alarm occurs 52 JOG ACTIVE Energize relay when the jogging function is active 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 2 what relay output 2 means See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Defines the event

PDF ABB ACS550 -01 & ACS550

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PDF ABB ACS550 -01 &amp; ACS550

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

PDF ABB ACS550 -01 & ACS550